Specifications - Penn State Personal Web Server

03 35 00 Storefront System Alex Zartman

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. REFERENCES 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

EUA 4-6-12 04 05 13 - 1 Masonry Mortar

SECTION 04 05 13

MASONRY MORTAR

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Mortar for unit masonry and stone veneer.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 04 20 00 – Unit Masonry: Mortar for concrete unit masonry.

B. Section 04 43 00 – Stone Veneer: Mortar for natural stone veneer.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASTM C150 – Portland Cement.

B. ASTM C144 – Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.

C. ASTM C207 – Hydrated Lime for Masonry Mortar

D. ASTM C270 – Mortar for Unit Masonry

E. International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council (IMIAC) - Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01 65 00.

B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01 66 00.

C. Protect cement from moisture and humidity

1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Cold Weather Requirements: IMIAC requirements.

B. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 10 degrees C (40 degrees F) prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

Masonry Mortar 04 05 13 - 2 EUA 4-6-12

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Normal – Type I, white color for facebrick and grey color for common brick

B. Mortar aggregate: ASTM C144, standard masonry type; clean dry; protected from dampness, freezing, or foreign matter.

C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S.

D. Water: Clean and potable.

E. Mortar Color: Mineral oxide pigment; chocolate brown color; “Great Stuff” manufactured by Acme Manufacturing Co. Ltd.

2.02 MIXES

A. Mortar for Load Bearing Walls and Partitions: ASTM C270, Type S, using proportion method.

B. Mortar for Non-Load Bearing Walls and Partitions: ASTM C270, Type N, using proportion method.

2.03 MORTAR MIXING

A. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in accordance with ASTM C270.

B. Add mortar color in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Provide uniformity of mix and coloration.

C. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install mortar in conjunction with Sections 04 20 00 and 04 43 00.


A. Field testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01 45 00.

END OF SECTION

Forestry Building / 4-6-12 04 21 00-1 Architectural Brick

SECTION 04 21 00

ARCHITECTURAL BRICK

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Face Brick.

B. Hollow Brick.

C. Thin Brick.


A. Section 04 06 00 - Masonry Mortar

B. Section 04 07 00 - Masonry Grout.

C. Section 04 08 00 - Masonry Reinforcement Systems.

D. Section 04 09 00 - Masonry Accessories.

E. Section 04 81 00 - Unit Masonry Assemblies.

F. Section 05 40 00 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Structural wall backing.

G. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Execution requirements for loose steel lintels and fabricated steel items for placement in this section.

H. Section 06 11 02 - Framing and Sheathing: Structural wall backing.

I. Section 07 26 00 - Vapor Retarders: Vapor retarder membrane placed on interior face of wall insulation.

J. Section 07 27 00 - Air Barriers: Air barrier placed on interior face of wall insulation.

K. Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Product requirements for reglets for flashings for placement by this section.

L. Section 07 65 00 - Flexible Flashing: Product requirements for flexible flashings for placement by this section.

M. Section 07 90 00 - Joint Sealers: Rod and sealant at control and expansion joints.

1.3 ALLOWANCES

Architectural Brick 04 21 00-2 Forestry Building / 4-6-12

A. Allowances: Include under provisions of Section 01200 - Price and Payment Procedures: Allowances. Allowance includes furnishing face brick, hollow brick and thin brick units. Installation is included in this section and is part of Contract Sum/Price.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. ASTM C 216 - Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay or Shale).

B. ASTM C 652 - Standard Specification for Hollow Brick. (Hollow Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale.)

C. ASTM C 902 - Standard Specification for Pedestrian and Light Traffic Paving Brick.

D. ASTM C 1088 - Standard Specification for Thin Veneer Brick Units Made From Clay or Shale.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.

B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods.

C. LEED Submittals: Provide documentation of how the requirements of Credit will be met: 1. Product Data for Credit MR 5.1 and Credit MR 5.2: Submit data,

including location and distance from Project of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest or recovery for main raw material. a. Include statement indicating cost for each regional material and

the fraction by weight that is considered regional.

D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color brick representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.

E. Verification Samples: For each product specified, two samples of four brick each, representing actual product, color, and texture.

F. Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: All primary products specified in this section


will be supplied by a single manufacturer with a minimum of ten years experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: All products listed in this section are to be installed by a single installer with a minimum of five years demonstrated experience in installing products of the same type and scope as specified.

C. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and application workmanship. 1. Construct sample panel at location indicated or directed, and as

follows: a. Size: 4 feet by 4 feet (1.2 m by 1.2 m). b. Include all unit types and sizes to be used, and mortar joint

treatment. c. Obtain Architect's acceptance of sample panel before beginning

construction activities of this section. d. Do not remove sample panel until construction activities of this

section have been accepted by Architect.


A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.

B. Deliver products of this section on pallets, with individual faces protected; keep dry.


A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Acme Brick Company, which is located at: 3024 Acme Brick Plaza ; Fort Worth, TX 76109; Toll Free Tel: 800-792-1234; Tel: 817-332-4101; Email: request info ([email protected]); Web: www.brick.com

B. Substitutions: Not permitted.

C. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01600.

2.2 ARCHITECTURAL BRICK

http://admin.arcat.com/users.pl?action=UserEmail&company=Acme%20Brick%20Company&coid=30100&rep=&fax=&message=RE:%20Spec%20Question%20(04210acm):%20%20&mf=

http://www.brick.com/


A. Regional Materials: Provide materials that are regionally, extracted, processed and manufactured within a radius of 500 miles from Project.

B. Provide brick similar in texture, color and physical properties to those available for inspection at the Architect's office and/or as supplied on the approved sample panel.

C. Shapes: Provide special shapes as required.

D. All brick supplied shall be pre-blended by the manufacturer.

2.3 FACE BRICK

A. Face Brick: ÅSTM C 216 Grade: SW Type: FBS. 1. Modular Size: 3-5/8 inches (92.1 mm) deep, 2-1/4 inches (57.2 mm)

high, 7-5/8 inches (193.7 mm) long. a. Color/Texture: ______________.

2. Ochs Queen Size: 2-13/16 inches (71.4 mm) deep, 2-13/16 inches (71.4 mm) high, 8-5/8 inches (219.1 mm) long. a. Color/Texture: ______________.

B. Face Brick: ÅSTM C 652 Grade: SW Type: HBS. 1. Modular Size: 3-5/8 inches (92.1 mm) deep, 2-1/4 inches (57.2 mm)


2.4 HOLLOW BRICK UNITS

A. Face Brick: ÅSTM C 652 Grade: SW Type: HBS. 1. Size: King Size, 2-3/4 inches (69.8 mm) deep, 2-5/8 inches (66.7 mm)


2. Size: Queen Size, 2-5/8 inches (66.7 mm) deep, 2-5/8 inches (66.7 mm) high, 7-5/8 inches (193.7 mm) long. a. Color/Texture: ______________.

3. Size: Western Queen Size, 2-13/16 inches (71.4 mm) deep, 2-13/16 inches (71.4 mm) high, 8-5/8 inches (219.1 mm) long. a. Color/Texture: ______________.

4. Size: Estate Size, 2-3/4 inches (69.9 mm) deep, 3-5/8 inches (92.1 mm) high, 9-5/8 inches (244.5 mm) long. a. Color/Texture: ______________.

5. Size: Utility Size, 3-5/8 inches (92.1 mm) deep, 3-5/8 inches (92.1 mm) high, 11-5/8 inches (295.3 mm) long. a. Color/Texture: ______________.

6. Size: Closure Size, 3-5/8 inches (92.1 mm) deep, 3-5/8 inches (92.1 mm) high, 7-5/8 inches (193.7 mm) long. a. Color/Texture: ______________.

7. Size 8 by 8 Size: 3-5/8 inches (92.1 mm) deep, 7-5/8 inches (193.7 mm) high, 7-5/8 inches (193.7 mm) long.


a. Color/Texture: _______________.

2.5 SPECIAL SHAPES

A. Provide special shapes as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Special Brick Shapes include 1. Corner angles, arch headers, bullnoses, coping caps, cove headers and

stretchers, radials, shelf angles, sloped sills, soldier corners and watertable units.

2. Angles: a. AN-1 Short Corner Angle. b. AN-2 Long Corner Angle. c. AN-3 Internal Angle Corner.

3. Arches: a. AR-1 Arch Header. b. AR-2 Arch Stretcher.

4. Bull Noses: a. BN-1 Single Bullnose. b. BN-2 Double Bullnose. c. BN-3 Bullnose Stretcher. d. BN-4 Bullnose Corner. e. BN-5 Bullnose on End.

5. Coping: a. CP-1 Coping Cap. b. CP-2 Double Chamfer Coping Cap.

6. Pool Coping: a. PC-1 Pool Coping.

7. Coves: a. CV-1 Cove Header. b. CV-2 Cove Header 90 degree Corner. c. CV-3 Cove Stretcher.

8. Radii: a. RD-1 Outside Radial Stretcher. b. RD-2 Outside Radial Starter. c. RD-3 Inside Radial Stretcher. d. RD-4 Inside Radial Starter.

9. Shelf Angle: a. SA-1 Shelf Angle.

10. Soldiers: a. SD-1 90 degree Soldier Corner. b. SD-2 External Soldier Corner. c. SD-3 Sloped Soldier, SD-4 Sloped Soldier Corner.

11. Sloped Sill: a. SL-1 Sloped Sill.

12. Watertables: a. WT-1 Watertable Header.


b. WT-2 Watertable Corner. c. WT-3 Watertable Stretcher. d. WT-4 Watertable Corner. e. WT-5 Watertable Rowlock. f. WT-6 Watertable Rowlock Corner. g. WT-7 Watertable Sloped Rowlock. h. WT-8 Watertable Sloped Rowlock Corner. i. WT-9 Watertable Convex Rowlock. j. WT-10 Watertable Convex Rowlock Corner. k. WT-11 Watertable Concave Rowlock. l. WT-12 Watertable Concave Rowlock Corner.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.

B. Verify field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.

C. Verify built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work.

D. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

C. Furnish temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent support.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install architectural brick as specified on Section 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies.

B. Install architectural brick in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form bed and head joints of uniform thickness.

D. Lay masonry in bond pattern as indicated on Drawings.

E. Lay masonry with full head and bed joints.

F. Where fresh mortar joins partially set mortar, remove loose brick and mortar,


and lightly wet exposed surface of set masonry.

G. When adjustment is necessary to be made after mortar begins to harden, remove hardened mortar and replace with fresh mortar.

H. Joint Profile: Tool mortar joints to a concave appearance.

I. Joint Profile: Tool mortar joints to a concave V-shaped appearance.

J. Joint Profile: Tool mortar joints to a concave grapevine appearance.

K. Tool exposed joints when "thumb-print" hard.

L. Flush cut all joints not tooled.

M. When pointing, rake mortar joints to a depth of not less than 1/2 inch (12 mm). Fill solidly with pointing mortar in 1/4 inch layers. Tool joints.

3.4 FLASHING

A. Provide flashing embedded in masonry as specified in Section 07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim or Section 07650 Flexible Flashing.

B. Clean surface of masonry from projections, which might puncture flashing.

C. Place through-wall flashing on bed of mortar.

D. Cover flashing with mortar on brick shelf. Lay brick dry on shelf angles and lintels.

E. Lap flashing a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm).

F. Leave flashing projecting from face of wall approximately 1 inch ( 25 mm). Flashing shall be cut back to the face of the wall after inspection.

3.5 WEEPHOLES

A. Provide weep holes in head joints of the first brick course immediately above flashing by placing weeps no more than 24 inches (610 mm) on center horizontally.

B. Keep cavity free from mortar.

3.6 EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Keep clean from all mortar and debris.

B. Locate as shown on drawing.

C. Install backer rod.

D. Install sealant. Prime surfaces if necessary.


3.7 CLEANING

A. Cut out all defective mortar joints and holes in exposed masonry and repoint with new mortar.

B. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses.

C. All cleaning practices and product used shall be in accordance with cleaning products manufacturer's printed instructions.

D. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.

3.8 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products until completion of project.

B. Protect exposed external corners subject to damage.

C. Protect base of walls from mud and mortar splatter.

D. Protect masonry and other items built into masonry walls from mortar droppings and staining caused by mortar.

E. Protect tops of masonry work with waterproof coverings secured in place without damaging masonry. Provide coverings where masonry is exposed to weather when work is not in progress.

F. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

Boucke 4-6-12 04 40 00.21- 1 Limestone

Section 04 40 00.21

LIMESTONE CUT STONE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION - STONE – CUT STONE

A. Dimensional Cut Stone

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Stone Samples: Representative samples of stone shall be submitted for architects' approval.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit cutting and setting drawings indicating sizes, dimensions, sections, and profiles of stones; arrangement and provisions for jointing, supporting, anchoring, and bonding stonework; and details showing relationship with, attachment to, and reception of, related work.

C. Large scale details of anchors, dowels, shelf angles, and other attachment conditions.


A. All stone shall be from a single bed of stratum from a single quarry.

B. Stone and workmanship shall conform to Building Stone Institute, Marble Institute of America, and Indiana Limestone Institute standards.


A. Store and handle stone to prevent damage due to moisture, contaminants, breakage, chipping or other causes.

B. Lift with wide belt-type slings where possible; do not lift with wire ropes.

C. Do not use pinch bars or wrecking bars to handle stone. Do not use equipment that contains substances that might stain.

D. Store stone on wood skids or pallets, covered with non-staining, waterproof membrane.

E. Protect stored stone from weather with waterproof, non-staining covers or enclosures.

Masonry Mortar 04 40 00.21-2 Boucke 4-6-12

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 STONE

A. Stone Type: (select one or more as applicable)

1. Minnesota Stone Dolomitic Limestone

2. Silver Shadow Limestone

3. Colorado Yule

4. Travertino

5. Aspen Red

B. Approved suppliers:

1. Vetter Stone Company

P.O. Box 38, Kasota MN 56050

(507) 345-4568

FAX (507) 345-4777

C: Color: (select one or more as applicable)

1. Glacier Buff Minnesota Stone

2. Northern Gray Buff Minnesota Stone

3. Northern Buff Minnesota Stone

4. Northern Pink Buff Minnesota Stone

5. Minnesota Travernelle

6. Veined Pink Minnesota Stone

7. Northern Gold Minnesota Stone

8. Northern Pink Minnesota Stone

9. Northern Cream Minnesota Stone

10. Golden Buff Minnesota Stone


11. Silver Shadow

12. Colorado Yule

13. Travertino

14. Aspen Red

15. Colonial Gray

D. Finish: (select one or more as applicable)

1. Honed

2. Machine smooth

3. Diamond gang/belt sawn

4. Diamond ground

5. Polish

6. Tapestry

7. Split-rusticated

8. Bush hammer

9. Rockface

10. Special finish (detail)

E. Cut (select as applicable)

1. Fleuri cut (cut horizontally with bed)

2. Veine cut (cut vertically across bed)

2.02 STONE FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate stonework in sizes and shapes required to comply with requirements indicated, including details on drawings and final shop drawings.

B. Comply with recommendations of BSI/MIA/ILI.

C. Cut and drill sinkages and holes in stones for anchors, fasteners, supports and lifting devices as indicated.

D. Cut stone to produce pieces of thickness, size and shape indicated or required and within fabrication tolerances recommended by BSI/MIA/ILI.

Masonry Mortar 04 40 00.21-4 Boucke 4-6-12

E. Finish exposed faces and edges of stone to comply with requirements indicated for finish under each type and application of stone required and to match approved samples.

2.03 MORTAR AND GROUT

A. Meeting or exceeding latest ASTM standards.

B. Setting: Type N mortar or mortar consisting of one part Portland cement, one part hydrated lime or lime putty and six parts sand by volume.

C. Mix in as stiff a consistency as can be worked into joints.

D. Water: Clean, potable, non-alkaline.

E. Chloride: Not permitted.

F. Admixtures: Do not add products that are not specified.

2.04 ANCHORS

A. Anchors and Dowels: Stainless steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Stone shall be brushed free of dust and foreign matter.

B. Wet stone sufficiently to take up surface absorption.

3.02 SETTING DIMENSION STONE

A. Execute dimension stonework by skilled mechanics, and employ skilled stone fitters at site to do necessary field cutting as stones are set.

B. Set stones to comply with requirements indicated on drawings and final shop drawings. Install anchors, supports, fasteners and other attachments indicated or necessary to secure stonework in place. Shim and adjust as necessary.

C. At cavity walls, install weep holes as indicated using plastic or other weep tubes at joints where water may accumulate.

3.03 CLEANING

A. Keep stone work as clean as possible as work progresses. Upon completion clean stone thoroughly with water or detergent and water with a fiber brush. Thoroughly rinse with clean water when complete. Do not use acids or wire brushes.


B. Special consideration and protection shall be provided when brickwork is cleaned above the limestone. Strong acid compounds used for cleaning brick will burn and discolor the limestone.

Project Name / 12-03 / 04-03-12 04 72 00 1 Cast Stone

SECTION 04 72 00

CAST STONE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES - Architectural Cast Stone. A. Scope - Cast Stone shown on architectural drawings and as described in this

specification. 1. Manufacturer shall furnish Cast Stone covered by this specification.


A. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.

B. Section 04 05 13 – Masonry Mortaring.

C. Section 04 05 16 – Masonry Grouting.

D. Section 04 05 19 – Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcing.

E. Section 04 20 20 – Unit Masonry.

F. Section 07 90 00 – Joint Protection.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ACI 318 – Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.

B. ASTM A 185 - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete.

C. ASTM A 615/A 615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Reinforced Concrete.

D. ASTM C 33 – Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.

E. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.

F. ASTM C 595 – Blended Cement

G. ASTM C 1157 – Hydraulic Cement

Cast Stone 04 72 00 2 Project Name / 12-03 / 04-03-12

H. ASTM C 173 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volume Method.

I. ASTM C 231 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method.

J. ASTM C 260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entrained Admixtures for Concrete.

K. ASTM C 270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry.

L. ASTM C 426 – Standard Test Method for Linear Shrinkage of Concrete Masonry Units

M. ASTM C 494/C 494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.

N. ASTM C 618 – Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Concrete.

O. ASTM C 666 – Standard Test Method for Resistance of Concrete to Rapid Freezing and Thawing.

P. ASTM C 979 - Standard Specification for Coloring Pigments for Integrally Pigmented Concrete.

Q. ASTM C 989 – Standard Specification for Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag for Use in Concrete.

R. ASTM C 1116 – Standard Specification for Fiber Reinforced Concrete and Shotcrete.

S. ASTM C 1194 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Architectural Cast Stone.

T. ASTM C 1195 - Standard Test Method for Absorption of Architectural Cast Stone.

U. ASTM C 1364 - Standard Specification for Architectural Cast Stone.

V. ASTM D 2244 – Standard Test Method for Calculation of Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates.

W. Cast Stone Institute® Technical Manual (Current Edition)

1.04 DEFINITIONS

A. Cast Stone - a refined architectural concrete building unit manufactured to simulate natural cut stone, used in Division 4 masonry applications.


1. Dry Cast – manufactured from zero slump concrete. a. Vibrant Dry Tamp (VDT) casting method: Vibratory ramming of earth moist,

zero-slump concrete against a rigid mold until it is densely compacted. b. Machine casting method: Manufactured from earth moist, zero-slump

concrete compacted by machinery using vibration and pressure against a mold until it becomes densely consolidated.

2. Wet Cast – manufactured from measurable slump concrete. a. Wet casting method: manufactured from measurable slump concrete and

vibrated into a mold until it becomes densely consolidated.

3. Specifier Note: Selection of manufacturing method (wet cast, dry cast, machine made) and apparatus shall be made by the manufacturer and not by the purchaser.

1.05 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Comply with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.

B. Samples: Submit pieces of the Cast Stone that are representative of the general range of finish and color proposed to be furnished for the project.

C. Test results: Submit manufacturers test results of Cast Stone previously made by the manufacturer.

D. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturers shop drawings including profiles, cross-sections, reinforcement, exposed faces, arrangement of joints (optional for standard or semi-custom installations), anchoring methods, anchors (if required), annotation of stone types and their location.

E. Warranty: Submit Cast Stone Institute® Member Limited Warranty.

F. Certification: Submit valid Cast Stone Institute® Plant Certification.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications:

1. Cast Stone shall be produced in a plant certified by the Cast Stone Institute®.

2. Manufacturer shall have sufficient plant facilities to produce the shapes, quantities and size of Cast Stone required in accordance with the project schedule.

3. Manufacturer shall submit a written list of projects similar in scope and at least three (3) years of age, along with owner, architect and contractor references.


B. Standards: Comply with the requirements of the Cast Stone Institute® Technical Manual and the project specifications. Where a conflict may occur, the contract documents shall prevail.

C. Mock-up (Optional) Provide full size unit(s) for use in construction of sample wall. The approved mock-up shall become the standard for appearance and workmanship for the project.

D. Warranty Period: 10 years.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 Architectural Cast Stone

A. Comply with ASTM C 1364 B. Physical properties: Provide the following:

1. Compressive Strength - ASTM C 1194: 6,500 psi minimum for products at 28 days.

2. Absorption - ASTM C 1195: 6% maximum by the cold water method, or 10% maximum by the boiling method for products at 28 days.

3. Air Content – ASTM C 173 or C 231, for wet cast product shall be 4-8% for units exposed to freeze-thaw environments. Air entrainment is not required for VDT products.

4. Freeze-thaw – ASTM C 1364: The CPWL shall be less than 5% after 300 cycles of freezing and thawing.

5. Linear Shrinkage – ASTM C 426: Shrinkage shall not exceed 0.065%.

C. Job site testing – One sample from production units may be selected at random from the field for each 500 cubic feet (14 m 3) delivered to the job site. 1. Three field cut cube specimens from each of these samples shall have an average

minimum compressive strength of not less than 85% with no single specimen testing less than 75% of design strength as allowed by ACI 318.

2. Three field cut cube specimens from each of these samples shall have an average maximum cold-water absorption of 6%.

3. Field specimens shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C 1194 and C 1195.

2.02 RAW MATERIALS

A. Portland cement – Type I or Type III, white and/or grey, ASTM C 150.


B. Coarse aggregates - Granite, quartz or limestone, ASTM C 33, except for gradation, and are optional for the VDT casting method.

C. Fine aggregates - Manufactured or natural sands, ASTM C 33, except for gradation.

D. Colors - Inorganic iron oxide pigments, ASTM C 979 except that carbon black pigments shall not be used.

E. Admixtures- Comply with the following:

1. ASTM C 260 for air-entraining admixtures.

2. ASTM C 494/C 495M Types A - G for water reducing, retarding, accelerating and high range admixtures.

3. Other admixtures: Integral water repellents and other chemicals, for which no ASTM Standard exists, shall be previously established as suitable for use in concrete by proven field performance or through laboratory testing.

4. ASTM C 618 mineral admixtures of dark and variable colors shall not be used in surfaces intended to be exposed to view.

5. ASTM C 989 granulated blast furnace slag may be used to improve physical properties. Tests are required to verify these features.

F. Water – Potable G. Reinforcing bars:

1. ASTM A 615/A 615M: Grade 40 or 60 steel galvanized or epoxy coated when cover is less than 1.5 in.

2. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185 where applicable for wet cast units.

H. Fiber reinforcement (optional): ASTM C 1116

I. All anchors, dowels and other anchoring devices and shims shall be standard building stone anchors commercially available in a non-corrosive material such as zinc plated, galvanized steel, brass, or stainless steel Type 302 or 304.

2.03 COLOR AND FINISH

A. Match sample on file in architect’s office.

B. All surfaces intended to be exposed to view shall have a fine-grained texture similar to natural stone, with no air voids in excess of 1/32 in. and the density of such voids shall be


less than 3 occurrences per any 1 in.2 and not obvious under direct daylight illumination at a 5 ft distance.

C. Units shall exhibit a texture approximately equal to the approved sample when viewed under direct daylight illumination at a 10 ft distance.

1. ASTM D 2244 permissible variation in color between units of comparable age subjected to similar weathering exposure. a. Total color difference – not greater than 6 units.

b. Total hue difference – not greater than 2 units.

D. Minor chipping resulting from shipment and delivery shall not be grounds for rejection. Minor chips shall not be obvious under direct daylight illumination from a 20-ft distance.

E. The occurrence of crazing or efflorescence shall not constitute a cause for rejection.

F. Remove cement film, if required, from exposed surfaces prior to packaging for shipment.

2.04 REINFORCING

A. Reinforce the units as required by the drawings and for safe handling and structural stress.

B. Minimum reinforcing shall be 0.25 percent of the cross section area.

C. Reinforcement shall be noncorrosive where faces exposed to weather are covered with less than 1.5 in. of concrete material. All reinforcement shall have minimum coverage of twice the diameter of the bars.

D. Panels, soffits and similar stones greater than 24 in. (600 mm) in one direction shall be reinforced in that direction. Units less than 24 in. (600 mm) in both their length and width dimension shall be non-reinforced unless otherwise specified.

E. Welded wire fabric reinforcing shall not be used in dry cast products.

2.05 CURING

A. Cure units in a warm curing chamber approximately 100ºF (37.8ºC) at 95 percent relative humidity for approximately 12 hours, or cure in a 95 percent moist environment at a minimum 70ºF (21.1ºC) for 16 hours after casting. Additional yard curing at 95 percent relative humidity shall be 350 degree-days (i.e. 7 days @ 50°F (10°C) or 5 days @ 70°F (21°C)) prior to shipping. Form cured units shall be protected from moisture evaporation with curing blankets or curing compounds after casting.


2.06 MANUFACTURING TOLERANCES

A. Cross section dimensions shall not deviate by more than ±1/8 in. from approved dimensions.

B. Length of units shall not deviate by more than length/ 360 or ±1/8 in., whichever is greater, not to exceed ±1/4 in.

1. Maximum length of any unit shall not exceed 15 times the average thickness of such unit unless otherwise agreed by the manufacturer.

C. Warp, bow or twist of units shall not exceed length/ 360 or ±1/8 in., whichever is greater.

D. Location of dowel holes, anchor slots, flashing grooves, false joints and similar features – On formed sides of unit, 1/8 in., on unformed sides of unit, 3/8 in. maximum deviation.

2.07 PRODUCTION QAULITY CONTROL

A. Testing.

1. Test compressive strength and absorption from specimens taken from every 500 cubic feet of product produced.

2. Perform tests in accordance ASTM C 1194 and C 1195.

3. Have tests performed by an independent testing laboratory every six months.

4. New and existing mix designs shall be tested for strength and absorption compliance prior to producing units.

5. Retain copies of all test reports for a minimum of two years.

2.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Mark production units with the identification marks as shown on the shop drawings.

B. Package units and protect them from staining or damage during shipping and storage.

C. Provide an itemized list of product to support the bill of lading.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION


A. Installing contractor shall check Cast Stone materials for fit and finish prior to installation. Unacceptable units shall not be set.

3.02 SETTING TOLERANCES

A. Comply with Cast Stone Institute® Technical Manual.

B. Set stones 1/8 in. or less, within the plane of adjacent units.

C. Joints, plus - 1/16 in., minus - 1/8 in.

3.03 JOINTING

A. Joint size:

1. At stone/brick joints 3/8 in.

2. At stone/stone joints in vertical position 1/4 in. (3/8 in. optional).

3. Stone/stone joints exposed on top 3/8 in.

B. Joint materials:

1. Mortar, Type N, ASTM C 270.

2. Use a full bed of mortar at all bed joints.

3. Flush vertical joints full with mortar.

4. Leave all joints with exposed tops or under relieving angles open for sealant.

5. Leave head joints in copings and projecting components open for sealant.

C. Location of joints:

1. As shown on shop drawings.

2. At control and expansion joints unless otherwise shown.

3.04 SETTING

A. Drench units with clean water prior to setting.

B. Fill dowel holes and anchor slots completely with mortar or non-shrink grout.

C. Set units in full bed of mortar, unless otherwise detailed.


D. Rake mortar joints 3/4 in. in for pointing.

E. Remove excess mortar from unit faces immediately after setting.

F. Tuck point unit joints to a slight concave profile.

3.05 JOINT PROTECTION

A. Comply with requirements of Section 07 90 00.

B. Prime ends of units, insert properly sized backing rod and install required sealant.

3.06 REPAIR AND CLEANING

A. Repair chips with touchup materials furnished by manufacturer.

B. Saturate units to be cleaned prior to applying an approved masonry cleaner.

C. Consult with manufacturer for appropriate cleaners

3.07 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE

A. Inspect finished installation according to Cast Stone Institute® Technical Bulletin #36.

B. Do not field apply water repellent until repair, cleaning, inspection and acceptance is completed.

3.08 WATER REPELLENT (Optional)

A. Apply water repellent in accordance with Cast Stone Institute® Technical Bulletin #35 or water repellent manufacturer’s directions.

Child Care Building /4-6-12 05720 – 1 Aluminum Glass Panel Railing

SECTION 05720

ALUMINUM GLASS PANEL RAILING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDEDA. Furnish and install aluminum glass panel railings and components.

1.02 WORK FURNISHED BUT INSTALLED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS

A. Furnish [anchors] [fabrications] to be cast in concrete to Section [03000 – Concrete] [03300 - Cast-in- Place Concrete].

B. Furnish post-layout for embeds [supplied by railing manufacturer] [provided by others].

C. Furnish [anchors] [fabrications] for embedding in masonry to Section [04200 - Masonry Unit System] [________________]

1.03 RELATED WORK

A. Section 03000 - Concrete:

B. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete:

C. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry Systems: Grout

D. Section 05030 - Metal Finishes:

E. Section 05510 - Metal Stairs: Handrailing at Stairs

F. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry:

G. Section 08800 - Glazing: Glass; Plastic Glazing; Glazing Accessories

H. Section 09900 - Painting: Paint Finish

1.04 REFERENCES

A. Aluminum Association (AA)

1. ASD-1 Aluminum Standards and Data

2. DAF-45 Designation System for Aluminum Finishes

B. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA)

1. AAMA 2605-98: Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.

2. AAMA 2604-98: Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.

3. AAMA 2603-98: Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.


C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

1. A21 .1 Safety Requirements for Floor and Wall Openings, Railings and Toe Boards.

D. A58.1 Minimum Design Loads in Buildings and Other Structures.

E. Al 17.1 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities.

F. Z97.1 Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings.

2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

a. B 221 Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Bars, Rods, Wires, Shapes and Tubes.

b. B 429 Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube.

c. D 1730 Recommended Practices for Preparation of Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Surfaces for Painting.

d. C 1048 Standard Specification for Heat Treated Glass Kind HS, Kind FT - Coated and Uncoated.

e. E 894 Standard Test Methods for Anchorage of Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings.

f. E 935 Standard Test Methods for Performance of Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings.

g. E 985 Specification for Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings.

3. Military Specifications (MIL)

a. MIL-A-46104 Aluminum Alloy Extruded Rod, Bar, and Shapes, 7001.

b. MIL-P-1144 Pipe, Corrosion Resistant, Stainless Steel, Seamless or Welded.

c. MIL-P-25995 Pipe, Aluminum Alloy, Drawn or Extruded.

d. MIL-R-36516 Rail, Restraint.

4. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM)

a. Metal Finishes Manual

b. Pipe Railing Manual

c. Stair Manual

5. National Ornamental and Miscellaneous Metals Association (NOMMA)


1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Infill Area of Guardrail Systems: Capable of withstanding the following loads applied as indicated: Concentrated load of 25 pounds per square foot applied horizontally at right angles over the entire tributary area, including openings and spaces between rails. Reactions due to the above load need not be combined with those loads on the toprail of guardrail system. Wind loads as required by U.B.C.

B. Handrails: The mounting of handrails shall be such that the completed handrail and supporting structure are capable of withstanding the following loads applied as indicated: Concentrated load of 200 pounds applied in any direction at any point on the handrail. These loads shall not be assumed to act cumulatively with those loads on the infill area of guardrail system.

C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient temperature in engineering, fabricating, and installing of joints, overstressing of components and connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculations on actual surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss.

1.06 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section [__________].

B. Indicate component details, materials, finishes, connection and joining methods, and the relationship to adjoining work.

C. Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions under provisions of Section [__________].


B. Deliver materials to the job site in good condition and properly protected against damage to finished surfaces.

C. Storage on site: Store material in a location and in a manner to avoid damage. Stacking shall be done in a way that will prevent bending. Store material in a clean, dry location away from uncured concrete and masonry. Cover with waterproof paper, tarpaulin, or polyethylene sheeting in a manner that will permit circulation of air inside the covering.

D. Keep handling on site to a minimum. Exercise particular care to avoid damage to finishes of material.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide handrails and railing systems by one of the following:

1. Aluminum Ornamental Railing Systems:a. ALUMINUM TUBE RAILINGS manufactured by:

2.02 METALS

A. General: Provide metal free from surface blemishes where exposed to view in the finished unit. Exposed-to-view surfaces exhibiting pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, or other imperfections on finished units are not acceptable.

B. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use


and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability properties of the alloy and temper designated below for each aluminum form required:

1. Extruded Bar and Tube: ASTM B 221, Alloys 6005-T6, 6061-T6 and 6063-T6.

2. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube: ASTM 429, Alloy 6063-T6

3. Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloys 6061-T6 and 6063-T6.

4. Castings: ASTM B 26, A356-T6. Page 3 of 7 05720-3

2.03 RAILING SYSTEM

A. Material shall conform to 2.02 and be finished in accordance with 2.07.

B. Railing system shall be [permanently anchored] [removable].

C. Top Rails

1. Fabricate Top Rails from [anodized] [painted] aluminum tube with nominal size of [____ in. w x _____ in. h, Part Number _____]

2. Include [flat] [rounded] closure.

D. Mid Rails

1. Fabricate Mid Rails from [anodized] [painted] aluminum tube with nominal size of [____ in. w x _____ in. h, Part Number _____]

2. [Include] [Exclude] closure.

E. Bottom Rails

1. Fabricate Bottom Rail from [anodized] [painted] aluminum tube with nominal size of [____ in. w x _____ in. h, Part Number _____]

2. [Include] [Exclude] closure.

F. Posts

1. Fabricate posts from [anodized] [painted] aluminum tube with a nominal size of [____ in. w x _____ in. h, Part Number _____]

2. If required, provide post reinforcement to meet loading criteria.

G. Connection Splices 1. Internal connection splices shall be of extruded aluminum. I. Mounting Base Plates

2. Base plates shall be of aluminum attached to ends of Posts by means of mechanical attachment.

Screws shall be of [stainless] [galvanized] [cadmium plated] steel flat socket head machine screws.

H. Glass Panel1. 1/4 in. clear tempered glass panels with polished vertical edges and mounted with


1/2 in. maximum air gap between vertical edge of glass and post.

2.04 FASTENERS

A. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of the type, grade, and class required to produce connections that are suitable for anchoring railing to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.1. For aluminum railings, provide fasteners fabricated from cadmium plated or type 304 stainless steel.

B. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components: Use fasteners of same basic metal as the fastened metal, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are corrosive or incompatible with materials joined.

C. Cast-in-Place and Post-Installed Anchors: Anchors of type indicated below, fabricated from corrosion- resistant materials with capability to sustain, without failure, the loads determined by local code requirements.

2.05 GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT

A. Non-shrink, Non-metallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, non-shrink, non-metallic, non-staining, non-corrosive grout. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. Minimum 28 day compressive strength of _______ psi.

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Erosion-Resistant Anchoring Cement:

2.06 FABRICATION

A. Make exposed joints butt tight and flush.

B. Close exposed visible ends of Toprails and Handrails by use of flat end cap.

C. Locate [mid rails] [4 in. max.] [_____ in. max.] clearance below Top Rail.

D. Locate [bottom rails] [4 in. max.] [_____ in. max.] clearance above finished adjacent mounting surface.

E. Verify dimensions on site prior to shop fabrication.

. 2.07 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Comply with NAAMM “Metal Finishes Manual” for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage per manufacturer’s recommendations.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: (add notes as required)

2.08 ALUMINUM FINISH

A. Finish designations prefixed by AA conform to the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.

B. Anodized finish shall be Class I provided in accordance with [AA-M12 C22 A41 (use for Clear)] [AA-M12 C22 A43 (use for Gold)] [AA-M12 C22 A44 (use for Bronze or Black)].


OPTION #1

A. Painted finish shall be a baked enamel type that meets the requirements of AAMA 2605-98 (Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels). Finish shall be 70% Fluorocarbon Resin - Kynar 500 by Atochem North America or Hylar 5000 by Ausimont USA, Inc. applied over the manufacturer’s recommended inhibitive primer. Applicator must use a chrome chemical conversion coating pretreatment process in order to comply with AAMA 2605-98.

OPTION #2

B. Painted finish shall be a type that meets the requirements of AAMA 2604-98 (Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels). One of the following applications may be used:

1. Finish shall be a baked enamel containing 70% Fluorocarbon Resin - Kynar 500 by Atochem North America or Hylar 5000 by Ausimont USA, Inc. applied over the manufacturer’s recommended inhibitive primer. The applicator may use a non-chrome chemical conversion coating pretreatment process in order to comply with AAMA 2604-98.

2. Finish shall be a baked enamel containing 50% Flourocarbon Resin Products or Silicone Polyester applied over the manufacturer’s recommended primer. The applicator may use a chrome or a non- chrome chemical conversion coating pretreatment process in order to comply with AAMA 2604-98. [BASF: [Superl SP]][Valspar Corp.: [Acroflur] [Acrodize]]

3. Finish shall be a High Performance power coating in order to comply with AAMA 2604-98. [Tiger Drylac: [Series 28 High Performance Powder]] [Other manufacturers with product information indicating compliance with AAMA 2604-98.]

C. Painted finish shall be a type that meets the requirements of AAMA 2603-98 (Voluntary

Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels). One of the following applications may be used:

1. Finish shall be a baked enamel containing Polyester, Acrylic or High Solids applied in accordance with AAMA 2603-98. [PPG Industries: [Duracron (Acrylic)] [Polycron (High Solids)]][BASF: [Polyester]][Valspar Corp.: [Flurocryl Acrylic] [Valex High Solids Polyester] [Dynapon Polyester]] [Duracoat Products: [DC210 Series] [DC240 Polyester]]

2. Finish shall be an exterior quality power coating applied in accordance with AAMA 2603-98. [Tiger Drylac: [TGIC Polyester]][Dupont Powder Coatings: [Polyester]][Morton Powder Coatings: [Polyester]][Spraylat: [Polyester]][Other manufacturers with product information indicating compliance with AAMA 2603-98.]

D. Color:for anodized finishes: [Clear] [Gold] {[Medium] [Dark] Bronze} [Black]for organic organic coatings (baked enamel and/or powder coat): [As selected from manufacturer’s standard colors] [Custom color as selected by Architect] [To match brand name, color number color number]

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATIONA. Supply items to be [cast in concrete] [embedded in masonry] [placed in partitions].

3.02 DISSIMILAR METALS

A. When aluminum components come into contact with dissimilar metals, surfaces shall be kept from direct contact by painting the dissimilar metal with a heavy coat of a [two-part epoxy] or provide a heavy vinyl tape barrier.


B. When aluminum components come into contact with cement or lime mortar, exposed aluminum surfaces shall be painted with [two-part epoxy].

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with shop drawings [and manufacturer’s instructions].

B. Erect work [square and level,] [horizontal or parallel to rake of steps or ramp,] [and] free from distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance.

C. Expansion joints shall be provided as needed to allow for thermal expansion or contraction.

3.04 CLEANING

A. As installation is completed, wash thoroughly using plain water containing a mild soap or detergent. When preferred, an anodized finish shall be cleaned with white gasoline, kerosene or distillate. Aluminum with a painted finish shall be cleaned with plain water containing a mild soap or detergent.

B. Do not use an acid solution, steel wool or other harsh abrasives.

C. If stains remain after washing, remove paint finish and restore in accordance with NAAMM Metal Finishes Manual. Finish must not be removed from anodized aluminum. Reanodizing can only be done by removing railing and returning it to the anodizer.

3.05 REPAIR OF DEFECTIVE WORK

A. Remove stained or otherwise defective work and replace with material that meets specification requirements.

END OF SECTION

EUA 4-6-12 05 55 00 - 1 Stair Treads and Nosings

SECTION 05.55.00 STAIR TREADS AND NOSINGS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Anti-slip Safety Stair Treads and Nosings for new construction and renovation, inside and outside stair applications including extruded aluminum and cast systems.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS: A. Section 05 55 13 – Metal Stair Treads B. Section 05 55 16 – Metal Stair Nosings

1.03 REFERENCES

B. Publications 1. State of California Title 24, Stripping code for the visually impaired 2. American Disability Act (ADA) barrier-free code design 3. Occupational Safety and Health Association (OSHA) 4. International Building Code (IBC)

1.04 SUBMITTALS

C. Shop Drawings: Show profiles, and complete fabrication details for all stair treads and nosings, including required anchorage to surrounding construction.

D. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product specifications, technical data, installation, operation and maintenance instructions, catalog cuts where required.

E. Samples for selection and verification purposes. Manufacturer to provide upon request actual sections of stair tread and nosing in a convenient size approximately 6” in length to represent material adequately.


F. Deliver materials to Project site ready use. G. Exercise proper care in handling of Work so as not to injure

finished surfaces. Protect Work from damage after it is in place. H. Store materials under cover in a dry and clean location off the ground.

1.06 JOB CONDITIONS AND SEQUENCING

I. Coordinate with other trades such as concrete and masonry.

1.07 WARRANTY J. Provide manufacturer’s standard warranty. All stair treads and nosings shall be free from manufacturing

defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of shipment. Should a product fail to function in normal use within this period, manufacturer shall furnish a new part at no charge.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. ASTM B 221 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy extruded bars, rods, wire, shapes and tubes.

Stair Treads and Nosings 05 55 00 - 2 EUA 4-6-12

2.02 MANUFACTURER Nystrom Inc 9300 73rd Ave N Brooklyn Park, MN 55428 Toll Free Hotline: 800-547-2635 Direct Phone: 763-488-9200 Toll Free Fax: 800-317-8770 Direct Fax: 763-488-9201 E-Mail: [email protected] Internet: www.nystrom.com

2.03 N STRIDE SERIES, SINGLE PART STAIR TREADS AND NOSINGS A. Base and Nosing: Extruded aluminum type 6063-T5, mill finish B. Nosing Types for concrete pour, steel pan, wood and sloped stairs and risers. C. Tread abrasive filler: [Bar type ribbed, Full abrasive]

1. Includes virgin grain Aluminum Oxide and/or Silicon Carbide. Binder is a UV protected 2 part epoxy continuous throughout entire tread. Color shall extend uniformly throughout filler. Black is standard color unless other specified.

2. Black is the standard abrasive fill color unless other specified a. Options [Photo luminescent, Brown, Burgundy, Gray, Safety Yellow, Green, Red, Buff, Blue Gray]

D. Width [2”, 3”, 4”] E. Installation fastening type:[Extruded anchors] [Drilled countersunk holes] F. Acceptable Product Series: STS

2.04 N STRIDE II, TWO PART STAIR TREADS AND NOSINGS

G. Base and Nosing: Extruded aluminum type 6063-T5, mill finish H. Nosing Types for concrete pour, steel pan, wood and sloped stairs and risers. I. Tread abrasive filler: [Bar type ribbed, Full abrasive]

1. Includes virgin grain Aluminum Oxide and/or Silicon Carbide. Binder is a UV protected 2 part epoxy continuous throughout entire tread. Color shall extend uniformly throughout filler. Black is standard color unless other specified.

2. Black is the standard abrasive fill color unless other specified a. Options [Photo luminescent, Brown, Burgundy, Gray, Safety Yellow, Green, Red, Buff, Blue Gray]

J. Width [2”, 3”, 4”] K. Installation fastening type:[Extruded anchors] [Drilled countersunk holes] L. Acceptable Product Series: STT

2.05 RENOVATION STAIR TREADS AND NOSINGS

M. Base and Nosing: Extruded aluminum type 6063-T5, mill finish N. Nosing Types: Long nose for steel pan/wood stairs and angled long nose for sloped stairs O. Tread abrasive filler: Bar type ribbed

1. Includes virgin grain Aluminum Oxide and/or Silicon Carbide. Binder is a UV protected 2 part epoxy continuous throughout entire tread. Color shall extend uniformly throughout filler.

2. Black is the standard abrasive fill color unless other specified a. Options [Photo luminescent, Brown, Burgundy, Gray, Safety Yellow, Green, Red, Buff, Blue, Gray]

P. Widths [5”, 9”, 11”] Q. Installation; Drilled countersunk holes for bolt in hardware R. Product Series: STR

2.06 DURASTEP, CAST STAIR TREADS AND NOSINGS

S. CAST ALUMINUM 1. Base Nosing: High quality aluminum casting free of fin, burrs and slag 2. Finish: Natural sand cast finish 3. Tread abrasive: Cross-hatched silicon carbide abrasive 20 grit,

a minimum of 2-1/4 ounces per square foot to a minimum of 1/32” thick

EUA 4-6-12 05 55 00 - 3 Stair Treads and Nosings

4. Widths [2”, 3”, 4”standard] 2” – 12” available 5. Thickness: 5/16” 6. Installation Anchor; Wing Anchor standard, cast in bolt available 7. Acceptable Product Series: STCA-

T. CAST IRON

1. Base Nosing: High quality aluminum casting free of fin, burrs and slag 2. Finish: One coat of black paint 3. Tread Abrasive: Cross-hatched silicon carbide abrasive a minimum of 2-1/4 ounces per square foot to a

minimum of 1/32” thick. 4. Widths [3”, 4” standard] 2” – 12” available 5. Installation Anchor; Wing Anchor standard 6. Acceptable Product Series: STCI-

2.07 OPTIONS & ACCESSORIES

A. Vision Line color accent applied to the leading edge of bar ribbed type treads in any color combination. B. Heel Options:

1. Heel end miter cuts. 2. Recessed for flooring infill.

C. Taped tops- for protection during the initial concrete pour. Tape must be removed after tread sets. D. Anchoring and installation hardware- All hardware provided by installer.

1. Recommend wood screws #10x1” flathead stainless steel. 2. Wing Anchors- secured with #10 flathead stainless steel machine screw and nut 3. Expansion Shields- 1” Nylon Expansion Shields for existing concrete block out applications.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that preparation and affected dimensions are acceptable. Installer shall not proceed until conditions are acceptable.

B. Verify tolerances and correct improper conditions.

3.02 PREPARATION C. Advise installers of details relating to stair treads and nosings.

3.03 INSTALLATION

D. Install stair treads and nosings in accordance with the governing regulations, the industry standards applicable to the work and the manufacturer’s written instructions

E. Work shall be aligned plumb, level and where required, flush with adjacent surfaced and rigidly anchored to the substrate.

3.04 CLEANING

F. Clean exposed surfaces as recommended by the manufacture.

3.05 PROTECTION G. Upon completion of installation, advise the contractor of procedures required to protect the

finished work from damage by work of other sections during the remainder of the construction period.

H. Cover during wet-type operation including painting and decorating.

Stair Treads and Nosings 05 55 00 - 4 EUA 4-6-12

END OF SECTION

Forest Recourses / 04-06-12 06 42 00 - 1 Wood Paneling

SECTION 06 42 00

Wood Paneling PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 Summary

A. Wall Protection Systems to include:

1. High-Impact Wainscot Wall Panel Systems

B. Related Sections

1. Wall blocking between framing studs for mechanical fasteners: Section 09250 Gypsum Board Systems

1.02 References

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

C. Uniform Building Code (UBC)

1.03 Submittals

A. Product Data for each style of wainscot panel system specified

B. Test Data detailing compliance with specifications

C. Detail Drawings depicting product dimensions, accessories, installation methods, and accessories

D. Installation Instructions detailing in writing manufacturer’s recommended installation methods for all types of wall construction and substrates

E. Maintenance Instructions outlining manufacturer’s recommended cleaning, refinishing and repair instructions

F. Product Samples to include each style of wainscot wall panel system specified, and samples of manufacturer’s standard colors and patterns

G. Manufacturer’s Statement of Warranty

Wood Paneling 06 42 00 - 2 Forest Recourses / 04-06-12

1.04 Warranty

A. Manufacturer to provide 10-year warranty against structural failure and 10-year warranty on finish, as per manufacturer’s term and conditions

1.05 Quality Assurance

A. Code compliance: Provide Wainscot wall panel system that complies with the following requirements of regulatory agencies and the quality control of Kwalu

B. Fire Performance Characteristics: wainscot wall panel system to conform with NFPA Class A fire rating, and surface burning characteristics, as determined by ASTM E-84 (Steiner tunnel test), shall be a flame spread of 0-25 and smoke development of 350-450

C. Self-Extinguishing: Wainscot wall panel system to have a CC1 classification, as referenced in UBC 52-4-1988 and tested in accordance with ASTM D-635-74, Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning of Self- Supporting Plastics in a Horizontal Position

D. Impact Strength: Provide Wainscot wall panel system that has an impact strength of 30.2 ft-lbs/inch of thickness, as specified in ASTM D-256-90b, Impact Resistance of Plastics

E. Chemical Stain Resistance: Provide wainscot wall panel system that is resistant to staining when tested in accordance with applicable provisions of ASTM D-543

F. Fungal and Bacterial Resistance: Provide wainscot wall panel system that does not support fungal or bacterial growth as tested in accordance with ASTM G-21 and ASTM G-22

G. Single Source Responsibility: Provide all wall protection systems and components manufactured by the same company to ensure compatibility of color, texture, and other properties

1.06 Delivery, Storage and Handling

A. Deliver materials to the jobsite in unopened factory packaging

B. Inspect materials upon delivery to ensure that all specified product components and accessories received in good condition

C. Store material flat in original packaging in a climate controlled location, away from direct sunlight

Forest Recourses / 04-06-12 06 42 00 - 3 Wood Paneling

1.07 Project Conditions

A. Materials must be acclimated to project conditions between 65˚F and 80˚F at least 24 hours prior to installation

B. Install wall protection systems only after the facility’s permanent environmental conditions have been established

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 Manufacturer

A. Kwalu LLC, Atlanta, GA, 30341,

Phone: 877-MY-KWALU (695-9258)

Fax: 678-690-5572, website: kwalu.com

B. Substitutions: Not permitted

C. Provide all wall protection products and components from a single manufacturer

2.02 Materials

A. Acrylic/polyvinyl chloride co-polymer: Class A fire-rated extruded material to be high impact resistant, stain and chemical resistant

B. Particle board: Class A fire-rated

2.03 Manufactured Units

A. All acrylic/vinyl wainscot panel systems to be manufactured with a simulated wood grain. The surface finish shall be repairable in the field following manufacturer’s repair procedures so that there is no discernible damage. Surface printing methods strictly prohibited

Wood Paneling 06 42 00 - 4 Forest Recourses / 04-06-12

A. Kwalu wainscot panel system to be Oxford Style.

1. Wainscot height above finished floor (AFF) to be specified by architect

2. Size and style options for trim accessories to be specified by architect

3. Spacing between vertical stiles to be specified by architect

4. Pattern/color of polymer extrusions to be chosen by architect from manufacturer’s many available wood grain patterns

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.01 Examination

A. Verify that all wall surfaces are properly prepared to receive installation of wainscot wall panel systems

B. Complete all other finish operations prior to installing wall protection systems, including painting

3.02 Preparation

A. Clean all wall surfaces and substrates to remove dust, debris, and loose paint

3.03 Installation

A. Install all wall protection components in strict accordance with manufacturer’s printed installation instructions

3.04 Cleaning

A. Clean all wall protection components in strict accordance with manufacturer’s cleaning instructions

END OF SECTION

Chemistry/221/ 4-5-12 06 46 00 - 1 Wood Trim

SECTION 06 46 00

Wood Trim PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Durable wood products for the following applications: 1. Trim boards 2. Fascia 3. Window sills


A. Section 06300 – Exterior Finish Carpentry B. Section 06450 – Standing and Running Trim

C. Section 09900 – Painting

1. Field finish coat over prepared wood substrate 1.03 REFERENCES

A. Armor Coat Trim & Fascia Material Safety Data Sheet B. ASTM D 3359 – Standard Test Methods for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test

C. ASTM D 5007 – Standard Test Method for Wet-to-Dry Hiding Change

D. ASTM D 4587 – Standard Practice for Light/Water Exposure of Paint

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of section 01300 B. Product Data: Manufacturer’s data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations 3. Installation instructions

C. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, at least 6

inches (150 mm) long, representing actual product and color

Wood Trim 06 46 00 - 2 Chemistry/221/ 4-5-12


A. Installer Qualifications 1. Installer shall be licensed, registered or otherwise acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction to install exterior building products 2. Minimum 2 years experience in installation of product type specified


A. Inspect the materials on delivery to assure specified products have been received. Store products in dry location, under cover and off the ground

1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer’s absolute limits

1.08 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer warrants product will be free from manufacturing defects for a period of 20 years from date of installation and free from mold and mildew for a period of 6 months from the date of purchase from the manufacturer

PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Belco Forest Products, which is located at: 1890 E Johns Prairie Rd; Shelton, WA 98584; Toll Free Tel: 1-800-426-7214; Tel: 360-426-8900.

B. Substitutions: Not permitted

C. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of

Section 01600 2.02 PRODUCTS

A. Trim boards & fascia

1. Sizes a. 1” x 2”, actual 11/16” x 1-1/2” (17.5mm x 38mm) b. 1” x 3”, actual 11/16” x 2-1/2” (17.5mm x 63.5mm) c. 1” x 4”, actual 11/16” x 3-1/2” (17.5mm x 89mm)


d. 1” x 6”, actual 11/16” x 5-1/2” (17.5mm x 140mm) e. 1” x 8”, actual 11/16” x 7-1/4” (17.5mm x 184mm) f. 1” x 10”, actual 11/16” x 9-1/4” (17.5mm x 235mm) g. 1” x 12”, actual 11/16” x 11-1/4” (17.5mm x 286mm) h. 5/4” x 3”, actual 1-1/16” x 2-1/2” (27mm x 63.5mm) i. 5/4” x 4”, actual 1-1/16” x 3-1/2” (27mm x 89mm) j. 5/4” x 5”, actual 1-1/16” x 4-1/2” (27mm x 114mm) k. 5/4” x 6”, actual 1-1/16” x 5-1/2” (27mm x 140mm) l. 5/4” x 8”, actual 1-1/16” x 7-1/4” (27mm x 184mm) m. 5/4” x 10”, actual 1-1/16” x 9-1/4” (27mm x 235mm) n. 5/4” x 12”, actual 1-1/16” x 11-1/4” (27mm x 286mm) o. 2” x 2”, actual 1-7/16” x 1-7/16” (36.5mm x 36.5mm) p. 2” x 3”, actual 1-7/16” x 2-1/2” (36.5mm x 63.5mm) q. 2” x 4”, actual 1-7/16” x 3-1/2” (36.5mm x 89mm) r. 2” x 6”, actual 1-7/16” x 5-1/2” (36.5mm x 140mm) s. 2” x 8”, actual 1-7/16” x 7-1/4” (36.5mm x 184mm) t. 2” x 10”, actual 1-7/16” x 9-1/4” (36.5mm x 235mm) u. 2” x 12”, actual 1-7/16” x 11-1/4” (36.5mm x 286mm)

2. Milled Textures

a. Comb face (AKA “Rougher Headed Face” or “Broken Knife Comb Face”)

b. Comb 4 sides c. Resawn face d. Resawn 1 face, 1 edge e. Smooth 4 sides

3. Finishes

a. Primed b. Custom colored top coat

B. Window sills

1. Sizes a. 2” x 3”, actual 1-7/16” x 2-1/2” (36.5mm x 63.5mm) b. 2” x 4”, actual 1-7/16” x 3-1/2” (36.5mm x 89mm)

2. Milled Textures a. Smooth 4 sides with drip edge

3. Finishes a. Primed b. Custom colored top coat

2.03 MATERIALS

A. Non-pressure treated wood 1. Species: Spruce-Pine-Fir (SPF) and Hem Fir (HF)

Wood Trim 06 46 00 - 4 Chemistry/221/ 4-5-12

2.04 TREATMENT

A. 2-Coat Priming Process

1. First Coat – The Platinum Protection Package – Sprayed on a. Termite and fungal decay protection is provided by borate solution b. Mold and mildew protection is provided by an inhibitor solution

2. Second Coat – Primer – Flood coat

a. Water-borne acrylic primer b. 6 mils wet, back brushed, oven dried, 3 mils dry

B. Custom Top Coating through Belco Color Shield

1. Acrylic paints, sprayed on

PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that site conditions are acceptable for installation of exterior finish carpentry. Do not begin installation until substrates have been prepared

B. Coordinate with responsible party to perform corrective work on unsatisfactory

conditions before proceeding 3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly, prior to installation B. Examine, clean, and repair as necessary, any substrate conditions that would be

detrimental to proper installation

C. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for substrate under the project conditions

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions 1. Comply with all terms necessary to maintain warranty coverage

B. Touch up all field cuts before installing 3.04 PROTECTION


A. Protect installed products until completion of project B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before substantial completion

END OF SECTION

Child Care Center 4-6-12 07 21 00 – 1 Thermal Insulation

SECTION 07 21 00

THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Batt insulation and air sealing system.


A. 03300 Cast in Place Concrete

B. 042219 Insulated Concrete Unit Masonry

C. 061613 Insulating Sheathing

D. 072113 Board Insulation

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASTM C 1289 – Thermal Insulation Board

B. ASTM C 665 – Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation

C. ASTM C 1320 – Batt and Blanket Thermal Insulation

D. Owens Corning’s Energy Complete – Flexible Seal Technology Whole Home Insulation

and Air Sealing System

E. VERTICON CONSTRUCTION, LLC

F. Johns Manville – Commercial Insulation Product Guide 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original packaging.

B. Storage: Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

Store with seals and labels intact and legible. Store inside and in a dry location. Protect insulation materials from moisture and soiling. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of products.

C. Handling: Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically

inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition.

Thermal Insulation 07 21 00 – 2 Child Care Center 4-6-12


A. Do not install insulation adhesives when temperature or weather conditions are detrimental to successful installation.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer’s Qualifications: Company with a minimum of 2 years in performing work of

this section and certified by manufacturer as an approved installer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 BATT INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Batt Insulation, Unfaced: ASTM C 665, Type I, preformed glass fiber batt type, unfaced.

B. Batt Insulation, Kraft Faced: ASTM C 665, Type II, Class C preformed glass fiber batt type, Kraft paper faced one side.

C. Batt Insulation, Foil Faced: ASTM C 665, Type II, Class B preformed glass fiber batt

type, foil faced one side with maximum flame/smoke properties of 75/450 in accordance with ASTM E84.

D. Minimum R-Value, Thickness 3-1/2 Inches: R-11.

E. Minimum R-Value, Thickness 3-1/2 Inches: R-13.

F. Minimum R-Value, Thickness 3-1/2 Inches: R-15.

G. Minimum R-Value, Thickness 5-1/2 Inches: R-21.5.

H. Minimum R-Value, Thickness 5-1/2 Inches: R-18, using R-19 6-1/4 inch batt

compressed.

I. Minimum R-Value, Thickness 9-1/4 Inches: R-29, using R-30 10 inch batt compressed.

J. Minimum R-Value, Thickness 9-1/4 Inches: R-36, using R-38C 10 inch batt compressed.

K. Minimum R-Value, Thickness 11-1/4 Inches: R-37, using R-38 12 inch batt

compressed. 2.02 APPLICATION

A. Insulation in metal framed walls: batt insulation with integral vapor retarder.

Child Care Center 4-6-12 07 21 00 – 3 Thermal Insulation

B. Insulation above lay in acoustical ceilings: batt insulation with no vapor retarder.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Tape: Polyethylene self-adhering type for Kraft faced insulation and bright aluminum self- adhering type for foil faced insulation.

B. Insulation Fasteners: Impale clip of galvanized steel; type recommended by insulation manufacturer for particular use intended.

C. Mechanical Insulation Fasteners: FM approved, corrosion resistant, size required to suit

application.

D. Wire Mesh: Galvanized steel, hexagonal wire mesh.

E. Spindle Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant wire spindles.

F. Ventilation Baffles: Formed plastic, metal, or cardboard sized to fit full width of rafter spaces.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation materials are dry and that substrates are ready to receive insulation and adhesive.

B. Verify substrate surfaces are flat, free of honeycomb, fins, irregularities, or materials or substances that may impede adhesive bond.

3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove projections, protruding fasteners, and loose or foreign matter that might

interfere with proper installation. B. Clean and prime substrate surfaces to receive adhesives in accordance with

manufacturer’s instructions. 3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install batt insulation in accordance with ASTM C 1320.

Thermal Insulation 07 21 00 – 4 Child Care Center 4-6-12

B. If eave ventilation baffles are required, install ventilation baffles at eaves to hold insulation down from roof sheathing and provide positive ventilation from eave to attic space.

C. Install in exterior walls, roof and ceiling spaces without gaps or voids. Fluff insulation to

full thickness for specified R-value before installation. Do not compress insulation.

D. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids. E. Fit insulation tight in spaces and tight to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services

within the plane of insulation.

F. For unfaced batt insulation, install with friction fit or retain in place with manufacturer’s recommended fasteners or mesh.

G. For batt insulation with factory-applied facing, install with vapor retarder membrane

facing warm side of building spaces. Lap ends and side flanges of membrane over or between framing members. Tape seal butt ends, lapped flanges, and tears or cuts in membrane.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Remove protective plastic film coverings from adjacent materials. B. Clean unintended overspray from materials, equipment, and fixtures. C. Remove damaged materials, equipment, and fixtures if overspray cannot be cleaned

without blemish and install new materials, equipment, and fixtures identical to item before damage occurred.

D. Remove waste materials and recycle empty containers and packaging.

3.05 PROTECTION A. Do not leave materials exposed to weather longer than recommended by manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

ASPHALT SHINGLE SPECIFICATION

Project name / Project number/ 05-04-2012 07 31 13 Asphalt Shingles

PART I GENERAL


A Asphalt roofing shingles.

B Leak barrier and roof deck protection.

C Metal flashing associated with shingle roofing.

D Attic ventilation.


A Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Framing, wood decking, and roof sheathing.

B Section 07620 - Flashing and Sheet Metal: Sheet metal flashing not associated with shingle roofing; gutters and downspouts.

C Section 08630 - Unit Skylights: Skylights

1.03 REFERENCES American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) - Annual Book of ASTM Standards

1. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

2. ASTM B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.

3. ASTM B 370 - Standard Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction.

4. ASTM D 2218 – Impact Resistance of Prepared Roof Covering Materials.

5. ASTM D 3018 - Standard Specification for Class A Asphalt Shingles Surfaced with Mineral Granules.

6. ASTM D 3161 - Standard Test Method for Wind-Resistance of Asphalt Shingles (Fan-Induced Method).

7. ASTM D 3462 – Standard Specification for Asphalt Shingles Made From Glass Felt and Surfaced with Mineral Granules.

8. ASTM D 4586 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free.

9. ASTM D 7158 - Standard Test Method for Wind-Resistance of Sealed Asphalt Shingles (Uplift Force/Uplift Resistance Method).

10. ASTM E 903 – Standard Test Method for Solar Absorptance, Reflectance, and Transmission of Materials Using Integrating Spheres. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) -

Roofing Systems and Materials Guide (TGFU R1306)

1. UL 790 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Roof Covering Materials.

2. UL 997 - Wind Resistance of Prepared Roof Covering Materials.

C Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association (ARMA)

D Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, 1nc. (SMACNA) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.

E National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA)

F American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE).

1. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.

G U.S. Green Building Council (USGBC)



H Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design (LEED)

I ENERGY STAR

J Cool Roof Rating Council (CRRC)

K Miami Dade County

1.04 DEFINITIONS

A Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D1079 and the glossary of the National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA) Roofing and Waterproofing Manual for definitions of roofing terms related to this section.

1.05 LEED CERTIFICATION

A Provide a roofing system that will achieve or aid in the qualification of points satisfying

1. Sustainable Site credit 7.2 - Heat Island Effect - Roof.

2. Materials & Resource credit 5 - Local and Regional Materials.

1.06 SUBMITTALS

A Submit copies of GAF® product data sheets, detail drawings and samples for each type of roofing product.

B L.E.E.D. submittal: Coordinate with Section 01115 - Green Building Requirements, for LEED certification submittal forms and certification templates.


A Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide all primary roofing products, including shingles, underlayment, leak barrier, and ventilation, by a single manufacturer.

B Installer Qualifications: Installer must be approved for installation of all roofing products to be installed under this section.

1.08 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A Provide a roofing system achieving an Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Class A fire classification.

B . Install all roofing products in accordance with all federal, state and local building codes.

D All work shall be performed in a manner consistent with current OSHA guidelines.

1.09 PREINSTALLATION MEETING

A General: For all projects in excess of 250 squares of roofing, a pre-installation meeting is strongly recommended.

B Timing: The meeting shall take place at the start of the roofing installation, no more than 2 weeks into the roofing project.

C Attendees: Meeting to be called for by manufacturer’s certified contractor. Meeting’s mandatory attendees shall include the certified contractor and the manufacturer’s representative. Non-mandatory attendees shall include the owner’s representative, architect or engineer’s representative, and the general contractor’s representative.

D Topics: Certified contractor and manufacturer’s representative shall review all pertinent requirements for the project, including but not limited to, scheduling, weather considerations, project duration, and requirements for the specified warranty.


A Store all products in manufacturer's unopened, labeled packaging until they are ready for installation.



B Store products in a covered, ventilated area, at temperature not more than 110 degrees F (43 degrees C); do not store near steam pipes, radiators, or in direct sunlight.

C Store bundles on a flat surface. Maximum stacking height shall not exceed GAF®’s recommendations. Store all rolls on end.

D Store and dispose of solvent-based materials in accordance with all federal, state and local regulations.

1.11 WEATHER CONDITIONS

A Proceed with work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions will permit work to be performed in accordance with GAF®’s recommendations

1.12 WARRANTY Provide to the owner a GAF®® WeatherStopper® Golden Pledge Ltd Warranty covering:

1. Roofs installed by a Certified GAF® Master Elite™ Contractor only.

2. Manufacturing defects: 100% coverage for materials and labor for:

a Single family detached homes owned by individuals the first

- 50 years non-prorated, then 20% thereafter for all lifetime shingles.

- 20 years non-prorated, then 20% thereafter for Marquis Weathermax and Royal Sovereign Shingles.

b Any other type of owner or building – 40 years with the first 20 years non- prorated. (excludes Marquis WeatherMax and Royal Sovereign)

3. Workmanship errors: 100% coverage for workmanship errors for:

a Single family detached homes owned by individuals - the first 25 years for after installation. (20 years for Marquis WeatherMax and Royal Sovereign)

b Any other type of owner or building - 20 years.

4. Roof system NOT installed over an existing roof, all existing roof materials must be removed to the deck.

5. Warranted against algae discoloration for 10 years

6. Full roof installations (Roofs installed on portions of buildings do not qualify) using the following GAF® products.

a You must use GAF® Roof Deck Protection.

b You must use eligible GAF® Leak Barrier in valleys and around dormers, sidewalls, firewalls, chimneys, plumbing vents, and skylights. In the North, leak barriers must be used at all eaves at least 24 inch inside warm wall.

c You must use GAF® pre-cut starter strip products (only those with factory applied adhesive) at the eaves. Note: To obtain bonus wind coverage, you must use GAF® pre cut starter strip products (with factory applied adhesive) at the eaves and rakes and you must install each shingle using 6 nails. For Miami Dade County Florida, no adhesive on rakes. You must cement the starter strip in and nail along the rake.

d You must use eligible COBRA® ventilation with adequate intake ventilation. Master Flow® exhaust ventilation products can be substituted only if COBRA® ridge ventilation cannot be installed due to a structure’s architecture. In any event, adequate ventilation should meet the following requirements:

1) Minimum net free ventilation area of 1 sq ft per 150 sq ft of ceiling area is required. When intake vents are located at the eaves and exhaust vents are



located near the roof’s peak (in a properly balanced system) for maximum air flow, ventilation may be reduced to 1 sq ft per 300 sq ft. If these standards are not met, GAF® cannot be responsible for damage caused by inadequate ventilation.

e You must use GAF® Ridge Cap Shingles or shingles that correspond to the shingle product you are installing.

f You must use eligible GAF® Roofing Shingles.

g New metal flashings must be installed. Metal drip edge must be used at eaves and is recommended at rake edges.

7. In addition to the requirements listed above, you installer must register and pay for this warranty. On projects that total more than 250 squares, the permanent Golden Pledge® Ltd Warranty will be issued only if the project passes GAF®’s final inspection. GAF® reserves the right to withhold the warranty if the roof has not been installed according to GAF®’s written application instructions. GAF® also strongly recommends that your Master Elite® Contractor schedule a start-up and at least one interim inspection on projects of 250 squares or more by contacting GAF® at least three weeks prior to the start of roof work.

B Provide to the owner a GAF® Weather Stopper® System Plus Ltd Warranty covering:

1. Roofs installed by a Authorized Home Builder, Certified Contractor or Certified GAF® Master Elite™ Contractor only.

2. Manufacturing defects: 100% coverage for materials and labor for:




b Any other type of owner or building – 40 years with the first 20 years non- prorated. (excludes Marquis WeatherMax and Royal Sovereign)


C Provide to the owner a GAF®® Smart Choice® Shingle Ltd. Warranty.

1. Manufacturing defects: 100% coverage for materials for:




- 3 years non-prorated, then 20% thereafter for Sentinel Shingles.

b Any other type of owner or building – 40 years with the first 5 years non - prorated.


PART II PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A Acceptable Manufacturer: GAF®, 1361 Alps Rd. Wayne NJ 07470. Tel: 1-973-628-3000.

B Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01600.



2.02 SHINGLES

A Super-heavyweight “Plus”, granule surfaced, self sealing asphalt shingle with a strong fiberglass reinforced Micro Weave® core and StainGuard® protection, which prevents pronounced discoloration from blue-green algae through formulation/unique blends of granules. Extra thick tabs and bold profile provide a bold unique appearance with a 7.5 inch exposure. UL 790 Class A rated with UL 997 Wind Resistance Label; ASTM D 7158, Class H; ASTM D 3161, Type 1; ASTM D 3018, Type 1; ASTM D 3462; CSA A123.5-98; Dade County Approved, Florida Building Code Approved, Texas Dept of Insurance Approved, ICC Report Approval. Camelot® Lifetime Designer Shingles, by GAF®.

B Architectural, large tab design, granule surfaced, self sealing asphalt shingle with a strong fiberglass reinforced Micro Weave® core and StainGuard® protection, which prevents pronounced discoloration from blue-green algae through formulation/unique blends of granules. Thick tabs and bold profile provide a bold unique appearance with a 7.5 inch exposure. UL 790 Class A rated with UL 997 Wind Resistance Label; ASTM D 7158, Class H; ASTM D 3161, Class F, Type 1; ASTM D 3018, Type 1; ASTM D 3462; CSA A123.5-98, Texas Dept of Insurance Approved, ICC Report Pending, Camelot® II Lifetime Designer Shingles, by GAF®

C Super-heavyweight “Plus”, granule surfaced, self sealing asphalt shingle with a strong fiberglass reinforced Micro Weave® core and StainGuard® protection, which prevents pronounced discoloration from blue-green algae through formulation/unique blends of granules. Extra thick tabs and bold profile provide a real slate appearance with an 8 inch exposure. UL 790 Class A rated with UL 997 Wind Resistance Label; ASTM D 7158, Class H; ASTM D 3161, Type 1; ASTM D 3018, Type 1; ASTM D 3462; CSA A123.5-98; Dade County Approved, Florida Building Code Approved, Texas Dept of Insurance Approved, ICC Report Approval. Grand Slate® Lifetime Designer Shingles, by GAF®.

D High performance, classic large tab granule surfaced, self sealing asphalt shingle with a strong fiberglass reinforced Micro Weave® core and StainGuard® protection, which prevents pronounced discoloration from blue-green algae through formulation/unique blends of granules. Extra thick tabs and bold profile provide a real slate appearance with an 8 inch exposure. UL 790 Class A rated with UL 997 Wind Resistance Label; ASTM D 7158, Class H; ASTM D 3161, Type 1; ASTM D 3018, Type 1; ASTM D 3462; CSA A123.5-98; Texas Dept of Insurance Approved, Grand Slate® II Lifetime Designer Shingles, by GAF®.

E Super-heavyweight “Plus”, granule surfaced, self sealing asphalt shingle with a strong fiberglass reinforced Micro Weave® core and StainGuard® protection, which prevents pronounced discoloration from blue-green algae through formulation/unique blends of granules. Specially cut tabs and bold profile provide a rugged hand-split shake appearance with an 8 inch exposure. UL 790 Class A rated with UL 997 Wind Resistance Label; ASTM D 7158, Class H; ASTM D 3161, Type 1; ASTM D 3018, Type 1; ASTM D 3462; CSA A123.5-98; Dade County Approved, Florida Building Code Approved, Texas Dept of Insurance Approved, ICC Report Approval. Grand Canyon Lifetime Designer Shingles, by GAF®.

F Super-heavyweight “Plus”, granule surfaced, self sealing asphalt shingle with a strong fiberglass reinforced Micro Weave® core and StainGuard® protection, which prevents pronounced discoloration from blue-green algae through formulation/unique blends of granules. Specially cut tabs and bold laminated shadow line provide a dramatic appearance with a 7 ½ inch exposure. UL 790 Class A rated with UL 997 Wind Resistance Label; ASTM D 7158, Class H; ASTM D 3161, Type 1; ASTM D 3018, Type 1; ASTM D 3462; CSA A123.5-98; Dade County Approved, Florida Building Code Approved, Texas Dept of Insurance Approved, ICC Report Approval. Country Mansion® Lifetime Designer Shingles, by GAF®.



G High performance classic slate design, granule surfaced, self sealing asphalt shingle with a strong fiberglass reinforced Micro Weave® core and StainGuard® protection, which prevents pronounced discoloration from blue-green algae through formulation/unique blends of granules. Special cut tabs and bold laminated shadow line provide a dramatic appearance with a 7 ½ inch exposure. UL 790 Class A rated with UL 997 Wind Resistance Label; ASTM D 7158, Class H; ASTM D 3161, Type 1; ASTM D 3018, Type 1; ASTM D 3462; CSA A123.5-98; Texas Dept of Insurance Approved. Country Mansion® II Lifetime Designer Shingles, by GAF®.

H Super-heavyweight, granule surfaced, self sealing asphalt shingle with a strong fiberglass reinforced Micro Weave® core and mineral granule surfacing. Specially cut tabs and bold profile provide a rugged hand-split shake appearance with an 8 inch exposure. UL 790 Class A rated with UL 997 Wind Resistance Label; ASTM D 7158, Class H; ASTM D 3161, Type 1; ASTM D 3018, Type 1; ASTM D 3462; CSA A123.5-98; Dade County Approved, Florida Building Code Approved, Texas Dept of Insurance Approved, ICC Report Approval. Grand Sequoia® Lifetime Designer Shingles, by GAF®.

I Heavyweight design, granule surfaced, self sealing asphalt shingle with a strong fiberglass reinforced Micro Weave core and StainGuard® protection, which prevents pronounced discoloration from blue-green algae through formulation/unique blends of granules. Deep shadows and a random design provide a unique slate-like appearance with a 5 inch (127 mm) exposure. Meets ASTM D 3018, Type 1; ASTM D 3161, Type 1; ASTM D 3462 and ASTM D 7158, Class H, UL 790 Class A rated with UL 997 Wind Resistance Label. CSA A123.5-98; Approved by Dade County, Florida Building Code, Texas Department of Insurance Approved and ICC Report Approval. Capstone® Lifetime Designer Shingles by GAF®.

J Heavyweight Impact resistant design, granule surfaced, self sealing asphalt shingle with a strong fiberglass reinforced Micro Weave core and StainGuard protection, which prevents pronounced discoloration from blue-green algae through formulation/unique blends of granules. Deep shadows and a random design provide a unique slate-like appearance with a 5 inch (127 mm) exposure. UL 790 Class A rated with UL 997 Wind Resistance Label; ASTM D 7158, Class H; ASTM D 3161, Type 1; ASTM D 3018, Type 1; ASTM D 3462; CSA 123.5-98; Passes UL 2218, Class 4 Impact Test; Dade County Approved, Florida Building Code Approved, Texas Dept of Insurance Approved, ICC Report Approval. Capstone® Impact Resistant IR Lifetime Designer Shingles by GAF®.

K Heavyweight, granule surfaced, self sealing asphalt shingle with a strong fiberglass reinforced Micro Weave® core and StainGuard® protection, which prevents pronounced discoloration from blue-green algae through formulation/unique blends of granules. Dovetail cut tabs and bold shadow line provide a slate appearance with a 7 ½ inch exposure. UL 790 Class A rated with UL 997 Wind Resistance Label; ASTM D 7158, Class H; ASTM D 3161, Type 1; ASTM D 3018, Type 1; ASTM D 3462; CSA A123.5-98; Dade County Approved, Florida Building Code Approved, Texas Dept of Insurance Approved, ICC Report Approval. Slateline® Lifetime Designer Shingles, by GAF®.

L Super-heavyweight, granule surfaced, self sealing asphalt shingle with a strong fiberglass reinforced Micro Weave® core and StainGuard® protection, which prevents pronounced discoloration from blue-green algae through formulation/unique blends of granules. Architectural laminate styling provides a wood shake appearance with a 5 5/8 inch exposure. Features GAF®’s patented High Definition® color blends and enhanced shadow effect. . UL 790 Class A rated with UL 997 Wind Resistance Label; ASTM D 7158, Class H; ASTM D 3161, Type 1; ASTM D 3018, Type 1; ASTM D 3462; CSA A123.5-98; Dade County Approved, Florida Building Code Approved, Texas Dept of Insurance Approved, ICC Report Approval. Timberline® Ultra HD Lifetime High Definition Shingles, by GAF®.

M Self sealing, granule surfaced, asphalt shingle with a strong fiberglass reinforced Micro Weave® core and StainGuard® protection, which prevents pronounced discoloration from



blue-green algae through formulation/unique blends of granules. Architectural laminate styling provides a wood shake appearance with a 5 5/8 inch exposure. Features GAF®’s patented High Definition® color blends and enhanced shadow effect. UL 790 Class A rated with UL 997 Wind Resistance Label; ASTM D 7158, Class H; ASTM D 3161, Type 1; ASTM D 3018, Type 1; ASTM D 3462; CSA A123.5-98; Dade County Approved, Florida Building Code Approved, Texas Dept of Insurance Approved, ICC Report Approval. Timberline® HD Lifetime High Definition Shingles, by GAF®.

N Self sealing, granule surfaced, asphalt shingle with a strong fiberglass reinforced Micro Weave® core and StainGuard® protection, which prevents pronounced discoloration from blue-green algae through formulation/unique blends of granules. Architectural laminate styling provides a wood shake appearance with a 5 5/8 inch exposure. Features the classic Natural Shadow™ effect. UL 790 Class A rated with UL 997 Wind Resistance Label; ASTM D 7158, Class H; ASTM D 3161, Type 1; ASTM D 3018, Type 1; ASTM D 3462; CSA A123.5-98; Dade County Approved, Florida Building Code Approved, Texas Dept of Insurance Approved, ICC Report Approval. Timberline® Natural Shadow™ Lifetime Shingles, by GAF®.

O Heavyweight, impact resistant, granule surfaced self sealing asphalt shingle with a strong fiberglass reinforced Micro Weave® core and StainGuard® protection, which prevents pronounced discoloration from blue-green algae through formulation/unique blends of granules. Architectural laminate styling provides a wood shake appearance with a 5 5/8 inch exposure. Features GAF®’s patented High Definition® color blends and enhanced shadow effect. UL 790 Class A rated with UL 997 Wind Resistance Label; ASTM D 7158, Class H; ASTM D 3161, Type 1; ASTM D 3018, Type 1; Passes UL 2218, Class 4 Impact Test; ASTM D 3462; CSA A123.5-98; Dade County Approved, Florida Building Code Approved, Texas Dept of Insurance Approved, ICC Report Approval. Timberline® ArmorShield™ II Impact Resistant Shingles, by GAF®.

P Heavyweight, granule surfaced, self sealing asphalt shingle with a strong fiberglass reinforced Micro Weave® core and a mineral granule surfacing. Architectural laminate styling provides a wood shake appearance with a 5 5/8 inch exposure. Features highly reflective roofing granules that bounce back the sun’s rays and more effectively release absorbed heat. Rated by the Cool Roof Rating Council (CRRC) and meet initial EnergyStar® performance levels. UL 790 Class A rated with UL 997 Wind Resistance Label; ASTM D 7158, Class H; ASTM D 3161, Type 1; ASTM D 3018, Type 1; ASTM D 3462; CSA A123.5-98; Dade County Approved, Florida Building Code Approved, Texas Dept of Insurance Approved, ICC Report Approval, Title 24 compliant and Energy Star compliant. Timberline® Cool Series Energy-Saving Architectural Shingles, by GAF®.

Q Heavyweight, granule surfaced self sealing asphalt shingle with a strong fiberglass reinforced Micro Weave® core and a mineral granule surfacing. Traditional 3-tab styling with a 5 inch exposure. UL 790 Class A rated with UL 997 Wind Resistance Label; ASTM D 7158, Class H; ASTM D 3161, Type 1; ASTM D 3018, Type 1; ASTM D 3462; CSA A123.5-98; Florida Building Code Approved, Texas Dept of Insurance Approved. Marquis® Weathermax® Shingles, by GAF®.

R Midweight, granule surfaced self sealing asphalt shingle with a strong fiberglass reinforced Micro Weave® core and StainGuard® protection, which prevents pronounced discoloration from blue-green algae through formulation/unique blends of granules. Traditional 3-tab styling with a 5 inch or 5 5/8 inch exposure. UL 790 Class A rated with UL 997 Wind Resistance Label; ASTM D 7158, Class H; ASTM D 3161, Type 1; ASTM D 3018, Type 1; ASTM D 3462; Dade County Approved, Florida Building Code Approved, Texas Dept of Insurance Approved, ICC Report Approval Pending. Royal Sovereign® Shingles, by GAF®.

S Standard-weight, granule surfaced self sealing asphalt shingle with a strong fiberglass reinforced Micro Weave® core and a mineral granule surfacing. Traditional 3-tab styling with a 5 inch or 5 5/8 inch exposure. UL 790 Class A rated with UL 997 Wind Resistance



Label; ASTM D 7158, Class H; ASTM D 3161, Type 1; ASTM D 3018, Type 1; ASTM D 3462; Texas Dept of Insurance Approved. Sentinel® Shingles, by GAF®.

1. Color: As selected from manufacturers’ full range.

2. Color: _____________

2.03 HIP AND RIDGE SHINGLES

A High profile self sealing hip and ridge cap shingle matching the color of selected roof shingle. Each bundle covers approx. 20 lineal feet (6.10m). Timbertex® Premium Ridge Cap Shingles, by GAF®.

B Distinctive self sealing hip and ridge cap shingle complementing the color of selected roof shingle. Each bundle covers approx. 31 lineal feet (9.45m) with an 8 inch (203mm) exposure. Ridglass™ 12" Ridge Cap Shingles by GAF®.

C Distinctive self sealing hip and ridge cap shingle complementing the color of selected roof shingle. Each bundle covers approx. 31 lineal feet (9.45m) with an 8 inch (203mm) exposure. Ridglass™ 10” Ridge Cap Shingles by GAF®.

D Distinctive self sealing hip and ridge cap shingle complementing the color of selected roof shingle. Each bundle covers approx. 31 lineal feet (9.45m) with an 8 inch (203mm) exposure Ridglass™ 8” Ridge Cap Shingles by GAF®.

E Distinctive self sealing hip and ridge cap shingle complementing the color of selected roof shingle. Each bundle covers approx. 25 lineal feet (7.62mm) with a 6 2/3 inch (169mm) exposure. Seal-A-Ridge® Ridge Cap Shingles by GAF®.

F Distinctive hip and ridge cap shingle complementing the color of selected roof shingle. Each bundle covers approx. 33.3 lineal feet (10.15m) with a 5 5/8 inch (147mm) exposure. Z® Ridge Shingles by GAF®.

G Distinctive vented hip and ridge cap shingle complementing the color of selected roof shingle. Each bundle covers approx. 20 lineal feet (6.10m) with a 9 ¼ inch (235mm) exposure. Vented RidgeCrest™ Venting Ridge Cap Shingles by GAF®.

2.04 STARTER STRIP

A Self sealing starter shingle designed for premium roof shingles. Each bundle covers approx. 100 lineal feet (30.48m) for English and metric shingles or 50 lineal feet (15.24m) for oversized shingles. WeatherBlocker™ Eave/Rake Starter Strip by GAF®.

B Self sealing starter shingle designed for all roof shingles. Each bundle covers approx. 120 lineal feet (36.58m). ProStart™ Starter Strip by GAF®.

2.05 LEAK BARRIER

A Self-adhering, self sealing, bituminous leak barrier surfaced with fine, skid-resistant granules. Approved by UL, Dade County, ICC, State of Florida and Texas Department of Insurance. Each roll contains approx. 150 sq ft (13.9 sq.m.), 36” X 50’ (0.9m x 20.3m) or 200 sq ft (18.6 sq.m.), 36” X 66.7’ (0.9m x 20.3m). WeatherWatch® Leak Barrier, by GAF®.

B Self-adhering, self sealing, bituminous leak barrier surfaced with a coated surface and added tack for extra traction. Approved by UL and ICC. Each roll contains approx. 200 sq ft (18.6 sq.m.), 36in. X 66.7ft. (0.9m x 20.3m) WeatherWatch® XT Leak Barrier, by GAF®.

C Self-adhering, self sealing, bituminous leak barrier surfaced with a smooth polyethylene film. Approved by UL, Dade County, ICC, State of Florida and Texas Department of Insurance. Each Roll contains approx. 200 sq ft. (18.6 sq.m.), 36” X 66.7’ (0.9m x 20.3m), and 60 mils thick. StormGuard® Leak Barrier, by GAF®.

D Self-adhering, self sealing, waterproof leak barrier

http://www.gaf.com/General/DocList.asp?WS=GAF&Silo=ARCH&App=PROD&UID=&CatID=5&ProdID=2&ProdName=Timbertex%28RT%29

http://www.gaf.com/General/DocList.asp?WS=GAF&Silo=ARCH&App=PROD&UID=&CatID=0&ProdID=1&ProdName=Weather+Watch%28RT%29

http://www.gaf.com/General/DocList.asp?WS=GAF&Silo=ARCH&App=PROD&UID=&CatID=0&ProdID=1&ProdName=Weather+Watch%28RT%29

http://www.gaf.com/General/DocList.asp?WS=GAF&Silo=ARCH&App=PROD&UID=&CatID=0&ProdID=2&ProdName=StormGuard%28RT%29



E Self-adhering air & moisture barrier film surfaced SBS modified flashing. Roll sizes available in 7 different dimensions. Approved by Dade Country and Florida Building Code. Storm Flash™ Self-Adhering Flashing by GAF®.

2.06 SHINGLE UNDERLAYMENT

A Water repellent, breather type cellulose/glass fiber composite roofing underlayment. Meets or exceed ASTM D226 and D4869 and approved by UL and the Florida Building Code. Each roll contains approximately 4 squares (432 sq. ft.) of material and is 36” x 144” Shingle-Mate® Roof Deck Protection, by GAF®.

B Premium, water repellant, breather type non-asphaltic underlayment. UV stabilized polypropylene construction. Meets or exceeds ASTM D226 and D4869. Approved by Dade Country, Florida Building Code, and ICC. Each roll contains approximately 10 squares (1003 sq. ft.) of material and is 54” x 223’. Deck-Armor™ Premium Breathable Roof Deck Protection, by GAF®.

C Premium, all-purpose fiberglass reinforced SBS modified underlayment. Meets or exceeds ASTM D226. Approved by UL and ICC. Each roll contains 2 squares (20.06 sqm.) of material and is 39.37 in. x 65.8 ft. (1m x 20m), Roof Pro™ SBS Modified All-Purpose Underlayment by GAF®.

D Non-woven fiberglass mat underlayment coated on both sides suing a highly filled polymer. Provides a fire barrier and water resistant. Approved by Dade Country, Florida Building Code, and ICC approval. VersaShield Underlayment® by GAF®.

E #15 Roofing Underlayment – By Others: Water repellent breather type cellulose fiber building paper. Meets or exceeds the requirements of ASTM D-4869 Type I.

F #30 Roofing Underlayment - By Others: Water repellent breather type cellulose fiber building paper. Meets or exceeds the requirements of ASTM D-4869 Type II.

2.07 ROOFING CEMENT

A Asphalt Plastic Roofing Cement meeting the requirements of ASTM D 4586, Type I or II.

2.08 ROOF ACCESSORIES

A Exterior acrylic rust resistant aerosol roof accessory paint. Each 6 oz can is available in boxes of 6 and in a wide variety of colors to compliment the roof. Shingle-Match™ Roof Accessory Paint by GAF®.

2.09 ATTIC VENTILATION

A Ridge Vents

1. Flexible rigid plastic ridge ventilator designed to allow the passage of hot air from attics, while resisting snow infiltration. For use in conjunction with eave/soffit ventilation products. Provides 12.5 sq inches NFVA per lineal foot (8065 sq.m/m). Each package contains 20 lineal feet (6.10m) of vent. Cobra® Ridge Runner™ Ridge Vent by GAF®.

2. Flexible ridge ventilator designed to allow the passage of hot air from attics. For use in conjunction with eave/ soffit intake ventilation products. Provides 16.9 inches (1430 mm/m) NFVA (Hand Nail) and 14.1 inches (1193 mm/m) NFVA (Nail Gun) per lineal foot. Cobra® Exhaust Vent, by GAF®.

3. Rigid plastic ridge ventilator designed to allow the passage of hot air out of attics. For use in conjunction with eave/ soffit intake ventilation products. Provides 18.0 sq inches (11613 sq.mm/m) in NFVA per lineal foot. Each package contains 40 lineal feet (12.19m) of vent. Cobra® Rigid Vent 2™ or Cobra® Rigid Vent 3™ ridge vent (includes 3” (76mm) galvanized ring shank nails), by GAF®

http://www.gaf.com/General/DocList.asp?WS=GAF&Silo=ARCH&App=PROD&UID=&CatID=1&ProdID=1&ProdName=SHINGLE%2DMATE%28RT%29



4. Rigid plastic ridge ventilator designed to allow the passage of hot air from attics while prohibiting snow infiltration. For use in conjunction with eave/ soffit intake ventilation products. Provides 18.0 sq inches (11613 sq.mm/m) NFVA per lineal foot. Each package contains 40 lineal feet (12.19m) of vent. Cobra® Snow Country™ or Cobra® Snow Country Advanced™ Ridge Vent (includes 3” (76mm) galvanized ring shank nails), by GAF®.

B Fascia and Soffit/Under Eave Vents

1. Flexible ridge ventilator designed to allow the passage of air into thru the fascia. 1”x3” (25 mm x 76mm) provides a NFVA of 11 square inches per foot and 1½” x3” (38 mm x 76 mm) provides a NFVA of 16 square inches per foot. Cobra® Fascia Vent, by GAF®.

2. PVC soffit/undereave premium intake ventilation providing 9 sq,in, of NFVA. Each section is 12ft. long, 6in. high and 1.25in. thick. Cobra® Fascia Flow™ Premium Intake Ventilation.

3. Surface mounted, screened aluminum, corrosion resistant soffit vent. MasterFlow™ EAC Soffit Vent by GAF®.

4. Surface mounted, high impact resin, oval snap-in designed soffit vent. MasterFlow™ EAP Soffit Vent by GAF®.

5. Continuous aluminum 8ft section soffit vent. MasterFlow™ LSV8 Series Soffit Vent by GAF®.

C Solar Powered Vents

1. Solar powered roof exhaust vent designed to remove damaging heat and moisture from attics. Each vent provides 500 CFM and is solar powered to eliminate related utility costs. Green Machine™ Solar Powered Roof Exhaust Vent, by GAF®.

2. Solar powered intake booster vent designed for houses with insufficient soffit ventilation. Each vent provides up to 500 CFM airflow and is solar powered to eliminate related utility costs. Green Machine™ Solar Powered Intake Booster™ Vent, by GAF®.

3. Solar powered gable mounted exhaust ventilators designed to remove damaging heat and moisture from attics. Each vent provides 500 CFM and is solar powered to eliminate related utility costs. Green Machine™ Solar Powered Gable Vent, by GAF®.

D Dual Powered Vents

1. Dual powered roof exhaust vent designed to remove damaging heat and moisture from attics. Each vent provides 500 CFM and is solar and electric powered to provide continuous operation and reduce related utility costs. Green Machine™ Dual Powered Roof Exhaust Vent, by GAF®.

2. Dual powered gable mounted exhaust ventilators designed to remove damaging heat and moisture from attics. Each vent provides 500 CFM and is solar and electric powered to provide continuous operation and reduce related utility costs. Green Machine™ Dual Powered Gable Vent, by GAF®.

E Powered Vents

1. Powered, rooftop mounted exhaust ventilators designed to evacuate hot air from attics. Each vent permits the passage of 1000 to 1600 c.f.m. Thermostat and/or humidistat controlled. MasterFlow PR Series power roof ventilators, by GAF®.

http://www.gaf.com/General/DocList.asp?WS=GAF&Silo=ARCH&App=PROD&UID=&CatID=4&ProdID=6&ProdName=Master+Flow%28RT%29



2. Powered, gable mounted exhaust ventilators designed to evacuate hot air from attics. Each vent permits the passage of 1280 to 1600 c.f.m. Thermostat and/or humidistat controlled. MasterFlow PG Series power roof ventilators, by GAF®

F Roof Louvers

1. Rooftop mounted, square-top designed, high-impact resin exhaust ventilator designed to evacuate hot air from attics. Each vent provides 60 sq in NFVA. MasterFlow RT-65 Passive Roof Louver, by GAF®.

2. Rooftop mounted, slant-back designed, metal exhaust ventilator designed to evacuate hot air from attics. Each vent provides 60 sq in NFVA. MasterFlow SSB 960A Passive Roof Louver, by GAF®.

3. Rooftop mounted, slant-back designed, high-impact resin exhaust ventilator designed to evacuate hot air from attics. Each vent provides 65 sq in NFVA. MasterFlow IR65 Passive Roof Louver, by GAF®.

4. Rooftop mounted, low-profile square-top designed, high-impact resin exhaust ventilator designed to evacuate hot air from attics. Each vent provides 37 sq in NFVA. MasterFlow IR-61 Passive Roof Louver, by GAF®.

5. Rooftop mounted, square-top, slant-back, metal exhaust ventilator designed to evacuate hot air from attics. Each vent provides 50 sq in NFVA. MasterFlow NSB50A Passive Roof Louver, by GAF®.

6. Rooftop mounted, square-top metal utility ventilator designed to evacuate hot air from attics, bathrooms, and kitchen ducts. Each vent provides 50 sq in NFVA. MasterFlow RV50A Metal Utility Vent, by GAF®.

G Gable Louvers

1. Surfaced mounted, flush or recessed one piece integral construction in thermoformed plastic or aluminum. Masterflow™ DA Series or SL Series Gable Louver by GAF®.

2. Circular surfaced mounted, one piece integral construction high-impact white plastic mini vent. Masterflow™ RLSC Series Circular Louver by GAF®.

H Roof Turbines

1. Rooftop mounted, stainless dual bearing, high performance, aluminum rotary turbine exhaust vents. MasterFlow™ AIC12 & AIC14 Rotary Turbine Vents by GAF®.

2. Rooftop mounted, stainless dual bearing, high performance, galvanized rotary turbine exhaust vents. MasterFlow™ GC12E Rotary Turbine Vent by GAF®.

I Whole House Fans **attic spaces greater than 1000sq.ft only**

1. Interior ceiling mounted belt drive deluxe house fan. Super quiet 1/3 hp permanent split capacitor motor, wall switch operated. MasterFlow™ 30BWHFS Belt Drive Deluxe Whole House Fan by GAF®.

2. Interior ceiling mounted direct drive standard house fan. Super quiet 1/4 hp permanent split capacitor motor, chain switch operated. MasterFlow™ WHFS24M Direct Drive Standard Whole House Fan by GAF®.

3. Interior ceiling mounted tandem whole house fan. 2 speed remote operated. MasterFlow™ WHFTAN1 Tandem Whole House Fan by GAF®.

2.10 VENTILATION ACCESSORIES

A Chimney Cap

1. Stainless steel vented chimney cap. MasterFlow™ CC1313SS Safety Cap by GAF®.













2. Epoxy powder finished vented chimney cap. MasterFlow™ CC99, CC913 and CC1313 Safety Cap by GAF®

3. Epoxy powder finished adjustable bracket mount vented chimney cap. MasterFlow™ CC99, CC913 and CC1313 Safety Cap by GAF®.

B Foundation Vent

1. High Density Polyethylene constructed electric foundation vent provides up to 330 CFM/airflow. Independent laboratory approved. Masterflow™ PFV1 Foundation Vent by GAF®.

2. High Density Polyethylene constructed automatic foundation vent. Masterflow™ FVRABL Foundation Vent by GAF®.

3. Die Cast aluminum positive open/closed damper foundation vent. Masterflow™ 500 Foundation Vent by GAF®.

4. Galvanized steel or aluminum high level ventilation foundation vent. Masterflow™ BVSII Foundation Vent by GAF®.

2.11 NAILS

A Standard round wire, zinc-coated steel or aluminum; 10 to 12 gauge, smooth, barbed or deformed shank, with heads 3/8 inch (9mm) to 7/16 inch (11mm) in diameter. Length must be sufficient to penetrate into solid wood at least 3/4 inch (19mm) or through plywood or oriented strand board by at least 1/8 inch (3.18mm).

2.12 METAL FLASHING 24 gauge hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90/Z275.

B 16-oz/sq ft (0.56mm) copper sheet, complying with ASTM B 370.

C 0.032-inch (0.8mm) aluminum sheet, complying with ASTM B 209.

PART III EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A Do not begin installation until the roof deck has been properly prepared.

B If roof deck preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify the architect or building owner of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.02 PREPARATION Remove all existing roofing down to the roof deck.

B Verify that the deck is dry, sound, clean and smooth. It shall be free of any depressions, waves, and projections. Cover with sheet metal, all holes over 1 inch (25mm) in diameter, cracks over 1/2 inch (12mm) in width, loose knots and excessively resinous areas.

C Replace damaged deck with new materials.

D Clean deck surfaces thoroughly prior to installation of eaves protection membrane and underlayment.

3.03 PREPARATION Clean deck surfaces thoroughly prior to installation of eaves protection membrane and underlayment.

B At areas that receive eaves protection membrane, fill knotholes and cracks with latex filler.

C Install crickets on the upslope side of all chimneys in the north, any chimney wider than 24” (610mm), and on all roofs steeper than 6/12.

3.04 PREPARATION Verify that the deck is structurally sound and free of deteriorated decking. All deteriorated decking shall be removed and replaced with new materials.



B Verify that the existing shingles are dry, sound, clean and smooth. All curled, buckled or loose tabs shall be nailed down or removed.

C Clean shingle surfaces thoroughly prior to installation of eaves protection membrane and underlayment.

3.05 INSTALLATION OF UNDERLAYMENTS General:

1. Install using methods recommended by GAF®, in accordance with local building codes. When local codes and application instructions are in conflict, the more stringent requirements shall take precedence.

B Eaves:

1. Install eaves edge metal flashing tight with fascia boards; lap joints 2 inches (51mm) and seal with plastic cement or high quality urethane sealant; nail at the top of the flange.

2. In the north, and on all roofs between 2/12 and 4/12 (low slopes) install GAF® leak barrier up the slope from eaves edge a full 36 inches (914mm) or to at least 24 inches (610 mm) beyond the interior “warm wall”. Lap ends 6 inches (152mm) and bond.

C Valleys:

1. Install eaves protection membrane at least 36 (914mm) inches wide and centered on the valley. Lap ends 6 inches (152mm) and seal.

2. Where valleys are indicated to be "open valleys", install metal flashing over GAF® leak barrier before GAF® roof deck protection is installed; DO NOT nail through the flashing. Secure the flashing by nailing at 18 inches (457 mm) on center just beyond edge of flashing so that nail heads hold down the edge.

D Hips and Ridges:

1. Install GAF® leak barrier along entire lengths. If ridge vents are to be installed, position the GAF® leak barrier so that the ridge slots will not be covered.

E Roof Deck:

1. Install one layer of GAF® roof deck protection over the entire area not protected by GAF® leak barrier at the eaves or valley. Install sheets horizontally so water sheds and nail in place.

2. On roofs sloped at more than 4:12, lap horizontal edges at least 2 inches (51mm) and at least 2 inches (51mm) over eaves protection membrane.

3. On roofs sloped between 2 :12 and 4:12, lap horizontal edges at least 19 inches (482 mm) and at least 19 inches (482mm) over eaves protection membrane.

4. Lap ends at least 4 inches (102 mm). Stagger end laps of each layer at least 36 inches (914 mm).

5. Lap GAF® roof deck protection over GAF® leak barrier in valley at least 6 inches (152mm).

F Deck-Armor™ Application

1. Deck-Armor shall be installed over a clean, dry deck.

2. Install Weather Watch® or StormGuard® Leak Barrier at eaves, valleys, rakes, skylights, dormers and other vulnerable leak areas.

3. Lay Deck-Armor™ over deck and overlap 3” (76mm) at side laps and 6” (152mm) at end laps.

4. For exposure to rain or snow, overlap 12” (305mm) at end laps.



5. For side and end laps: fasten Deck-Armor 12” (305mm) o.c. (6” (152mm)o.c. for high wind areas).

6. For middle of the roll: fasten Deck-Armor 24” (610mm) o.c. (12” (305mm) o.c. for high wind areas).

7. For exposure to rail or snow, completely cover all side laps, end laps and fasteners with tape.

8. For long term exposure see complete Deck-Armor installation instructions for side lap detail.

9. If roof may be exposed to high winds, apply tape over all fasteners at the center of the roll to prevent rain or snow from entering at the fasteners.

10. For slopes less that 2:12, a double application of Deck-Armor is required. See complete Deck-Armor installation instructions for more information.

G Penetrations:

1. Vent pipes: Install a 24 inch (610 mm) square piece of eaves protection membrane lapping over roof deck underlayment; seal tightly to pipe.

2. Vertical walls: Install eaves protection membrane extending at least 6 inches (152mm) up the wall and 12 inches (305mm) on to the roof surface. Lap the membrane over the roof deck underlayment.

3. Skylights and roof hatches: Install eaves protection membrane from under the built-in counterflashing and 12 inches (305mm) on to the roof surface lapping over roof deck underlayment.

4. Chimneys: Install eaves protection membrane around entire chimney extending at least 6 inches (152mm) up the wall and 12 inches (305mm) on to the roof surface. Lap the membrane over the roof deck underlayment.

5. Rake Edges: Install metal edge flashing over eaves protection membrane and roof deck underlayment; set tight to rake boards; lap joints at least 2 inches (51mm) and seal with plastic cement; secure with nails.

3.06 INSTALLATION OF STARTER SHINGLES

A General:

1. Install in accordance with GAF®'s instructions and local building codes. When local codes and application instructions are in conflict, the more stringent requirements shall take precedence.

2. Refer to application instructions for the selected starter strip shingles.

B Placement and Nailing:

1. For maximum wind resistance along rakes & eaves, install any GAF® starter strip containing sealant or cement shingles to underlayment and each other in a 4" (102mm) width of asphalt plastic roof cement.

2. Place starter strip shingles 1/4" – 3/4" (6 – 19mm) over eave and rake edges to provide drip edge.

3. Nail approximately 1-1/2" – 3" (38 – 76mm) above the butt edge of the shingle.

4. Rake starter course should overlap eave edge starter strip at least 3" (76mm).

3.07 INSTALLATION OF SHINGLES

A General:



1. Install in accordance with GAF®'s instructions and local building codes. When local codes and application instructions are in conflict, the more stringent requirements shall take precedence.

2. Minimize breakage of shingles by avoiding dropping bundles on edge, by separating shingles carefully (not by "breaking" over ridge or bundles), and by taking extra precautions in temperatures below 40 degrees F (4 degrees C).

3. Handle carefully in hot weather to avoid scuffing the surfacing, or damaging the shingle edges.

B Placement and Nailing: Secure with 4, 5, or 6 nails per shingle per GAF®’s instructions or local codes.

2. Placement of nails varies based on the type of shingle specified. Consult the application instructions for the specified shingle for details.

3. Nails must be driven flush with the shingle surface. Do not overdrive or under drive the nails.

4. Shingle offset varies based on the type of shingle specified. Consult the application instructions for the specified shingle for details.

C Placement and Nailing: Beginning with the starter strip, trim shingles so that they “nest” within the shingle located beneath it. This procedure will yield a first course that is typically 3 inch (76mm) to 4 inch (102mm) rather than a fully exposed shingle.

2. Laterally, offset the new shingles from the existing keyways, to avoid waves or depressions caused by excessive dips in the roofing materials.

3. Using the bottom of the tab on existing shingles, align subsequent courses.

4. *Note: DO NOT install standard sized shingles (5inch exposure) over metric (5 5/8 inch exposure) shingles, as it will overexpose the shingles and reveal the nails. Use standard alignment methods to assure proper shingle placement.

5. Secure with 4, 5, or 6 nails per shingle per GAF®’s instructions or local codes.

6. Placement of nails varies based on the type of shingle specified. Consult the application instructions for the specified shingle for details.

7. Nails must be driven flush with the shingle surface. Do not overdrive or under drive the nails.

8. Shingle offset varies based on the type of shingle specified. Consult the application instructions for the specified shingle for details.

D Valleys Install valleys using the "open valley" method:

a Snap diverging chalk lines on the metal flashing, starting at 3 inches (76mm) each side of top of valley, spreading at 1/8 inch per foot (9mm per meter) to the eaves.

b Run shingles to chalk line.

c Trim last shingle in each course to match the chalk line; do not trim shingles to less than 12 inches (305mm) wide.

d Apply a 2 inch (51mm) wide strip of plastic cement under ends of shingles, sealing them to the metal flashing.

2. Install valleys using the "closed cut valley" method:

a Run the first course of shingles from the higher roof slope across the valley at least 12 inches (305mm).



b Run succeeding courses of shingles from the lower roof slope across the valley at least 12 inches (305mm) and nail not closer than 6 inches (152mm) to center of valley.

c Run shingles from the upper roof slope into the valley and trim 2 inches (51mm) from the center line.

3. Install valleys using "woven valley" method: Run shingles from both roof slopes at least 12 inches (305mm) across center of valley, lapping alternate sides in a woven pattern.

b DO NOT nail less than 6 inches (152mm) from the valley center line.

E Penetrations

1. All Penetrations are to be flashed according to GAF®, ARMA and NRCA application instructions and construction details.

F Skylights and Roof Hatches

1. Consult the manufacturer of the skylight or roof hatch for specific installation recommendations.

2. Skylights and roof hatches shall be installed with pre-fabricated metal flashings specifically designed for the application of the unit.

3.08 INSTALLATION OF ATTIC VENTILATION

A General

1. Ventilation must meet or exceed current F.H.A., H.U.D. and local code requirements.

B Ridge / Soffit ventilation

1. Install ridge vent along the entire length of ridges:

2. Cut continuous vent slots through the sheathing, stopping 6 inches (152mm) from each end of the ridge.

3. On roofs without ridge board, make a slot 1 inch (25mm) wide, on either side of the peak (2 inch (51mm) overall).

4. On roofs with ridge board, make two slots 1-3/4 inches (44.5mm) wide, one on each side of the peak (3 ½ inch (89mm) overall).

5. Install ridge vent material along the full length of the ridge, including uncut areas.

6. Butt ends of ridge vent material and join using roofing cement.

7. Install eaves vents in sufficient quantity to equal or exceed the ridge vent area.

C Roof and Gable Louvers:

1. Cut vent hole through sheathing as specified by the manufacturer for the type of vent to be installed.

2. Install a 24 inches (610mm) square of leak barrier, centered around the hole for roof louvers

3. Install according to manufacturers instructions for flashing vent penetrations

4. Install eave vents in sufficient quantity to equal or exceed the exhaust vent area, calculated as specified by manufacturer.

D Powered (& Solar Powered) Ventilators & Roof turbines:

1. Cut vent hole through sheathing as specified by the manufacturer for the type of vent to be installed.



2. On rooftop applications, install a 36 inches (914mm) square of leak barrier, centered around the hole

3. Install according to manufacturers instructions for flashing vent penetrations

4. Install eave vents in sufficient quantity to equal or exceed the exhaust vent area, calculated as specified by manufacturer

E Whole House Fans

1. Install at desired locations in ceiling below attic space per manufacturer recommended location and application instructions.

3.09 INSTALLATION OF VENTILATION ACCESSORIES

A Chimney Caps

1. Install chimney caps to manufacturer recommendations

B Foundation Vents

1. Install foundation vents per manufacturer recommendations and applications.

3.10 PROTECTION

A Protect installed products from foot traffic until completion of the project.

B Any roof areas that are not completed by the end of the workday are to be protected from moisture and contaminants.

END OF SECTION

Boucke / 4-6-12 07 31 26 - 1 Slate Shingles

SECTION 07 31 26

SLATE SHINGLES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Slate roofing shingles.

B. Moisture shedding underlayment.

C. Metal roof flashing.

D. Roofing cant and nailing strips.

E. Roofing nails.


A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Framing and Sheathing.

B. Section 06150 - Wood Decking.

C. Section 07600 - Flashing and Sheet Metal.

D. Section 08620 - Unit Skylights.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM A 167 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.

B. ASTM B 370 - Standard Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction.

C. ASTM B 749 - Standard Specification for Lead and Lead Alloy Strip, Sheet, and Plate Products.

D. ASTM C 406 - Standard Specification for Roofing Slate.

E. ASTM C 920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.

F. ASTM C 1085 - Standard Specification for Butyl Rubber-Based Solvent-Release Sealant.

G. ASTM D 226 - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing.

H. ASTM D 1970 - Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection.

I. ASTM D 2626 - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated and Coated Organic Felt Base Sheet Used in Roofing.

J. NRCA MS104 - The NRCA Steep Roofing Manual; National Roofing Contractors Association.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

Slate Shingles 07 31 26 - 2 Boucke / 4-6-12


B. Product Data: Provide distributor's printed information on material characteristics and application limitations.

C. Installation Instructions: Include distributor's recommendations for substrate preparation and installation of roofing system and related accessories.

D. Shop Drawings: Details for specially configured metal flashing, jointing methods and locations for flashing, and other roofing system details.

E. Selection Samples: Pieces of actual shingle, illustrating complete range of colors available, for Architect's selection.

F. Verification Samples: Actual shingle in color selected, illustrating full range of color variation to be expected in finished work.


A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing slate roofing of the type specified in this section, with not fewer than three years of documented experience.


A. Deliver shingles to project site in distributor's unopened cartons, labeled with data indicating source.

B. Handle shingles to prevent chipping, breakage, soiling, or other damage. Protect edges with wood or other rigid material.

C. Place and stack skids and slate cartons to distribute weight evenly and to prevent breakage or cracking.

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. See Section 01600 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.

B. Provide an additional 3 percent of installed shingles, but not less than one full carton, for Owner's use in roof maintenance.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Provide slate as furnished by Echeguren Slate, Inc.; 1620 Innes Ave. San Francisco, CA 94124. ASD. Tel: (415) 206-9343. Fax: (415) 206-9353. www.echeguren.com.

B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01600.

C. Substitutions: Not permitted.

2.2 SHINGLES

A. Slate Shingles: Hard, dense, sound rock, punched or drilled for two nails each, sorted to eliminate any that have been cracked or broken.


1. Source: Obtain slate required for the project from a single quarry, with consistent color range and texture throughout.

2. Grade: ASTM C 406 Grade S1 or upper limits of S2.

3. Grade: ASTM C 406 Grade S2 or better.

4. Grade: ASTM C 406 Grade S3 or better.

5. Thickness: Nominal 3/16 in (5 mm).



8. Thickness: _______________.

9. Size: 16 in (400 mm) length by 8 in (200 mm) width.



12. Size: _________________.

13. Butt shape: Standard square cut.

14. Butt shape: ________________.

15. Color: Black.

16. Color: Blue-black.

17. Color: Grey.

18. Color: Blue-grey.

19. Color: Purple.

20. Color: Green.

21. Color: Red.

22. Color: Silver-black.

23. Color: As selected by Architect from standard range.

24. Color: _______________.

2.3 UNDERLAYMENT

A. Underlayment: ASTM D 1970, self-adhering rubberized asphalt membrane with high traction surface, internal reinforcement, and back plastic release film.

B. Underlayment: ASTM D 2626; one layer of No.40 coated base sheet.

C. Underlayment: ASTM D 226; two layers of No.30 asphalt impregnated roofing felt.

2.4 SHEET METAL FLASHING


A. Flashing: Terne coated stainless steel; 0.015 inch (0.38 mm) thick stainless steel core material complying with ASTM A 167, Type 304; coated with 0.092 lb/sq ft (450 g/sq m) terne alloy on both sides of core metal.

B. Flashing: ASTM B 370 copper, cold rolled, 16 oz/sq ft (0.56 mm thick), natural finish.

C. Flashing: Lead sheet, 2.5 lb/sq ft (1 mm thick); complying with ASTM B 749.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Nails for Plywood Sheathing: Slater's copper ring shank nail, 11 gage (3 mm), not less than 1-3/4 inches (45 mm) long with 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) head; point must penetrate through underside of deck.

B. Wood Nailers and Cant Strips: Preservative-treated wood, as specified in Section 06114.

C. Plastic Cement: ASTM C 1085, one-part non-sag polymerized butyl sealant.

D. Sealant: ASTM C 920 silicone, low modulus.

2.6 FLASHING FABRICATION

A. Form flashing to profiles indicated on drawings and as required to protect roofing materials from physical damage and shed water.

B. Form sections square and accurate in profile, in maximum possible lengths, free from distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that roofing penetrations and plumbing stacks are in place and properly flashed to deck surface.

B. Verify that roof openings are correctly framed.

C. Verify that deck surfaces are dry and free of ridges, warps, and voids.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with shingle manufacturer's recommendations on preparation of acceptable roof deck.

B. Broom clean deck surfaces prior to installation of underlayment.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Underlayment:

1. Install underlayment over entire deck surface. At hips, valleys, and ridges, install additional 36 inch (915 mm) width of underlayment, centered on the valley or ridge.

2. Ice Dam Protection: Apply additional layer of underlayment at eaves that are subject to icing and back-up of water. Apply from roof edge to a line that


when projected to the horizontal is not less than 24 inches (610 mm) inside of interior wall line.

3. On overhanging eaves that require more than a single 36-inch (915 mm) width of underlayment, overlap not less than 6 inches (152 mm), assuring that overlapped area is located on overhang, outside wall line.

B. Sheet Metal Flashing: Install as indicated and in compliance with details and recommendations of NRCA MS104.

1. Install flashing at all locations where roof intersects other roofs, sidewall or parapet walls, chimneys, ventilators, and similar projections, and at gable edges.

2. Open Valley: Install minimum 20 inch (510 mm) wide open valley metal flashing over 36-inch (915 mm) wide underlayment, with field underlayment lapped over edges of flashing not less than 4 inches (100 mm) . Fasten metal with cleats. Overlap metal a minimum of 5 inches (130 mm).

3. Closed Valley: Install closed valley metal flashing over 36-inch (915 mm) wide underlayment by interleaving shingles with minimum 20-inch (510 mm) wide prepared metal flashing sheets. Attach shingles using copper wires to copper straps nailed beyond the top edge of the metal flashing.

C. Wood Nailer and Cant Strips:

1. Cant strip: Install nominal 1 inch by 2 inches by 48 inches (25 mm by 50 mm by 1220 mm) wood cant strips at eaves. Apply eave flashing and underlayment over cant strip.

2. Cant Strip: Install nominal 1 inch by 2 inches by 48 inches (25 mm by 50 mm by 1220 mm) pressure-treated wood cant strips directly over underlayment at eaves, spacing 1 inch (25 mm) apart for drainage.

3. Nailers: Install nominal 1 inch by 2 inches by 48 inches (25 mm by 50 mm by 1220 mm) pressure-treated wood nailers as detailed at ridge and hips, directly over underlayment. Protect with additional layer of underlayment before installing hip and ridge accessory.

D. Shingles: Comply with details and recommendations of NRCA MS104.

1. Double shingles at eaves and cornice line. Beginning at eaves, project shingle 2 inches (50 mm), and lay shingles in horizontal courses. Provide at least a 3 in (75 mm) head lap between succeeding courses of shingles and stagger joints between courses a minimum of 3 inches (75 mm). Provide 1 inch (25 mm) projection of shingles at gables.

2. Cut and fit shingles neatly around vents, pipes, ventilators, and other roof projections.

3. Nail shingles so nail heads touch shingle lightly, without producing strain on


the slate.

4. Install shingles at ridges and hips in saddle pattern. Lay ridge and hip shingles in plastic cement spread generously over unexposed portions of lower courses and nail in place, covering heads of exposed nails with plastic cement.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Minimize traffic over finished roof surface. If necessary, wear soft-soled shoes and walk on the "butt" of the shingles in order to avoid breakage.

END OF SECTION

Chemistry / 4-6 08 12 16 - 1 Interior Aluminum Frames

SECTION 08 12 16

INTERIOR ALUMINUM FRAMES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section

1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section includes the furnishing and installing:

1. Aluminum door frames.

1.03 RELATED WORK

A. Coordinate work of this Section with work of other Sections as required to properly execute the Work and as necessary to maintain satisfactory progress of the Work of other Sections.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each product specified.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of components including hardware, glazing, and glazing stops. Show attachments to other work.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer’s color charts showing the full range of colors available for units with factory- applied color finishes.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of manufacturer’s standard sizes and of same thickness and material indicated for the work. If finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets showing the full range of variations expected.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed interior aluminum framing systems similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

Interior Aluminum Frames 08 12 16 - 2 Chemistry / 4-6

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing interior aluminum framing systems similar to those indicated for this project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain aluminum frames through one source from a single manufacturer with the capacity and resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.

D. Product Options: Drawings indicate dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction size. Other manufacturer’s products complying with requirements may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section “Product Requirements”

E. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect’s approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.

F. Fire-Rated Door Frames: Frames complying with NFPA 80, UL10C (2009), UBC 7.2 positive pressure, that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire ratings scheduled on the drawings, based on testing according to NFPA 252.


A. Deliver frames palleted, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage.

B. Inspect frames on delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items match new work and are approved by Architect; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed.

C. Store frames at building site under cover and as near as possible to final installation location. Do not use covering material that will cause discoloration of aluminum finish.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install interior aluminum frames until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof; wet work in spaces is complete and dry; flooring, walls, ceilings, and work above ceilings is complete’ and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

B. Field Measurements: Verify interior aluminum frame dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the work.


C. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the work, establish opening and wall dimensions and note on Shop Drawings that these are not measured dimensions. Proceed with fabricating interior aluminum frames without field measurements. Coordinate wall, floor, and ceiling construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Aluma Pro L.P. Houston, Texas

2. Raco Interior Products Houston, Texas

3. Frameworks Manufacturing, Inc., Houston, Texas

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 alloy 6063-T5, or alloy and temper required to suit structural and finish requirements. Billets shall be composed of at least 33% recycled aluminum.

2.03 COMPONENTS

A. General: Provide interior aluminum frame components that comply with dimensions, profiles, and relationships to adjoining work of components indicated on drawings.

B. Door Frames: Extruded aluminum, not less than 0.062-inch (1.6 mm) thick, reinforced for hinges and strikes.

C. Ceiling Tracks: Extruded aluminum, not less than 0.062-inch (1.6 mm) thick.

D. Trim: Extruded aluminum, not less than 0.062-inch (1.6 mm) thick, removable snap-in glass stops and door stops without exposed fasteners.

2.04 ACCESORIES

A. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless-steel or other non-corrosive metal fasteners compatible with frames, stops, panels, reinforcement plates, hardware, anchors, and other items being fastened.

B. Door Silencers (Mutes): Manufacturer’s standard mohair or vinyl.

C. Glazing: As specified in Division 8 Section “Glass and Glazing.”

D. Hardware: As specified in Division 8 Section “Finish Hardware.”

Interior Aluminum Frames 08 12 16 - 4 Chemistry / 4-6

2.05 FABRICATION

A. Machine jambs and prepare for hardware, with concealed reinforcement plates, drilled and tapped as required, and fastened within frame with concealed screws.

B. Provide concealed corner reinforcements and alignment clips precise butt or mitered connections.

C. Fabricate frames for glass to allow glass replacement without dismantling frame.

D. Fabricate all components to allow secure installation without exposed fasteners.

2.06 FINISHES

Factory finish extruded frame so that all parts are of uniform finish and color. Exposed surfaces shall be free of scratches and other serious blemishes.

A. Factory Applied Baked on Enamel: Comply with AAMA 2603/603.8 and AA-DAF-45.

B. Factory Applied Powder Coated Finish: (LEED CREDITS AVAILABLE)

C. Clear Anodized: (QUALIFIES FOR SOME LEED CREDITS) AA-M12C22A21, etched medium matte, clear anodized coating.

2.07 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN

Furnish aluminum frames to meet the following LEED requirements:

A. LEED Indoor Environmental Quality (EQ) Credit 4.2- Low Emitting Materials, Paints, and Coatings.

B. LEED Materials and Resources Credits 4.1/4.2- Recycled Content

C. LEED Materials and Resources Credit 5- Regional Materials.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine walls, floors, and ceilings for suitable conditions where interior aluminum frames are to be installed.

B. Verify that wall thickness does not exceed standard tolerances allowed by throat size indicated.


C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with frame manufacturer’s written installation instructions and approved Shop Drawings.

B. Install frames plumb and square, securely anchored to substrates with fasteners recommended by frame manufacturer.

C. Install partition components in the longest possible lengths; components up to 48 inches (1200 mm) long must be one piece. Fasten to suspended ceiling grid on maximum 48-inch (1200 mm) centers, using sheet metal screws or other fasteners approved by frame manufacturer.

D. Use concealed installation clips to ensure that splices and connections are tightly butted and properly aligned.

E. Secure clips to main structural extrusion components and not to snap-in or trim members.

F. Do not leave screws or other fasteners exposed to view when installation is complete.

3.03 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING

A. Clean exposed frames promptly after installation, using cleaning methods recommended by frame manufacturer.

1. Clean and maintain anodized aluminum according to AAMA 609.

B. Touch up marred areas so touchup is not visible from a distance of 48 inches (1200 mm). Remove and replace frames with damaged finish that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

3.04 PROTECTION

A. Provide protection required to ensure that framing will be without damage or deterioration on Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

Boucke Building: 04/6/2012 08 13 13 - 1 Hollow Metal Door & Frame

SECTION 08 13 13

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION This section includes hollow metal doors with continuously welded edge seams and pre-assembled machine mitered and welded hollow metal frames. Additional work includes door louvers, transom panels, side and transom lites and borrowed lites.

1.02 RELATED WORK NOT INCLUDED A. Installation B. Wood Doors C. Finish Hardware D. Glass and Glazing E. Finish Paint 1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASTM A1008/A1008M-07a: Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable. B. ASTM A1011/A1011M-07a: Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength. C. ASTM A653/A653M-07: Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot Dip Process. D. ASTM A924/A924M-07: Standard Specification General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated by the Hot Dip Process. E. ASTM B117-07: Standard Method of Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus.

F. ANSI/NFPA 80-2007: Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows. G. ANSI/NFPA 252-2003: Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

Hollow Metal Door & Frame 08 13 13 - 2 Boucke Building: 04/6/2012

H. ANSI/NFPA 257-2007: Standard on Fire Test for Window and Glass Block Assemblies. J. ANSI/UL-10B-2001: Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, 9th Edition. K. ANSI/UL-10C-2001: Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, 1st Edition. L. ICBO/UBC 7-2: Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. M. ANSI A250.8-2003: Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. N. ANSI A250.10-1998: Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames. P. ANSI A250.11-2001: Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames. Q. NAAMM/HMMA 861-06: Guide Specifications for Commercial Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. R. NAAMM/HMMA 840-99: Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.

1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit for fabrication a schedule of steel doors and frames.

Include elevations and details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of construction, location of finish hardware and reinforcements and details of joints and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Coordinate glazing of frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements and related contract documents. B. Certificates of Compliance: Submit any information necessary to indicate compliance with this specification.


A. All products shall conform to the requirements of ANSI A250.8 and NAAMM/HMMA 861 as noted in Item 1.03. B. Fire rated assemblies shall conform to the requirements of UL10B, UL10C, NFPA80, NFPA252, and ICBO/UBC 7-2 as noted in Item 1.03.


C. When specified, provide temperature rise assemblies at stairwell enclosures that have a maximum temperature rise rating of 450 degrees F after 30 minutes of exposure.


A. Deliver doors palletized, wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and jobsite storage. All frames shall have spreader bars. B. Inspect doors and frames upon delivery for damage. Minor damage may be repaired on site provided the refinished items are equal in all respects to the new work and acceptable to the Owner and Architect. C. Store doors and frames at the building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4 inch high wood blocking. Avoid the use of non vented plastic or canvas coverings that could create a humidity chamber. If the wrapping on doors becomes wet, remove it immediately. Provide 1/4 inch minimum spaces between the doors to promote air circulation. Store all doors on edge.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Provide manufacturer’s written warranty upon completion and acceptance of all work in this Section.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Provide products designed and manufactured by Security Metal Products Corporation or another of the SDI or NAAMM/HMMA member manufacturers.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Exterior doors and frames shall be manufactured of commercial quality galvanized or galvannealed steel complying with ASTM A653/A653M and with a minimum coating of 0.60 ounces per square foot (0.30 ounces per square foot per side). B. Interior doors and frames shall be manufactured of commercial quality galvanized or galvannealed steel complying with ASTM A653/A653M and with a minimum coating of 0.60 ounces per square foot (0.30 ounces per square foot per side). C. Primer coating shall be manufacturer’s standard and in accordance with ANSI A250.10.

Hollow Metal Door & Frame 08 13 13 - 4 Boucke Building: 04/6/2012

2.03 FABRICATION

A. Doors shall be minimum 18 Ga. for interior, 16 Ga. for exterior, 1-3/4” thick with welded, seamless construction. No visible joints shall be permitted on the exposed faces or edges. Join door skins at vertical edges by continuous welds ground and dressed smooth to provide a flush finish. Reinforce top and bottom with 16 Ga. continuous inverted steel channels spot welded to both faces. Both vertical edges shall be beveled 1/8” in 2”. B. Frames shall be minimum 16 Ga. with machine mitered and welded corners. Knock down frames are not permitted. Provide 16 Ga. anchors as required for attachment to adjacent construction. Minimum quantity shall be four anchors per jamb for doors up to and including 7’-0” in height. One additional anchor shall be provided for each additional 24” of door height. Temporary spreader bars used for shipping purposes shall be welded to the bottom of the frame and will be removed prior to frame installation. Field splice joints, when required for shipping purposes, shall be field welded by others. C. Provide steel reinforcing plates in doors and frames appropriately drilled and tapped for fully mortised and templated hardware in accordance with templates provided by the hardware supplier. Provide adequate reinforcing only for surface applied hardware. Hardware preparation and reinforcement shall be in accordance with minimums described and specified in ANSI/BHMA 156. Provide minimum 26 Ga. mortar guards welded to the back of each hardware cutout.

2.04 FINISH

A. After fabrication, all tool marks and surface imperfections shall be filled, sanded and dressed smooth. All weld joints shall be ground, filled and dressed smooth. All exposed surfaces shall then be coated with a water-based rust inhibitive primer.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Inspect frames for rack, twist or out of square conditions. B. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed and aligned with door opening braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove all temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.

C. Fully fill all frames in masonry or concrete walls with appropriate mortar. D. Install doors plumb and in true alignment with frame head and jambs.


E. Install all fire rated doors and frames in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 80.

F. Install all hardware in accordance with the finish hardware manufacturer’s templates and recommendations.

3.02 CLEAN AND ADJUST

A. Immediately after installation, sand smooth any rusted or marred areas of prime coat and apply touch up of compatible primer. B. Check and adjust all finish hardware items for proper operation prior to final inspection. Remove and replace any defective items.

END OF SECTION

Chemistry Building / 4-6-2012 08 14 00 - 1 Wood Doors

SECTION 08 14 00

Wood Doors


A. Aluminum-clad wood commercial out-swing French hinged doors.


A. Section 07270 (07 27 00) - Air Barriers: Water-resistant barrier.

B. Section 07920 (07 92 00) - Joint Sealants: Sealants and caulking.

C. Section 08710 (08 71 00) - Door Hardware.

1.03 REFERENCES A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA):

1. AAMA 502 - Voluntary Specification for Field Testing of Windows and Sliding Doors.

2. AAMA 2603 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.

3. AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM B 117 - Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus. 2. ASTM C 1036 - Flat Glass. 3. ASTM C 1048 - Heat-Treated Flat Glass – Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and

Uncoated Glass. 4. ASTM D 1149 - Rubber Deterioration – Surface Ozone Cracking in a

Chamber. 5. ASTM D 2803 - Filiform Corrosion Resistance of Organic Coatings on Metal. 6. ASTM D 3656 - Insect Screening and Louver Cloth Woven from Vinyl-

Coated Glass Yarns. 7. ASTM D 4060 - Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by the Taber

Abraser. 8. ASTM E 283 - Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain

Walls and Doors Under Specified Pressure Difference Across the Specimen. 9. ASTM E 330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls

and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 10. ASTM E 547 - Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and

Doors by Cyclic Static Air Pressure Differential. 11. ASTM G 85 - Modified Salt Spray (Fog) Testing.

Wood Doors 08 14 00 - 2 Chemistry Building / 4-6-2012

C. Window and Door Manufacturers Association (WDMA):

1. ANSI/AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2 - Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum, Vinyl (PVC) and Wood Windows and Glass Doors.

2. ANSI/AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2/NAFS-02 - Voluntary Performance Specification for Windows, Skylights and Glass Doors.

3. WDMA I.S.4 - Industry Standard for Water-Repellent Preservative Non-Pressure Treatment for Millwork.

D. Window and Door Manufacturers Association (WDMA):

1. ANSI/AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2 - Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum, Vinyl (PVC) and Wood Windows and Glass Doors.

2. ANSI/AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2/NAFS-02 - Voluntary Performance Specification for Windows, Skylights and Glass Doors.

3. WDMA I.S.4 - Industry Standard for Water-Repellent Preservative Non-Pressure Treatment for Millwork.

1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Doors not rated due to 0 psf water performance with low profile sill.

B. Door Unit Air Leakage, ASTM E 283, 1.57 psf (25 mph): 0.15 cfm per

square foot of frame or less. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Division 1 requirements.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, including installation

instructions. C. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's shop drawings, indicating

dimensions, construction, component connections and locations, anchorage methods and locations, hardware locations, and installation details.

D. Samples: Submit full-size or partial full-size sample of door illustrating

glazing system, quality of construction, and color of finish. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Mockup:

1. Provide sample installation for field testing door performance

requirements and to determine acceptability of door installation methods. 2. Approved mockup shall represent minimum quality required for the

Work. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING


A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site undamaged in manufacturer's or sales branch's original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying manufacturer and product name. Include installation instructions.

B. Storage: Store materials in an upright position, off ground, under cover, and protected from weather, direct sunlight, and construction activities.

C. Handling: Protect materials and finish during handling and installation to prevent damage.

1.08 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit, for Owner’s acceptance, manufacturer’s standard limited warranty document.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Pella Corporation, 102 Main Street, Pella, Iowa 50219. Toll Free (800) 54-PELLA.

Phone (641) 621-1000. Website www.pella.com.

2.02 ALUMINUM-CLAD WOOD COMMERCIAL OUT-SWING FRENCH HINGED DOORS

A. Aluminum-Clad Wood Commercial Out-Swing French Hinged Doors: Architect

Series factory-assembled aluminum-clad wood doors with outward-swing door panels installed in frame.

B. Frame:

1. Select softwood, water-repellent, preservative-treated in accordance with WDMA I.S.4.

2. Interior Exposed Surfaces: Clear pine, veneered and edge-banded with no visible fastener holes.

3. Exterior Surfaces: Clad with aluminum at head and jambs. 4. Metal Sill: Solid aluminum, ADA approved, low profile.

C. Door Panel: 1. Select softwood, water-repellent, preservative-treated in accordance with

WDMA I.S.4. 2. Panels: Three-ply construction. Randomly finger-jointed blocks laminated

with water-resistant glue. 3. Interior Exposed Surfaces: Veneered with pine, clear pine glass stops. 4. Exterior Surfaces: Clad with aluminum.


D. Weather Strip: 1. Head, Jambs, and Astragal: Tri-durometer extruded polymer with

bulb and leaf. 2. Bottom Rail of Door Panel: Tri-durometer extruded polymer with

bulb. Contact sill.

2.03 GLAZING A. Glazing:

1. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Quality 1. a. Tempered Glass: ASTM C 1048.

2. Type: Silicone-glazed 5/8-inch, dual-seal, fully tempered, insulating glass, [clear] [argon-filled multi-layer, Low-E coated] [bronze air-filled multi-layer, Low-E coated] [gray air-filled multi-layer, Low-E coated] [green air-filled multi-layer, Low-E coated].

3. Integral Light Technology Glazing and Grilles: a. Insulating glass contains foam grille grid between 2

panes of glass. b. Foam Grid: Adhered to glass. c. Room Side Grilles: Solid [7/8-inch] [1-1/4-inch] wide clear

pine d. Exterior Grilles: Extruded aluminum. Dimension to match

room side grilles. e. Bars shall be adhered to both sides of insulating glass with VHB \ acrylic adhesive tape and cover foam tape.

f. Finish: Exterior surfaces finished to match door cladding; interior surfaces unfinished, ready for site finishing.

2.04 OPTIONS

A. Interior Removable Grilles (for doors without integral grilles): 1. Profile: [3/4 inch] [1-1/4-inch Colonial]. 2. Removable, solid wood bars, steel-pinned at joints and fitted to sash with steel clips and tacks. 3. Finish: Unfinished, ready for site finishing.

2.05 HARDWARE

A. Hinges: 1. Corrosion-resistant leaves with wear-resistant hinge bushings and stainless steel pin and decorative cap. 2. Doors have 4 hinges. 3. Finish: Match exterior door cladding.

2.06 TOLERANCES

A. Doors shall accommodate the following opening tolerances:


1. Vertical Dimensions Between High and Low Points: Plus 1/8 inch, minus 0 Inch.

2. Width Dimensions: Plus 1/8 inch, minus 0 inch. 3. Building Columns or Masonry Openings: Plus or minus 1/8 inch from plumb.

2.07 FINISH

A. Exterior Finish System: Pella EnduraClad.

1. Exterior extruded aluminum surfaces shall be finished with the following multi-stage system:

a. Clean and etch aluminum surface of oxides. b. Pre-treat with chrome phosphate conversion coating. c. Pre-treat with chromic acid sealer/rinse. d. Top coat with baked-on polyester enamel.

2. Color: _______________ . 3. Performance Requirements: Exterior aluminum finishes shall meet or exceed

the following performance requirements of AAMA 2605: a. Dry Film Hardness: Eagle Turquoise Pencil, F minimum. b. Film Adhesion: 1/16-inch crosshatch, dry, wet, boiling water. c. Impact Resistance: 1/10-inch distortion, no film removal. d. Abrasion Resistance: Falling sand coefficient value of 20 minimum. e. Chemical Resistance: 10 percent Muriatic acid, 15 minutes. Mortar pat

test, 24 hours. f. Detergent Resistance: 3 percent at 100 degrees F, 72 hours. g. Corrosion Resistance: Humidity, 3,000 hours. Salt spray exceeds 3,000

hours.

B. Exterior Finish System: Pella EnduraClad Plus. 1. Exterior extruded aluminum surfaces shall be finished with the following

multi-stage system: a. Clean and etch aluminum surface of oxides. b. Pre-treat with chrome phosphate conversion coating. c. Pre-treat with chromic acid sealer/rinse. d. Prime with baked-on acrylic primer. e. Top coat with baked-on fluorocarbon-based (Kynar 500) thermoplastic

enamel. 2. Color: _______________ . 3. Performance Requirements: Exterior aluminum finishes shall meet or exceed

all performance requirements of AAMA 2605. C. Exterior Finish System Performance Requirements: Pella [EnduraClad]

[EnduraClad Plus]. 1. Exterior aluminum finishes shall meet or exceed following performance

requirements: a. Ozone Deterioration, ASTM D 1149, Modified: 5 ppm ozone, 160

degrees F, 60 percent relative humidity, 100 hours exposure, little or no loss of cure.


b. Filiform Corrosion Resistance of Organic Coatings on Metal, ASTM D 2803: No corrosion.

c. Taber Abrasion Resistance, ASTM D 4060: 500 g weight, CS-10 wheel, 500 cycles, less than 25 g weight loss.

d. Cyclic Acidified Salt Fog Test, ASTM G 85, Appendix A-2.

D. Interior Finish: [Unfinished, ready for site finishing] [Factory-primed with 1 coat acrylic latex].

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to receive doors. Notify Architect of conditions that would

adversely affect installation or subsequent use. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved Shop Drawings.

B. Install doors to be weather-tight and freely operating.

C. Maintain alignment with adjacent work.

D. Secure assembly to framed openings, plumb and square, without distortion.

E. Integrate door system installation with exterior weather-resistant barrier using

flashing/sealant tape. Apply and integrate flashing/sealant tape with weather-resistant barrier using watershed principles in accordance with door manufacturer's instructions.

F. Place interior seal around door perimeter to maintain continuity of building thermal

and air barrier using insulating-foam sealant.

G. Seal door to exterior wall cladding with sealant and related backing materials at perimeter of assembly.

H. Leave doors closed.


A. Field Testing: Field-test windows in accordance with AAMA 502, Test Method A. A representative of the window manufacturer shall be present.


3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean door frames and glass in accordance with Division 1 requirements.

B. Do not use harsh cleaning materials or methods that would damage finish.

C. Remove labels and visible markings. 3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed doors to ensure that, except for normal weathering, doors will be without damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion.

END OF SECTION

Child Care 4-6-2012 08 32 00 - 1 Aluminum Sliding Glass Doors

SECTION 08 32 13

ALUMINUM SLIDING GLASS DOORS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDSES

A. Automatic sliding doors with operator and motion/presence sensor control device.

B. Fully glazed doors and frames of aluminum with sliding operation.

1.02 RELATED SECRIONS

A. Section 07 26 00 Vapor Retarders

B. Section 07 27 00 Air Barriers

C. Section 07 92 00Joint Sealants

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ANSI – American National Standards Institute 1. ANSI/AAMA/NWWDA 101/i.s.2-97 “Voluntary Specification for Aluminum, Vinyl

(PVC) and Wood Windows and Glass Doors” 2. ASRM E 330-96 “Standard Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior

Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors”

B. ASTM – American Society for Testing and Materials 1. ASTM E 283-96 “Standard Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior

Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors” 2. ASTM E 330-96 “Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior

Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference” 3. ASTM E 331-96 “ Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows,

Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure 4. ASTM E 547-96 “ Standard Test Method for Water penetration of Exterior Windows,

Curtain Walls, and Doors by Cyclic Static Air Pressure Differential”

C. AAMA – American Architectural Manufacturers Association 1. AAMA 103.3-93 “ procedural Guide for Aluminum and Vinyl Prime Windows and

Glass Doors, Insulating Storm Products for Windows and Glass Doors and Thermal Performance of Windows and Glass Doors”

Aluminum Sliding Glass Doors 08 32 13 - 2 Child Care 4-6-2012

2. AAMA 1302.5-76 “Voluntary Specifications for Forced-Entry Resistant Aluminum Prime Windows”

1.04 PERFORMANCE REAUIREMENTS

A. Air Infiltration: 1.3 (ft^3)/min/(ft^2) maximum when tested per ASTM E 283 at a 1.57 psf static air pressure difference.

B. Water Resistance: no water leakage when tested per ASRM E 547 at a static air pressure difference of 15% of the positive design pressure.

C. Uniform Load Structural: after testing per ASTM E 330 with a load equal to 150% of the positive design pressure, the unit must be operable, with a maximum permanent deformation in any member of 0.4% of the member’s length.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit according to Division 1 requirements. B. Product Date: provide manufacturer’s standard details, specifications and catalog

information, recommendations, and installation instructions. C. Shop Drawings: include unit elevations, details, of all aluminum door sections, typical

anchorage and installation details, type of glazing and door finish, and interface with other products.

D. Finish Samples: manufacturer’s available colors.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Workmen properly trained and skilled in the installation and

handing of aluminum doors as required for this building. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: minimum five years documented experience in the

manufacture of aluminum doors as required for this building.\

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDING A. Protect the products from damage due to the elements, construction traffic, or other

hazards, from the time of arrival through the completion of the project. B. Store and handle doors and accessories in accordance with the manufacturer’s

instructions.

1.08 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit, for Owner’s acceptance, manufacturer’s standard

limited warranty document.


B. Manufacturer: warrant material and workmanship on all products for a period of three years. Glass only to be warranted for five years against materially obstructed vision or delamination.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. Besam Automated Entrance Systems, Inc., 1900 Airport Road, Monroe, North Carolina 28110. Toll Free (866) BESAM-US. Phone (704)290-5551. Fax (704)290-5555. Web Site www.besam.com. E-Mail [email protected].

2.02 AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOORS

A. Model: Unislide automatic sliding doors.

1. Aluminum doors and frames with sidelite and active door leaves. 2. [Overhead-concealed] [surface-applied], electro-mechanical, microprocessor-controlled, sliding door operator.

3. Operator housing, floor rollers, and door carriers.

2.03 ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Doors and Frames: Extruded aluminum, Alloy 6063-T5. 1. Hydraulic dampers (optional): provide 90 degree stop and cushion door upon

opening and closing during emergency breakout conditions. B. Glass:

1. Glazing Material: ANSI Z97.1.

2. Active Leaves: [1/4-inch (6-mm) glass] [5/8-inch (16-mm) glass insulating units] [1-inch (25-mm) glass insulating units].

3. Sidelites: [1/4-inch (6-mm) glass] [5/8-inch (16-mm) glass insulating units] [1-inch (25-mm) glass insulating units – fixed sidelite units only].

4. Field-glazed or preglazed.

C. Door Carriers:

1. Roller Wheels: 2 steel roller wheels, 1-3/4-inch (44-mm) diameter, per active door leaf for operation over replaceable Delrin track. Single journal with sealed oil-impregnated bearings.

2. 2 self-aligning anti-risers per leaf.

D. Vertical Jambs: 1-3/4 inches (44 mm) by 4-1/2 inches (114 mm).


E. Header:

1. Span: Maximum 16'-0" (4,877 mm) without intermediate supports when using 1/4-inch glass.

2. Size: 7-3/4 inches (187 mm) wide by 6-7/8 inches (175 mm) high.

3. Hinge Point: Allows access for adjustments.

4. Design: Closed header.

F. Stiles: [Narrow – 2-1/8”] [Medium – 4” ] [Wide – 5”].

G. Pivots: Top and bottom concealed pivots, extruded aluminum.

H. Hardware: Breakaway.

I. Exterior Glazing Stop Extrusion: Nonremovable, security-type glazing bead to prevent unauthorized entry.

2.04 SLIDING DOOR OPERATOR

A. Operator:

1. Overhead-concealed or surface-applied, electro-mechanical, microprocessor-controlled.

2. Motor: High-efficiency, energy-efficient, DC motor.

3. Mechanical drive assembly.

4. Microprocessor System: Sets opening and closing speeds based on factory-adjusted configuration settings.

5. Mechanical Limit Switches: Not acceptable.

6. Adjustable Hold Open Time Delay: 0 to 60 seconds.

7. Software: Incorporates self-diagnosing system.

2.05 MOTION AND PRESENCE SENSOR CONTROL DEVICE

A. Model: The BEA Wizard Sliding Door Sensing System 1. Uses planar K-band microwave technology to detect motion and focused active

infrared technology to detect presence, in a single housing. The focused active infrared presence technology overlaps the motion pattern.

2. The active infrared is comprised of 96 spots of detection made out of four rows of 24 spots of detection each (two rows on each side of the door). The focused presence technology never shuts off during closing cycle of the door.

3. The Wizard is self-monitoring (motion and presence sensor) and has the capability to make adjustments with a universal remote control.


4. The self-monitored Wizard communicates with the Unislide through a monitoring connection. The self-monitoring connection allows the door to go into a failsafe mode in the event of a sensor failure.

5. Operating temperature range of –30o F to 131o F. B. Switches and Sensor: Field installed and adjusted.

2.06 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Anodized: [Dark Bronze, AA-C23A44] [Clear, AA-C22A31].

B. Custom: [Stainless steel clad] [Powder coat painted to match Kynar colors] [Kynar]

[ ____________________ ].

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine and measure areas to receive doors. Notify Architect of conditions that would adversely affect installation or subsequent utilization of doors. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Ensure openings to receive frames are plumb, level, square, and in tolerance.

B. Ensure proper support has been provided at operator header.

C. Ensure floor is level and smooth.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ANSI/BHMA 156.10.

B. Install doors and beam plumb, level, square, true to line, and without warp or rack.

C. Anchor frames securely in place.

D. Separate aluminum from other metal surfaces with bituminous coatings or other means approved by Architect.

E. Install exterior doors to be weathertight in closed position.

F. Repair minor damages to finish in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as approved by Architect.

G. Remove and replace damaged components that cannot be successfully repaired as determined by Architect.



A. Manufacturer's Field Services:

1. Manufacturer's representative shall provide technical assistance and guidance for installation of doors.

2. Before placing doors in operation, AAADM certified technician shall inspect and approve doors for compliance with ANSI/BHMA 156.10. Certified technician shall be approved by manufacturer.

3.05 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust doors for proper operation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ANSI/BHMA 156.10.

3.06 CLEANING

A. Clean doors promptly after installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Do not use harsh cleaning materials or methods that would damage glass or finish.

3.07 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed doors and finish to ensure that, except for normal weathering, doors and finish will be without damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion.

Chemistry/221/ 4-6-12 08 44 00 - 1 Glazed Aluminum Curtain Wall

SECTION 08 44 13

GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALL

Series 5600 2-Sided or 4-Sided Structural Glazed Curtain Wall System

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Furnish and install architectural aluminum curtain wall complete with related components as shown on drawings and specified in this section.

B. Curtain Wall System shall be EFCO® Series 5600 2-Sided or 4-Sided Structural Glazed. Other manufacturers requesting approval to bid their product as an equal must submit the following information fifteen days prior to close of bidding. 1. A proposal drawing showing full size details of all curtain wall components including

all anchors and building attachments. 2. Test reports documenting compliance with requirements of Section 1.05.

C. Glass 1. Reference Section 08 81 00 for Glass and Glazing.

D. Single Source Requirement 1. All products listed in Section 1.02 shall be by the same manufacturer.

List work and materials related to this section but specified in other sections. EFCO recommends that one manufacturer furnish all applicable Division 8 products to ensure consistent product quality and compatibility. 1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Section 08 32 13 – Sliding Aluminum – Framed Glass Doors B. Section 08 41 13 – Aluminum – Framed Entrances and Storefronts C. Section 08 44 33 – Sloped Glazing Assemblies D. Section 08 51 13 – Aluminum Windows E. Section 10 71 13 – Exterior Sun Control Devices

1.03 ITEMS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED 1.04 ITEMS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED 1.05 LABORATORY TTESTING AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Test Units 1. Air, water, and structural test unit size shall be a minimum of two (2) stories high and

three (3) lites wide. 2. Thermal test unit sizes shall be 80" (2032 mm) wide x 80" (2032 mm) high with one

(1) intermediate vertical mullion and two (2) lites of glass. B. Test Procedures and Performance

1. Air Infiltration Test

Glazed Aluminum Curtain Wall 08 44 00 - 2 Chemistry/221/ 4-6-12

a. Test unit in accordance with ASTM E 283 at a static air pressure difference of 6.24 psf (300 Pa).

b. Air infiltration shall not exceed .06 cfm/FSF (.31 l/s•m²) of unit. 2. Water Resistance Test

a. Test unit in accordance with ASTM E 331. b. The test for static water penetration (ASTM E 331) shall be conducted at an air

pressure difference of 15.0 psf (720 Pa). There shall be no water leakage as defined by AAMA 501.1, paragraph 5.5.

The specification must establish a minimum air pressure difference at which no water leakage will occur. AAMA recommends an air pressure difference equal to 20% of the positive design wind pressure with a minimum of 6.24 psf (300 Pa) and a maximum of 15.0 psf (720 Pa).

3. Uniform Load Deflection Test

a. Test in accordance with ASTM E 330. b. Deflection under design load shall not exceed L/175 for spans less than 162"

(4114 mm). c. Deflection under design load shall not exceed L/240 +1/4” (6 mm) for spans

greater than 162" (4114 mm).

4. Uniform Load Structural Test a. Test in accordance with ASTM E 330 at a pressure 1.5 times the design wind

pressure in 1.05.4.B.3.b. b. At conclusion of the test there shall be no glass breakage, permanent damage to

fasteners, curtain wall parts, or any other damage that would cause the curtain wall to be defective.

5. Dynamic Water Resistance Test a. Test unit in accordance with AAMA 501. b. There shall be no water leakage at a dynamic test pressure of 15.0 psf (720 Pa).

6. Condensation Resistance Test (CRF) a. Test unit in accordance with AAMA 1503.1. b. Condensation Resistance Factor (CRF) shall not be less than 67 (frame) and 65

(glass) when glazed with 1" (25 mm) insulated – 1/4" (6 mm) clear low emissivity, 1/2" (12 mm) air, 1/4" (6 mm) clear glass.

7. Thermal Transmittance Test (Conductive U-Value) a. Test in accordance with AAMA 1503.1. b. Conductive thermal transmittance (U-Value) shall not be more than 0.53

BTU/hr•ft²•ºF (3.00 W/m²•K) when glazed with 1" (25 mm) insulated – 1/4" (6 mm) clear low emissivity, 1/2" (12 mm) air, 1/4" (6 mm) clear glass.

8. Thermal Transmittance Test (Conductive U-Value) a. Test in accordance with NFRC-102. c. Conductive thermal transmittance (U-Value) shall not be more than 0.49

BTU/hr•ft²•ºF (2.66 W/m²•K) when glazed with 1" (25 mm) insulated – 1/4" (6 mm) clear low emissivity, 1/2" (12 mm) air, 1/4" (6 mm) clear glass.


*U-Values are based on a nominal size of 80" (2032 mm) x 80" (2032 mm) with two lights of glass using AAMA 507-03 and NFRC-102.

9. Seismic Performance a. Test unit in accordance to AAMA 501.4 system to meet design displacement of

0.010 x the greater adjacent story height and ultimate displacement of 1.5 x the design displacement.

10. Sound Transmission Loss a. Test unit in accordance with ASTM E 90-02. b. Sound Transmission Class (STC) shall not be less than 29.

C. Project Wind Loads

Architect to specify design wind pressure, both positive and negative required by the governing building code, as calculated from ASCE 7, or as determined by boundary layer wind tunnel testing. Use 20.0 psf (960 Pa) as a minimum. Stress on structural silicone should not exceed 20.0 psi.

Glass Types Center of Glass EFCO S-5600 CW

U-Value

SHGC U-Value

1” IG: ¼” CLEAR ANNEALED ½” AIR SPACE ¼” CLEAR ANNEALED

0.47 0.70 0.64 BTU/hr•ft²•ºF (3.63 W/m²•K)

1” IG: ¼” BRONZE ANNEALED ½” AIR SPACE ¼” CLEAR ANNEALED

0.47 0.50 0.64 BTU/hr•ft²•ºF (3.63 W/m²•K)

1” IG: ¼” GRAY ANNEALED ½” AIR SPACE ¼” CLEAR ANNEALED

0.47 0.47 0.64 BTU/hr•ft²•ºF (3.63 W/m²•K)

1” IG: ¼” CLEAR ANNEALED LOW EMISSIVITY ½” AIR SPACE ¼” CLEAR ANNEALED

0.29 0.38 0.49 BTU/hr•ft²•ºF (2.78 W/m²•K)

1” IG: ¼” CLEAR ANNEALED LOW EMISSIVITY ½” ARGON ¼” CLEAR ANNEALED

0.24 0.37 0.45 BTU/hr•ft²•ºF (2.55 W/m²•K)

1” IG: ¼” CLEAR ANNEALED ½” TC88 HEAT MIRROR & ARGON ¼” CLEAR ANNEALED

0.21 0.48 0.43 BTU/hr•ft²•ºF (2.44 W/m²•K)


1. The system shall be designed to withstand the following loads normal to the plane of the wall:

a. Positive pressure of psf ( Pa) at non-corner zones. b. Negative pressure of psf ( Pa) at non-corner zones. c. Negative pressure of psf ( Pa) at corner zones. Note to specifier: select either paragraph “D” or “E” based on applicability to project.

D. Anti-Terrorism Force Protection Requirements – DoD Unified Facilities Criteria 1. Design to meet the requirements of UFC 4-010-01 DoD MINIMUM

ANTITERRORISM STANDARDS FOR BUILDINGS, 8 October 2003, including change 1, 22 January

2007. 1. Design of framing and connections shall be based on the following design criteria:

a. Standoff Distance of ( ) ft b. Applicable Explosive Weight of: [Type I], [Type II] (Select one) c. Level of Protection of: [Low], [Very Low] (Select one)

2. Window manufacturer shall provide, with their bid/quote, a “Blast Narrative” describing which design method of the UFC 4-010-01 was utilized to show product compliance to the performance specification in F.2.a., b. and c. above.

E. Anti-Terrorism Force Protection Requirements – GSA-ISC Design Criteria 1. Design of framing and connections shall be based on inelastic dynamic analysis

utilizing the following design criteria: a. Peak reflective pressure ( ) psi at an impulse of ( ) psi-msec.

2. GSA glass performance level (based on Wingard 5.5.1) shall be [1], [2], [3a], [3b], [4], [5] (Select one)

3. End rotations of framing members supporting laminated glass shall not exceed ( ) degrees.

4. Ductility of framing members supporting laminated glass shall not exceed ( ). 5. Maximum deflection of framing members supporting laminated glass shall not exceed

L/ ( ). 6. Window manufacturer shall provide, with their bid/quote, a sample calculation using

non-linear dynamic analysis methods demonstrating product compliance to the performance specifications for a typical member for the project.

7. Window manufacturer shall provide, with their bid/quote, a “Blast Narrative” to accompany the dynamic calculations in section G.6. “Blast Narrative” shall define design methods and philosophy used by the manufacturer to show product compliance to the performance specifications in Section G above.

1.06 FIELD TESTING AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Optional at discretion of specifier.

A. Test Units 1. Air, water, and structural test unit size shall be a representative sample of typical

construction and shall have no outstanding punch list or other visible defects. If no test area and/or location have been identified, the persons doing the test shall select an


area. This area shall be selected to provide representative performance data, usually a minimum of 100 ft2. The area to be tested shall include perimeter caulking, typical splices, frame intersections, and, if applicable, at least 2 entire vision lites and 2 entire spandrel lites containing an intermediate horizontal member. All operable components within the test area shall be isolated and exempt from the test procedure.

Architect should insert an exact description of the area(s) to be field tested. Failure to do so can dramatically affect the cost of testing. The recommended procedure for identification of the test area is to reference an architectural elevation/plan drawing that clearly shows the intent of the area to be field tested.

B. Test Procedures and Performance

1. Air Infiltration Test a. Test unit in accordance with AAMA 503-03 for field testing. The unit test shall be

conducted at a minimum uniform static test pressure differential of at least 1.57 psf (75 Pa), but at a pressure differential not to exceed 6.24 psf (300 Pa).

b. The maximum allowable rates of air leakage for field testing shall not exceed 1.5 times the project specification rate or .09 cfm/SF (.45 l/s•m²), whichever is greater.

The specifier may require project specific air leakage; however, this must be stipulated in Section 1.06.B.1 of this specification.

2. Water Resistance Test

a. Test unit in accordance with AAMA 503-03. b. The field water penetration resistance tests shall be conducted at a static test

pressure of two-thirds of the specified project water penetration test pressure, but not less than 6.24 psf (300 Pa).

The specifier may increase the field water test pressure to the value specified for the project; however, this must be stipulated in Section 1.06.B.2 of this specification. In the event that the project does not have a specified water penetration test pressure, the value will be equal to 20% of the positive design wind load times 0.67.


A. Provide test reports from AAMA accredited laboratories certifying the performance as specified in 1.05.

B. Test reports shall be accompanied by the curtain wall manufacturer’s letter of certification stating that the tested curtain wall meets or exceeds the referenced criteria for the appropriate curtain wall type.

1.08 REFERANCES 1.09 SUBMITTALS


Insert quantity of shop drawings required.

A. Contractor shall submit ( ) copies of all shop drawings to the architect for his approval.

Drawings shall show scale elevations and sections. Full size sections shall be shown only when needed for clarity. Drawings shall show construction of all parts of the work, including metal and glass thickness, methods of joining, details of all field connections and anchorage, fastening and sealing methods, metal finishes, and all pertinent information. Relationship to other work should be clearly indicated. No work shall be fabricated until shop drawings for that work have been finally approved for fabrication.

B. Contractor shall submit finish samples, test reports, and warranties. 1. Samples of materials as may be requested without cost to owner, i.e., metal, glass,

fasteners, anchors, frame sections, mullion section, corner section, etc. 1.10 WARRANTIES

A. Total Curtain Wall System 1. The responsible contractor shall assume full responsibility and warrant for one year

the satisfactory performance of the total curtain wall installation. This includes the glass (including insulated units), glazing, anchorage and setting system, sealing, flashing, etc. as it relates to air, water, and structural adequacy and the specifications and approved shop drawings.

2. Any deficiencies due to such elements not meeting the specifications shall be corrected by the responsible contractor at their expense during the warranty period.

B. Material and Workmanship 1. Per AAMA standard 601, provide written guarantee against defects in material and

workmanship.

Optional: include Anodic finish in material and workmanship warranty. 2. Warranty period shall be for 3 years from the date of final shipment.

C. Glass 1. Provide written warranty for insulated glass units, that they will be free from obstruction of vision as a result of dust or film formation on the internal glass surfaces caused by failure of the hermetic seal due to defects in material and workmanship. 2. Warranty period shall be for 10 (ten) years.

D. Organic finish 1. Provide organic finish and warranty based on AAMA standard 2603.

OR

1. Provide organic finish and warranty based on AAMA standard 2604. OR

1. Provide organic finish and warranty based on AAMA standard 2605


PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum 1. Extruded aluminum shall be 6063-T6 alloy and temper.

B. Glass 1. Insulated glass shall be 1" (25 mm) consisting of ( ) exterior, ( ) air spacer, and

( ) interior. OR 1. Glass shall be 1/4" (6 mm) monolithic.

C. Dissimilar Metals 1. All dissimilar metals must be properly insulated to prevent galvanic action.

D. Fasteners 1. All exposed fasteners shall be aluminum, stainless steel, or zinc plated steel.

E. Anchors 1. Perimeter and floor line anchors shall be aluminum or steel. All steel anchors shall be

properly insulated from the aluminum. F. Thermal Barrier

1. The thermal barrier shall be extruded PVC used as an applied thermal isolator.

Optional at discretion of specifier. G. Sustainable Design

1. The materials specified in this section are intended to have applicable credits toward LEED® certification. Provide documentation in accordance with USGBC’s LEED for New Construction and Major Renovation (insert one) version 2.2 or version 3 (2009), verifying that the components, processes or assemblies specified herein conform to the following requirements.

Select the credits required for the specified level of certification being sought. Modify the criterion as needed to coincide with other LEED® standards.

a) EA Credit 1: Optimize Energy Performance i. Provide area weighted overall U-Factor in accordance with section 1.05 ii. Provide area weighted center of glass or overall SHGC in accordance with

section 1.05 b) EA Credit 2: On site renewable energy

i. Provide coordination for glazing of photovoltaic panels or other energy generating glazing.

c) MR Credit 1.1 and 1.2: Building Reuse i. Provide windows and accessories which allow easy retrofit and minimal

demolition into existing building conditions. d) MR Credit 4.1 and 4.2: Recycled Content.

i. Provide aluminum framing with overall recycled content values of minimum 60%. All secondary aluminum must comply with alloy and temper requirements outlined in section 2.01. A.1.

ii. Overall recycled content must contain the following levels of post and pre consumer recycled content.


a) Post consumer content no less than 5% b) Pre consumer content no less than 50%

iii. Submit documentation outlining recycled content percentages (post and pre consumer content separately) and the weight of aluminum in proportion to the overall assembly weight.

NOTE: Glass components are a large portion of total assembly weight and do not contribute to the recycled content value.

e) MR Credit MR 5.1 and 5.2: Regional Materials (only for projects located within 500 miles of Monett Missouri)

i. Provide assemblies that are manufactured as well as use materials that are harvested, recovered or extracted from within 500 miles of the job site.

f) EQ Credit 2: Increased ventilation i. Provide operable vents with occupant-enabled hardware. ii. Provide operable vent quantity and sizes as shown on project drawings.

g) EQ Credit 4.1 and 4.2: Low-Emitting Materials (adhesives, sealants / paints and coatings)

i. Verify that the as shipped product does not require any on site application of adhesives, sealants, paints or coatings other than perimeter or installation sealants.

ii. All interior “on site” applied primers, structural glazing adhesives, metal to metal sealants and cosmetic seals must meet applicable South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule #1168 VOC limits.

h) EQ Credit 6.1: Controllability of Systems - Lighting i. Provide windows with internal occupant controlled blinds.

i) EQ Credit 6.2: Controllability of Systems - Thermal Comfort i. Provide operable vents with occupant-enabled hardware. ii. Provide operable vent quantity and sizes as shown on project

drawings. j) EQ Credit 8.1 and 8.2: Daylight and Views

i. Provide Glass with visual light transmittance (VT) as outlined in section 2.01 E.

ii. Provide operable vent quantity and sizes as shown on project drawings. 2.02 FABRICATION

A. General 1. All aluminum vertical and horizontal main frame extrusions shall have a minimum

wall thickness of .093" (2.3 mm) to .125" (3 mm). B. Frame

1. Frame components shall be mechanically fastened by means of extruded aluminum shear blocks attached to vertical mullions.

2. Curtain wall system is able to accommodate separate interior and exterior finishes and colors.

C. Glazing 1. The 2-sided structural glazed curtain wall shall include a dense silicone spacer and

silicone sealant at the structural joint, and can be captured horizontally by means of an exterior aluminum pressure plate and cover.


2. The horizontals are dry glazed using an interior and exterior dense EPDM preset gasket.

D. Finish See separate finish specification for more details.

1. Anodic a. Finish all exposed areas of aluminum curtain wall and components with

electrolytically deposited color in accordance with Aluminum Association Designation AA-( ). Exterior color shall be ( ) and interior color shall be ( ).

Available colors are clear, champagne, light bronze, medium bronze, dark bronze, and black.

AA Description Description Arch. Class AAMA Guide Spec. AA-M10-C22-A41 Clear Anodized I 611-98 AA-M10-C22-A44 Color Anodized I 611-98

OR

1. Organic

a. Finish all exposed areas of aluminum curtain wall and components with ( ). Exterior color shall be ( ) and interior color shall be ( ).

High performance 70% PVDF fluoropolymer Ultrapon™ and 50% PVDF fluoropolymer Ultraflur™ finishes are available in standard colors. Reference the EFCO color brochure for assistance in color and resin selection. Custom colors are available upon request. AA Description Description AAMA Guide Spec. AA-M12-C42-R1X 70% PVDF Ultrapon™ 2605-98 AA-M12-C42-R1X 50% PVDF Ultraflur™ 2604-98

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION

A. Job Conditions 1. All openings shall be prepared by others to the proper size and shall be plumb, level,

and in the proper location and alignment as shown on the architect's drawings. Optional at discretion of specifier 2. Provide for manufacturer representation to conduct pre-installation site meeting.


3.02 INSTALLIATION

A. Use only skilled tradesmen with work done in accordance with approved shop drawings and established specifications, and erect all curtain wall components to all building bench marks and column center lines.

B. Plumb and align curtain wall faces in a single plane for each wall plane, and erect curtain wall materials square and true. Adequately anchor to maintain positions permanently when subjected to normal thermal movement, building movement, and specified wind loads.

C. Adjust windows in curtain wall for proper operation after installation. D. Furnish and apply sealants to provide a weather tight installation at all joints and

intersections and at opening perimeters. Wipe off excess material, leave all exposed surfaces and joints clean and smooth.

3.03 ANCHORAGE

A. Adequately anchor to maintain positions permanently when subjected to normal thermal movement, specified building movement, and specified wind loads.

3.04 PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A. The general contractor shall protect the aluminum materials and finish against damage from construction activities and harmful substances. The general contractor shall remove any protective coatings as directed by the architect and shall clean the aluminum surfaces as recommended for the type of finish applied.

EFCO is a registered trademark of EFCO Corporation. Ultrapon and Ultraflur are trademarks of EFCO Corporation. 3/17/2011

END OF SECTION

SECTION 08 51 23

STEEL WINDOWS

PART 1 GENERAL


A.


A. Section 08 50 00 – Windows:

B. Section

1.03 REFERENCES

A.

Chemistry Building / 04-06-12 08 71 00 - 1 Kickplates

SECTION 08 71 00

Kickplates

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Kickplates for door protection.


A. Section 10 26 00 – Wall and Door Protection: Manufactured protective devices made of finish materials.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

B. National Building Code of Canada (NBC)

C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

D. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE)

E. Underwriters Laboratory (UL)

F. Underwriters Laboratory of Canada (ULC)

G. Underwriters Laboratory, Canada Accepted (cUL)

H. Uniform Building Code (UBC)


A. Deliver materials in unopened factory packaging to the jobsite

B. Inspect materials at delivery to assure that specified products have been received.

C. Store in original packaging in a climate controlled location away from direct sunlight.


A. Products must be installed in an interior climate controlled environment.

Masonry Mortar 08 71 00 - 2 Chemistry Building / 04-06-2012

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Vinyl: Rigid Vinyl Kickplates shall be manufactured from chemical and stain resistant

polyvinyl chloride with the addition of impact modifiers.

B. Stainless Steel: kickplates shall be manufactured from Type 430, 16 gauge. Stainless

Steel. Options: Type 430, 14 and 18 gauge; Type 304 (meets NSF Standard 51), 16 and

14 gauge.

C. Gold Titanium Stainless Steel: Kickplates shall be manufactured from Type 304, 18

gauge Stainless Steel with a Titanium Gold surface.

2.02 COMPONENTS

1. Adhesive: Field applied heavy duty adhesive.

2. Fasteners: Beveled mounting holes and stainless steel screws.

2.03 FINISHES

A. Vinyl- Colors or patterns of the kickplates to be selected by the architect from the finish

selection. Surface shall have a haircell texture.

B. Vinyl- Patterns of the smooth kickplates to be selected by the architect from the finish

selection. Surface shall have a smooth finish.

C. Stainless Steel- No. 4 Satin Finish.

D. Gold Titanium Stainless Steel- Mirror Finish.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions in which the kickplate systems will be installed.

1. Complete all finishing operations, including painting, before beginning

installation of kickplate system materials.

Chemistry Building / 04-06-12 08 71 00 - 3 Kickplates

B. Door surface shall be dry and free from dirt, grease and loose paint.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. General: Prior to installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris and loose particles.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the kickplate as indicated on the approved detail drawing for the appropriate

substrate and in compliance with the IPC installation instructions. Install kickplate level and

plumb at the height indicated on the drawings.

B. Installation of Rigid Vinyl Kickplate

1. Contact Cement: Adhere to substrate with Fastbond 30, a nonflammable, high strength,

water-dispersed contact adhesive, with very little odor. Smooth roll surface.

2. Factory Applied Adhesive: Adhere to substrate with manufacturer applied self-stick

adhesive. Smooth roll surface.

C. Installation of Stainless Steel Kickplate

1. Surface must be dry, clean and properly sealed.

2. Cement on - Apply a bead of PL Premium Heavy Duty Adhesive in a zig zag pattern

over the back of the kickplate. Position kickplate on the door and apply pressure until a

tight fit is achieved.

3. Screw on - Position the kickplate on the wall and attach it using the supplied stainless

steel screws.

4. Remove the protective plastic covering from the exposed surface of the kickplate.

3.04 CLEANING

A. At completion of the installation, clean surface in accordance with the IPC clean up and

maintenance instructions.

END OF SECTION

Forestry 4-6-12 08 81 00 - 1

SECTION 08 81 00

GLASS


A. High performance architectural glass.

B. High performance architectural insulating glass. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 08400 – Entrances and Storefronts: Exterior Entrances and Storefront.

B. Section 08500 - Windows: Exterior Windows.

C. Section 08900 – Glazed Curtainwall: Exterior Curtainwall. 1.3 REFERENCES

A. ANSI Z97.1 - American National Standard for Glazing Materials Used in Buildings - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test.

B. ASCE 7 - "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures".

C. ASTM International (ASTM):

(1) ASTM C 162 – Standard Terminology of Glass and Glass Products. (2) ASTM C 1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass. (3) ASTM C 1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass -- Kind HS, Kind

FT Coated and Uncoated Glass. (4) ASTM C 1172 – Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass. (5) ASTM C 1376 - Standard Specification for Pyrolitic and Vacuum Deposition Coatings

on Flat Glass. (6) ASTM E 2188 - Standard Test Method for Insulating Glass Unit Performance. (7) ASTM E 2189 – Standard Test Method for Testing Resistance to Fogging in Insulating

Glass Units. (8) ASTM E 2190 – Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and

Evaluation. 1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Manufacturers of Glass Products: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications.

B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C

1036.

C. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit that contains dehydrated air or other specified gas.

D. Sealed Insulating Glass Unit Surface Designations:

(1) Surface 1 – Exterior surface of the outer glass lite.

Insulated Glass 08 81 00 - 2 Forestry 4-6-12

(2) Surface 2 – Interspace surface of the outer glass lite. (3) Surface 3 – Interspace surface of the inner glass lite. (4) Surface 4 – Interior surface of the inner glass lite.


A. General: Provide glass capable of withstanding thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) as specified in paragraph B following.

B. Glass Design: Glass thickness designations indicated are minimums and are for detailing

only. Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites in the thickness designations indicated for various size openings, but not less than thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or exceed the following criteria: (1) Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E 1300,

according to the following requirements: Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to the Project according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 6.5, "Method 2-Analytical Procedure," based on mean roof heights above grade indicated on Drawings. 1) Basic Wind Speed: ______ mph. 2) Importance Factor: ______. 3) Exposure Category: ______. Specified Design Snow Loads: As indicated on Drawings, but not less than snow loads applicable to Project as required by ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 7.0, "Snow Loads." Probability of Breakage for Vertical Glazing: ______ lites per 1000 for lites set vertically or not more than 15 degrees off vertical. 4) Wind Load Duration: Short duration, as defined in ASTM E 1300 or

______ seconds or less. Probability of Breakage for Sloped Glazing: ______ per 1000 for lites set greater than 15 degrees off vertical. 5) Wind Load Duration: Short duration, as defined in ASTM E 1300 or

______ seconds or less. 6) Snow Load Duration: Long duration, as defined in ASTM E 1300 or

______ days. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For the following types of glass supported on all 4 edges, provide thickness required that limits center deflection at design wind pressure to ______ times the short side length or 1 inch, whichever is less. 7) For monolithic-glass lites heat treated to resist wind loads. 8) For insulating glass.

C. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from

ambient and surface temperatures changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components.

D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties

specified based on manufacturer's published test data, as determined according to procedures indicated below: (1) For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 1/4 inch (6.0 mm)

thick. (2) For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for

overall unit and for each lite. (3) Center-of-Glass Values: Based on using LBL-44789 WINDOW 5.0 computer program

for the following methodologies: U-Factors: NFRC 100 expressed as Btu/ sq. ft. per h per degree F.


Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: NFRC 200. Solar Optical Properties: NFRC 300.

1.6 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.

C. Verification Samples: For the following products, in the form of 12 inch (305 mm) square samples for insulating glass units.

D. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings for glazed openings in

preparing a schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location.

E. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. (1) For solar-control low-e-coated glass, provide documentation demonstrating that

manufacturer of coated glass is certified by coating manufacturer.

F. Qualification Data: For installers.

G. Product Test Reports: For each of the following types of glazing products: (1) Tinted float glass. (2) Coated float glass. (3) Insulating glass.

H. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Sustainable Design Certification: Glass shall be Cradle to Cradle certified, minimum Silver Level, by McDonough Braungart Design Chemistry, LLC.

B. Fabricator Qualifications: PPG Certified Fabricator Network, as acceptable to the

manufacturer.

C. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted in glass installations with a record of successful in-service performance; and who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association Glazier Certification Program as Level 2 (Senior Glaziers) or Level 3 (Master Glaziers).

D. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain the following through one source from a single

manufacturer for each glass type: clear float glass, coated float glass and insulating glass.

E. Glass Product Testing: Obtain glass test results for product test reports in "Submittals" Article from a qualified independent testing agency accredited according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program.

F. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product

manufacturers and industry organizations, including but not limited to those below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. (1) IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "Glazing Guidelines for

Sealed Insulating Glass Units."


(2) GANA Publications: “Laminated Glazing Reference Manual”; “Glazing Manual.” (3) AAMA: “Sloped Glazing Guidelines.” (4) IGMA: “Guidelines for Sloped Glazing.”

G. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least

one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the following testing and inspecting agency: (1) Insulating Glass Certification Council. (2) Associated Laboratories, Inc.

H. Safety Glazing Products: Comply with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 and, for wired glass, ANSI Z97.1. (1) Subject to compliance with requirements, obtain safety glazing products permanently

marked with certification label of the Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

(2) Lites more than 9 square feet (sf) (0.84 sq. m) in area are required to be Category II materials.

(3) Where glazing units, including Kind FT glass and laminated glass, are specified in Part 2 articles for glazing lites more than 9 sf in area, provide glazing products that comply with Category II materials, and for lites 9 sf. or less in area, provide glazing products that comply with Category I or II materials.


A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.

B. For insulating-glass units that will be exposed to substantial altitude changes, comply with

insulating-glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing to avoid hermetic seal ruptures.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to the glass fabricator in which the coated glass manufacturer agrees to replace coated glass units that deteriorates during normal use within the specified warranty period. Deterioration of the coated glass is defined as peeling and/or cracking, or discoloration that is not attributed to glass breakage, seal failure, improper installation, or cleaning and maintenance that is contrary to the manufacturer’s written instructions. (1) Warranty Period: ______ years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Manufacturer's Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which the

insulating glass unit manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate during normal use within the specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass units is defined as an obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or a film on the interior surfaces of the glass caused by a failure of the hermetic seal that is not attributed to glass breakage, improper installation, or cleaning and maintenance that is contrary to the manufacturer’s written instructions. (1) Warranty Period: ______ years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Manufacturer’s Warranty on Laminated Glass: Manufacturer’s standard form in which the

laminated glass manufacturer agrees to replace laminated glass units that deteriorate during normal use within the specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects, such as discoloration, edge separation, or blemishes exceeding those allowed by


ASTM C 1172 that are not attributed to glass breakage, improper installation, or cleaning and maintenance that is contrary to the manufacturer’s written instructions. (1) Warranty Period: ______ years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: PPG Industries, Inc., Glass Group; Glass Business and Discovery Center., 400 Guys Run Rd., Cheswick, PA 15024. ASD. Toll Free Tel: (800) 377-5267. Fax: (800) 367-2986. Web: http://www.ppgglazing.com.

B. Substitutions: Not permitted.

C. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section

01600. 2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent flat glass), Quality-Q3; of class indicated.

B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent flat glass); Quality-Q3; of

class, kind, and condition indicated. (1) Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion

parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed, unless otherwise indicated. (2) Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed float glass

where needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with glass design requirements specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article.

(3) For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A. (4) For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other uncoated

glass). (5) Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass in place of annealed or Kind HS (heat-

strengthened) float glass where safety glass is indicated or required.

C. Pyrolitic-Coated Float Glass: ASTM C 1376, float glass with metallic-oxide coating applied by pyrolitic deposition process during initial manufacture, and complying with other requirements specified.

D. Sputter-Coated Float Glass: ASTM C 1376, float glass with metallic-oxide or -nitride coating

deposited by vacuum deposition process after manufacture and heat treatment (if any), and complying with other requirements specified.

E. Tempered Patterned Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Type II (patterned flat

glass), Class 1 (clear), Form 3 (patterned); and of quality, finish, and pattern specified.

F. Insulating-Glass Units, General: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, and complying with ASTM E 774 for Class CBA units and with requirements specified in this Article and in Part 2 "Insulating-Glass Units" Article. (1) Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed glass where

needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with glass design requirements specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article.


(2) Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) glass lites where safety glass is indicated or required.

(3) Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: Dimensions indicated for insulating-glass units are nominal and the overall thicknesses of units are measured perpendicularly from outer surfaces of glass lites at unit's edge.

(4) Sealing System: Comply with requirements in Section 07920 - Joint Sealants. Dual seal, with primary and secondary sealants of polyisobutylene and silicone.

(5) Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction complying with the following requirements:

Spacer Material: Aluminum with mill or clear anodic finish. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or blend of both. Corner Construction: Manufacturer's standard corner construction.

2.3 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS

A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.

2.4 UNCOATED INSULATING GLASS

A. Type: Clear Insulating Glass. Clear color, low-reflective outdoor appearance. (1) Product: Clear + Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) clear glass + 1/2 inch (13mm) air space +

1/4 inch (6mm) clear glass. (3) Performance Values: Visible Light Transmission – 79 percent; SHGC – 0.70; Shading

Coefficient – 0.81; Outdoor Visible Light Reflectance – 15 percent. (4) Heat Transfer Coefficient: U-Value Winter – 0.47, U-Value Summer – 0.50.

B. Type: Uncoated Ultra-Clear Float Glass. Ultra clear, low-reflective outdoor appearance.

(1) Product: “Starphire®” + “Starphire” by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Starphire” glass + 1/2 inch (13mm) air

space + 1/4 inch (6mm) “Starphire” glass. (3) Performance Values: Visible Light Transmission – 84 percent; SHGC – 0.82; Shading


C. Type: Uncoated Tinted Insulating Glass. Light Green color, low-reflective glass outdoor

appearance. (1) Product: “Solexia™” + Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Solexia” (transparent) Float Glass + 1/2

inch (13mm) air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) Clear (transparent) Float Glass. (3) Performance Values: Visible Light Transmission – 69 percent; SHGC – 0.49; Shading


D. Type: Uncoated Tinted Insulating Glass. Emerald Green color, low-reflective outdoor

appearance. (1) Product: “Atlantica™” + Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Atlantica” (transparent) Float Glass +

1/2 inch (13mm) air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) Clear (transparent) Float Glass. (3) Performance Values: Visible Light Transmission – 60 percent; SHGC – 0.40; Shading



E. Type: Uncoated Tinted Insulating Glass. Aqua-Green color, low-reflective outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Caribia®” + Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Caribia” (transparent) Float Glass + 1/2



F. Type: Uncoated Tinted Insulating Glass. Light Blue-Gray, low-reflective glass outdoor

appearance. (1) Product: “Optiblue®” + Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Optiblue” (transparent) Float Glass + 1/2



G. Type: Uncoated Tinted Insulating Glass. Aquamarine color, low-reflective glass outdoor

appearance. (1) Product: “Azuria™” + Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Azuria” (transparent) Float Glass + 1/2



H. Type: Uncoated Tinted Insulating Glass. Warm Bronze color, low-reflective glass outdoor

appearance. (1) Product: “Solarbronze®” + Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Solarbronze” (transparent) Float Glass +



I. Type: Uncoated Tinted Insulating Glass. Cool Gray color, low reflective glass outdoor

appearance. (1) Product: “Solargray®” + Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Solargray” (transparent) Float Glass +



J. Type: Uncoated Tinted Insulating Glass. Gray color with Warm Bronze undertone, low-

reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Optigray®” 23 + Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Optigray” 23 (transparent) Float Glass +



K. Type: Uncoated Tinted Insulating Glass. Dark gray color with cool blue undertone, low-

reflective glass outdoor appearance.


(1) Product: “Graylite®” + Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Graylite” (transparent) Float Glass + 1/2



L. Type: Uncoated Tinted Insulating Glass. Sky blue color, low-reflective glass outdoor

appearance. (1) Product: “SolarblueTM” + Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Solarblue” (transparent) Float Glass +



M. Type: Uncoated Tinted Insulating Glass. Dark blue color, low-reflective glass outdoor

appearance. (1) Product: “PacificaTM” + Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Pacifica” (transparent) Float Glass + 1/2



2.5 LOW-E INSULATING GLASS

A. Type: Low-E Clear Insulating Glass. Clear color, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Sungate®” 500 (2) Clear + Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) Clear Glass, Pyrolitic Coated on second

surface (2) + 1/2 inch (13mm) air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) Clear (transparent) Float Glass.

(3) Performance Values: Visible Light Transmission – 74 percent; SHGC – 0.62; Shading Coefficient – 0.71; Outdoor Visible Light Reflectance – 17 percent.

(4) Heat Transfer Coefficient: U-Value Winter – 0.35, U-Value Summer – 0.35.

B. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Clear color, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: Clear + “Sungate®” 500 (3) Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) Clear Glass, + 1/2 inch (13mm) air space

+ 1/4 inch (6mm) Clear (transparent) Float Glass “Sungate” 500 (Sputtered) Coated on third surface (3).



C. Type: Pyrolitic Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Light Green color, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solexia™” + “Sungate®” 500 (3) Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Solexia” Glass, + 1/2 inch (13mm) air

space + 1/4 inch (6mm) Clear (transparent) Float Glass “Sungate” 500 (Pyrolitic) Coated on third surface (3).




D. Type: Pyrolitic Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Dark Green color, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Atlantica™” + “Sungate®” 500 (3) Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Atlantica™” Glass, + 1/2 inch (13mm) air




E. Type: Pyrolitic Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Aqua-Green, low-reflective outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Caribia®” + “Sungate®” 500 (3) Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Caribia” Glass, + 1/2 inch (13mm) air




F. Type: Pyrolitic Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Light Blue-Gray, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Optiblue®” + “Sungate®” 500 (3) Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Optiblue®” Glass, + 1/2 inch (13mm) air




G. Type: Pyrolitic Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Aquamarine color, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Azuria™” + “Sungate®” 500 (3) Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Azuria” Glass, + 1/2 inch (13mm) air




H. Type: Pyrolitic Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Warm Bronze color, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarbronze®” + “Sungate®” 500 (3) Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Solarbronze” Glass, + 1/2 inch (13mm)

air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) Clear (transparent) Float Glass “Sungate” 500 (Pyrolitic) Coated on third surface (3).



I. Type: Pyrolitic Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Cool Gray color, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solargray®” + “Sungate®” 500 (3) Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Solargray” Glass, + 1/2 inch (13mm) air





J. Type: Pyrolitic Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Gray with Warm Bronze undertone color, low-reflective glass appearance. (1) Product: “Optigray®” 23 + “Sungate®” 500 (3) Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Optigray®” 23 Glass, + 1/2 inch (13mm)

air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) Clear (transparent) Float Glass “Sungate” 500 (Pyrolitic) Coated on third surface (3).



K. Type: Pyrolitic Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Dark Gray color, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Graylite®” + “Sungate®” 500 (3) Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Graylite®” Glass, + 1/2 inch (13mm) air




L. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Sky blue color, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “SolarblueTM” + “Sungate®” 500 (3) Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Solarblue” Glass, + 1/2 inch (13mm) air




M. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Dark blue color, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “PacificaTM” + “Sungate®” 500 (3) Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Pacifica” Glass, + 1/2 inch (13mm) air




N. Type: Low-E Clear Insulating Glass. Clear color, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Sungate®” 400 (2) Clear + Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) Clear Glass, “Sungate” 400 (Sputtered)

on second surface (2), + 1/2 inch (13mm) air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) Clear (transparent) Float Glass.



O. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Light Green color, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: Clear + “Sungate®” 400 (3) Clear by PPG Industries, Inc.


(2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) Clear Glass, + 1/2 inch (13mm) air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) Clear (transparent) Float Glass “Sungate” 400 (Sputtered) Coated on third surface (3).


(4) Heat Transfer Coefficient: U-Value Winter – 0.32, U-Value Summer – 0.31. P. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Light Green color, low-reflective glass outdoor

appearance. (1) Product: “Solexia™” + “Sungate®” 400 (3) Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Solexia” Glass, + 1/2 inch (13mm) air

space + 1/4 inch (6mm) Clear (transparent) Float Glass “Sungate” 400 (Sputtered) Coated on third surface (3).



Q. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Dark Green color, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Atlantica™” + “Sungate®” 400 (3) Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Atlantica™” Glass, + 1/2 inch (13mm) air




R. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Aqua-Green, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Caribia®” + “Sungate®” 400 (3) Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Caribia” Glass, + 1/2 inch (13mm) air




S. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Light Blue-Gray, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Optiblue®” + “Sungate®” 400 (3) Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Optiblue®” Glass, + 1/2 inch (13mm) air




T. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Aquamarine color, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Azuria™” + “Sungate®” 400 (3) Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Azuria” Glass, + 1/2 inch (13mm) air





U. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Warm Bronze color, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarbronze®” + “Sungate®” 400 (3) Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Solarbronze” Glass, + 1/2 inch (13mm)

air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) Clear (transparent) Float Glass “Sungate” 400 (Sputtered) Coated on third surface (3).



V. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Cool Gray color, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solargray®” + “Sungate®” 400 (3) Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Solargray” Glass, + 1/2 inch (13mm) air




W. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Gray with Warm Bronze undertone color, low-reflective glass appearance. (1) Product: “Optigray®” 23 + “Sungate®” 400 (3) Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Optigray” 23 Glass, + 1/2 inch (13mm)

air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) Clear (transparent) Float Glass “Sungate” 400 (Sputtered) Coated on third surface (3).



X. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Dark Gray color, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Graylite®” + “Sungate®” 400 (3) Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Graylite” Glass, + 1/2 inch (13mm) air




Y. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Sky blue color, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “SolarblueTM” + “Sungate®” 400 (3) Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Solarblue” Glass, + 1/2 inch (13mm) air




Z. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Dark blue color, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “PacificaTM” + “Sungate®” 400 (3) Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Pacifica” Glass, + 1/2 inch (13mm) air





AA. Type: Low-E Clear Insulating Glass. Clear color, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarban®” 60 (2) Clear + Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) Clear Glass, “Solarban” 60 Solar Control

(Sputtered) on second surface (2), + 1/2 inch (13mm) air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) Clear (transparent) Float Glass.



BB. Type: Ultra-Clear Low-E Insulating Glass. Ultra-Clear, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarban®” 60 (2) “Starphire®” + “Starphire®” by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Starphire” Glass, “Solarban” 60 Solar

Control (Sputtered) on second surface (2), + 1/2 inch (13mm) air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) “Starphire” Float Glass.



CC. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Emerald green color, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarban®” 60 (2) “Atlantica™” + Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Atlantica™” Glass, “Solarban” 60 Solar

Control (Sputtered) on second surface (2), + 1/2 inch (13mm) air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) Clear Float Glass.



DD. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Aquamarine color, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarban®” 60 (2) “Azuria™” + Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Azuria™” Glass, “Solarban” 60 Solar




EE. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Aqua-green color, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarban®” 60 (2) “Caribia®” + Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Caribia®” Glass, “Solarban” 60 Solar




FF. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Cool gray color, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarban®” 60 (2) “Solargray®” + Clear by PPG Industries, Inc.


(2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Solargray®” Glass, “Solarban” 60 Solar Control (Sputtered) on second surface (2), + 1/2 inch (13mm) air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) Clear Float Glass.



GG. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Light-green color, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarban®” 60 (2) “Solexia™” + Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Solexia™” Glass, “Solarban” 60 Solar




HH. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Warm bronze color, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarban®” 60 (2) “Solarbronze®” + Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Solarbronze” Glass, “Solarban” 60 Solar




II. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Sky blue color, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarban®” 60 (2) “Solarblue™” + Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Solarblue” Glass, “Solarban” 60 Solar




JJ. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Dark blue color, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarban®” 60 (2) “Pacifica™” + Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Pacifica” Glass, “Solarban” 60 Solar




KK. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Emerald Green color, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Atlantica™” + “Solarban®” 60 (3) Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Atlantica™” Glass, + 1/2 inch (13mm) air

space + 1/4 inch (6mm) Clear Float Glass “Solarban” 60 Solar Control (Sputtered) on third surface (3).




LL. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Aquamarine color, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Azuria™” + “Solarban®” 60 (3) Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Azuria™” Glass, + 1/2 inch (13mm) air




MM. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Aqua-Green color, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Caribia®” + “Solarban®” 60 (3) Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Caribia®” Glass, + 1/2 inch (13mm) air




NN. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Dark Gray color, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Graylite®” + “Solarban®” 60 (3) Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Graylite®” Glass, + 1/2 inch (13mm) air




OO. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Gray with Warm Bronze undertone color, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Optigray®” 23 + “Solarban®” 60 (3) Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Optigray” 23 Glass, + 1/2 inch (13mm)

air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) Clear Float Glass “Solarban” 60 Solar Control (Sputtered) on third surface (3).



PP. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Warm Bronze color, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarbronze®” + “Solarban®” 60 (3) Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Solarbronze” Glass, + 1/2 inch (13mm)

air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) Clear Float Glass “Solarban” 60 Solar Control (Sputtered) on third surface (3).



QQ. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Cool Gray color, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solargray®” + “Solarban®” 60 (3) Clear by PPG Industries, Inc.


(2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Solargray” Glass, + 1/2 inch (13mm) air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) Clear Float Glass “Solarban” 60 Solar Control (Sputtered) on third surface (3).



RR. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Light Green color, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solexia™” + “Solarban®” 60 (3) Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Solexia™” Glass, + 1/2 inch (13mm) air




SS. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Sky blue color, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarblue™” + “Solarban®” 60 (3) Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Solarblue” Glass, + 1/2 inch (13mm) air




TT. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Dark blue color, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Pacifica™” + “Solarban®” 60 (3) Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Pacifica” Glass, + 1/2 inch (13mm) air




UU. Type: Low-E Insulating Glass. Steel Blue-Gray, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarban®” z50 (2) “Optiblue®” + Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Optiblue” (tinted) Float Glass, “Solarban”

z50 Solar Control (Sputtered) on second surface (2), + 1/2 inch (13mm) air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) Clear Float Glass.



VV. Type: Low-E Insulating Glass. Deep Steel Blue-Gray, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarban®” z50 (2) “Optiblue®” + “Optiblue” by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Optiblue” (tinted) Float Glass, “Solarban”

z50 Solar Control (Sputtered) on second surface (2), + 1/2 inch (13mm) air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) “Optiblue” Float Glass.




WW. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Glacial Blue, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Azuria™” + “Solarban®” z50 (3) “Optiblue®” by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Azuria” Glass + 1/2 inch (13mm) air

space + 1/4 inch (6mm) “Optiblue” Glass, “Solarban” z50 Solar Control (Sputtered) on third surface (3).



XX. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Spruce Green, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Atlantica™” + “Solarban®” z50 (3) “Optiblue®” by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Atlantica” Glass + 1/2 inch (13mm) air




YY. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Soft Teal, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Caribia®” + “Solarban®” z50 (3) “Optiblue®” by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Caribia” Glass + 1/2 inch (13mm) air




ZZ. Type: Low-E Insulating Glass. Light Blue-Gray, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Optiblue®”+ “Solarban®” z50 (3) “Optiblue®” by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Optiblue” Glass + 1/2 inch (13mm) air




AAA. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Blue Grass Gray, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solexia™” + “Solarban®” z50 (3) “Optiblue®” by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Solexia” Glass + 1/2 inch (13mm) air




BBB. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Warm Bronze, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarbronze®” + “Solarban®” z50 (3) “Optiblue®” by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) ‘Solarbronze” Glass + 1/2 inch (13mm)

air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) “Optiblue” Glass, “Solarban” z50 Solar Control (Sputtered) on third surface (3).




CCC. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Dark Gray, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance.

(1) Product: “Solargray®” + “Solarban®” z50 (3) “Optiblue®” by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Solargray” Glass + 1/2 inch (13mm) air




DDD. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Steel Blue color, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “SolarblueTM” + “Solarban®” z50 (3) Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Solarblue” Glass, + 1/2 inch (13mm) air

space + 1/4 inch (6mm) “Optiblue” (tinted) Float Glass, “Solarban” z50 Solar Control (Sputtered) Coated on third surface (3).



EEE. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Rich Cobalt Blue color, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “PacificaTM” + “Solarban®” z50 (3) Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Pacifica” Glass, + 1/2 inch (13mm) air

space + 1/4 inch (6mm) “Optiblue” (tinted) Float Glass, “Solarban” z50 Solar Control (Sputtered) Coated on third surface (3).



FFF. Type: Low-E Clear Insulating Glass. Clear, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarban®” 70XL (2) “Starphire®” + “Starphire®” by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Starphire” Glass, “Solarban” 70XL Solar

Control (Sputtered) on second surface (2) + 1/2 inch (13mm) air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) “Starphire” Glass.



GGG. Type: Low-E Clear Insulating Glass. Clear, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarban®” 70XL (2) “Starphire®” + Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Starphire” Glass, “Solarban” 70XL Solar

Control (Sputtered) on second surface (2) + 1/2 inch (13mm) air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) Clear Glass.



HHH. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Emerald green color, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarban®” 70XL (2) “Atlantica™” + Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Atlantica™” Glass, “Solarban” 70XL

Solar Control (Sputtered) on second surface (2), + 1/2 inch (13mm) air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) Clear Float Glass.




III. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Aquamarine color, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarban®” 70XL (2) “Azuria™” + Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Azuria™” Glass, “Solarban” 70XL Solar




JJJ. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Aqua-green color, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarban®” 70XL (2) “Caribia®” + Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Caribia®” Glass, “Solarban” 70XL Solar




KKK. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Cool gray color, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarban®” 70XL (2) “Solargray®” + Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Solargray®” Glass, “Solarban” 70XL




LLL. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Light-green color, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarban®” 70XL (2) “Solexia™” + Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Solexia™” Glass, “Solarban” 70XL Solar




MMM. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Warm bronze color, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarban®” 70XL (2) “Solarbronze®” + Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Solarbronze” Glass, “Solarban” 70XL




NNN. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Sky blue color, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarban®” 70XL (2) “Solarblue™” + Clear by PPG Industries, Inc.


(2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Solarblue” Glass, “Solarban” 70XL Solar Control (Sputtered) on second surface (2), + 1/2 inch (13mm) air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) Clear Float Glass.



OOO. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Dark blue color, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarban®” 70XL (2) “Pacifica™” + Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Pacifica” Glass, “Solarban” 70XL Solar




PPP. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Emerald Green, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solexia™” + “Solarban®” 70XL (3) “Starphire®” by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Solexia” Glass, + 1/2 inch (13mm) air

space + 1/4 inch (6mm) “Starphire” Glass, “Solarban” 70XL Solar Control (Sputtered) on third surface (3).



QQQ. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Emerald Green, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Atlantica™” + “Solarban®” 70XL (3) “Starphire®” by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Atlantica” Glass, + 1/2 inch (13mm) air




RRR. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Aqua Green, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Caribia®” + “Solarban®” 70XL (3) “Starphire®” by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Caribia” Glass, + 1/2 inch (13mm) air




SSS. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Aqua Blue, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Azuria™” + “Solarban®” 70XL (3) “Starphire®” by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Azuria” Glass, + 1/2 inch (13mm) air





TTT. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Warm Bronze, low-reflective glass outdoor

appearance. (1) Product: “Solarbronze®” + “Solarban®” 70XL (3) “Starphire®” by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Solarbronze” Glass, + 1/2 inch (13mm)

air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) “Starphire” Glass, “Solarban” 70XL Solar Control (Sputtered) on third surface (3).



UUU. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Cool Gray, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solargray®” + “Solarban®” 70XL (3) “Starphire®” by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Solargray” Glass, + 1/2 inch (13mm) air




VVV. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Dark Gray with Warm Bronze undertone, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Optigray®” 23 + “Solarban®” 70XL (3) “Starphire®” by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Optigray” 23 Glass, + 1/2 inch (13mm)

air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) “Starphire” Glass, “Solarban” 70XL Solar Control (Sputtered) on third surface (3).



WWW. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Dark Cool Gray, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Graylite®” + “Solarban®” 70XL (3) “Starphire®” by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Graylite” Glass, + 1/2 inch (13mm) air




XXX. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Sky blue color, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarblue™” + “Solarban®” 70XL (3) “Starphire®” by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Solarblue” Glass, + 1/2 inch (13mm) air




YYY. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Dark blue color, low-reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Pacifica™” + “Solarban®” 70XL (3) “Starphire®” by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Pacifica” Glass, + 1/2 inch (13mm) air




(4) Heat Transfer Coefficient: U-Value Winter – 0.28, U-Value Summer – 0.26. 2.6 REFLECTIVE INSULATING GLASS

A. Type: Reflective Tinted Insulating Glass. Subtly Reflective Aqua Blue outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Vistacool™” (2) “Azuria®” + Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Azuria” Glass, “Vistacool” (Pyrolitic) on

second surface (2), + 1/2 inch (13mm) air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) Clear Float Glass. (3) Performance Values: Visible Light Transmission – 47 percent; SHGC – 0.34; Shading


B. Type: Reflective Tinted Insulating Glass. Subtly Reflective Dark Blue outdoor appearance.

(1) Product: “Vistacool™” (2) “Pacifica®” + Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Pacifica” Glass, “Vistacool” (Pyrolitic) on



C. Type: Reflective Tinted Insulating Glass. Subtly Reflective Aqua Green outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Vistacool™” (2) “Caribia®” + Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Caribia” Glass, “Vistacool” (Pyrolitic) on



D. Type: Reflective Tinted Insulating Glass. Subtly Reflective Gray outdoor appearance.

(1) Product: “Vistacool™” (2) “Solargray®” + Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Solargray” Glass, “Vistacool” (Pyrolitic)

on second surface (2), + 1/2 inch (13mm) air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) Clear Float Glass.



E. Type: Reflective Tinted Solar Control Low-E Insulating Glass. Natural Green Metallic outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarcool®” (1) “Solexia™” + Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Solarcool (1) Solexia” Glass, “Solarcool”

(Pyrolitic) on first surface (1), + 1/2 inch (13mm) air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) Clear Float Glass.



F. Type: Reflective Tinted Insulating Glass. Light Green Metallic outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarcool®” (2) “Solexia™” + Clear


(2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “ Solarcool (2) Solexia” Glass, “Solarcool” (Pyrolitic) on second surface (2), + 1/2 inch (13mm) air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) Clear Float Glass.



G. Type: Reflective Tinted Solar Control Low-E Insulating Glass. Warm Green Metallic outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarcool®” (1) “Caribia®” + Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Solarcool (1) Caribia” Glass, “Solarcool”




H. Type: Reflective Tinted Insulating Glass. Warm Green Metallic outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarcool®” (2) “Caribia®” + Clear. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “ Solarcool (2) Caribia” Glass, “Solarcool”

(Pyrolitic) on second surface (2), + 1/2 inch (13mm) air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) Clear Float Glass.


(4) Heat Transfer Coefficient: U-Value Winter – 0.48, U-Value Summer – 0.50. I. Type: Reflective Tinted Solar Control Low-E Insulating Glass. Dark Blue Metallic outdoor

appearance. (1) Product: “Solarcool®” (1) “Pacifica®” + Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Solarcool (1) Pacifica” Glass, “Solarcool”




J. Type: Reflective Tinted Insulating Glass. Dark Blue Metallic outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarcool®” (2) “Pacifica®” + Clear. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “ Solarcool (2) Pacifica” Glass,

“Solarcool” (Pyrolitic) on second surface (2), + 1/2 inch (13mm) air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) Clear Float Glass.



K. Type: Reflective Tinted Solar Control Low-E Insulating Glass. Green Metallic outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarcool®” (1) “Azuria™” + Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Solarcool (1) Azuria” Glass, “Solarcool”




L. Type: Reflective Tinted Insulating Glass. Dark Blue/Green Metallic outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarcool®” (2) “Azuria™” + Clear


(2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “ Solarcool (2) Azuria” Glass, “Solarcool” (Pyrolitic) on second surface (2), + 1/2 inch (13mm) air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) Clear Float Glass.



M. Type: Reflective Tinted Solar Control Low-E Insulating Glass. Bronze Metallic outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarcool®” (1) “Solarbronze®” + Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Solarcool (1) Solarbronze” Glass,

“Solarcool” (Pyrolitic) on first surface (1), + 1/2 inch (13mm) air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) Clear Float Glass.



N. Type: Reflective Tinted Insulating Glass. Bronze Metallic outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarcool®” (2) “Solarbronze®” + Clear (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Solarcool (2) Solarbronze” Glass,



(4) Heat Transfer Coefficient: U-Value Winter – 0.48, U-Value Summer – 0.50. O. Type: Reflective Tinted Solar Control Low-E Insulating Glass. Sky Blue Metallic outdoor

appearance. (1) Product: “Solarcool®” (1) “SolarblueTM” + Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Solarcool (1) Solarblue” Glass,




P. Type: Reflective Tinted Insulating Glass. Sky Blue Metallic outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarcool®” (2) “SolarblueTM” + Clear. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “ Solarcool (2) Solarblue” Glass,




Q. Type: Reflective Tinted Solar Control Low-E Insulating Glass. Gray Metallic outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarcool®” (1) “Solargray®” + Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Solarcool (1) Solargray” Glass,




R. Type: Reflective Tinted Insulating Glass. Gray Metallic outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarcool®” (2) “Solargray®” + Clear


(2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Solarcool (2) Solargray” Glass, “Solarcool” (Pyrolitic) on second surface (2), + 1/2 inch (13mm) air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) Clear Float Glass.



S. Type: Reflective Tinted Solar Control Low-E Insulating Glass. Dark Gray Metallic outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarcool®” (1) “Graylite®” + Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Solarcool (1) Graylite” Glass, “Solarcool”




T. Type: Reflective Tinted Insulating Glass. Dark Gray Metallic outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarcool®” (2) “Graylite®” + Clear (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “ Solarcool (2) Graylite” Glass,



(4) Heat Transfer Coefficient: U-Value Winter – 0.48, U-Value Summer – 0.50. 2.7 REFLECTIVE LOW E INSULATING GLASS

A. Type: Reflective Tinted Low-E Insulating Glass. Subtly Reflective Aqua Blue outdoor

appearance. (1) Product: “Vistacool™” (2) “Azuria®” + “Sungate®” 500 (3) Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Azuria” Glass, “Vistacool” (Pyrolitic) on

second surface (2), + 1/2 inch (13mm) air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) Clear Float Glass, Low-E Coating “Sungate” 500 (Pyrolitic) on third surface (3).



B. Type: Reflective Tinted Low-E Insulating Glass. Subtly Reflective Aqua Green outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Vistacool™” (2) “Caribia®” + “Sungate®” 500 (3) Clear by PPG Industries,

Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Caribia” Glass, “Vistacool” (Pyrolitic) on




C. Type: Reflective Tinted Low-E Insulating Glass. Subtly Reflective Gray outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Vistacool™” (2) “Solargray®” + “Sungate®” 500 (3) Clear by PPG Industries,

Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Solargray” Glass, “Vistacool” (Pyrolitic)

on second surface (2), + 1/2 inch (13mm) air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) Clear Float Glass, Low-E Coating “Sungate” 500 (Pyrolitic) on third surface (3).




D. Type: Reflective Tinted Low-E Insulating Glass. Subtly Reflective Dark Blue outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Vistacool™” (2) “Pacifica®” + “Sungate®” 500 (3) Clear by PPG Industries,

Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Pacifica” Glass, “Vistacool” (Pyrolitic) on




E. Type: Reflective Tinted Low-E Insulating Glass. Light Green Metallic outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarcool®” (2) “Solexia™” + “Sungate®” 500 (3) Clear by PPG Industries,

Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Solexia” Glass, “Solarcool” (Pyrolitic) on




F. Type: Reflective Tinted Low-E Insulating Glass. Aqua-Green Metallic outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarcool®” (2) “Caribia®” + “Sungate®” 500 (3) Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Caribia” Glass, “Solarcool” (Pyrolitic) on




G. Type: Reflective Tinted Low-E Insulating Glass. Green Metallic outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarcool®” (2) “Azuria™” + “Sungate®” 500 (3) Clear by PPG Industries,

Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Azuria” Glass, “Solarcool” (Pyrolitic) on




H. Type: Reflective Tinted Low-E Insulating Glass. Bronze Metallic outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarcool®” (2) “Solarbronze®” + “Sungate®” 500 (3) Clear by PPG

Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Solarbronze” Glass, “Solarcool”

(Pyrolitic) on second surface (2), + 1/2 inch (13mm) air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) Clear Float Glass, Low-E Coating “Sungate” 500 (Pyrolitic) on third surface (3).



I. Type: Reflective Tinted Low-E Insulating Glass. Cool Gray Metallic outdoor appearance.


(1) Product: “Solarcool®” (2) “Solargray®” + “Sungate®” 500 (3) Clear by PPG Industries, Inc.

(2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Solargray” Glass, “Solarcool” (Pyrolitic) on second surface (2), + 1/2 inch (13mm) air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) Clear Float Glass, Low-E Coating “Sungate” 500 (Pyrolitic) on third surface (3).



J. : Reflective Tinted Low-E Insulating Glass. Sky Blue Metallic outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarcool®” (2) “SolarblueTM” + “Sungate®” 500 (3) Clear by PPG Industries,

Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Solarblue” Glass, “Solarcool” (Pyrolitic)

on second surface (2), + 1/2 inch (13mm) air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) Clear Float Glass, Low-E Coating “Sungate” 500 (Pyrolitic) on third surface (3).



K. : Reflective Tinted Low-E Insulating Glass. Dark Blue Metallic outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarcool®” (2) “Pacifica®” + “Sungate®” 500 (3) Clear by PPG Industries,

Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Pacifica” Glass, “Solarcool” (Pyrolitic) on




L. Type: Reflective Tinted Low-E Insulating Glass. Dark Gray Metallic outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarcool®” (2) “Graylite®” + “Sungate®” 500 (3) Clear by PPG Industries,

Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Graylite” Glass, “Solarcool” (Pyrolitic) on


(3) Performance Values: Visible Light Transmission – 3 percent; SHGC – 0.14; Shading Coefficient – 0165; Outdoor Visible Light Reflectance – 5 percent.


M. Type: Reflective Tinted Low-E Insulating Glass. Subtly Reflective Aqua Blue outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Vistacool™” (2) “Azuria®” + “Sungate®” 400 (3) Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Azuria” Glass, “Vistacool” (Pyrolitic) on

second surface (2), + 1/2 inch (13mm) air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) Clear Float Glass, Low-E Coating “Sungate” 400 (Sputtered) on third surface (3).



N. Type: Reflective Tinted Low-E Insulating Glass. Subtly Reflective Aqua Green outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Vistacool™” (2) “Caribia®” + “Sungate®” 400 (3) Clear by PPG Industries,

Inc.


(2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Caribia” Glass, “Vistacool” (Pyrolitic) on second surface (2), + 1/2 inch (13mm) air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) Clear Float Glass, Low-E Coating “Sungate” 400 (Sputtered) on third surface (3).



O. Type: Reflective Tinted Low-E Insulating Glass. Subtly Reflective Gray outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Vistacool™” (2) “Solargray®” + “Sungate®” 400 (3) Clear by PPG Industries,


on second surface (2), + 1/2 inch (13mm) air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) Clear Float Glass, Low-E Coating “Sungate” 400 (Sputtered) on third surface (3).



P. Type: Reflective Tinted Low-E Insulating Glass. Subtly Reflective Gray outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Vistacool™” (2) “Pacifica®” + “Sungate®” 400 (3) Clear by PPG Industries,





Q. Type: Reflective Tinted Low-E Insulating Glass. Light Green Metallic outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarcool®” (2) “Solexia™” + “Sungate®” 400 (3) Clear by PPG Industries,





R. Type: Reflective Tinted Low-E Insulating Glass. Aqua-Green Metallic outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarcool®” (2) “Caribia®” + “Sungate®” 400 (3) Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Caribia” Glass, “Solarcool” (Pyrolitic) on




S. Type: Reflective Tinted Low-E Insulating Glass. Green Metallic outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarcool®” (2) “Azuria™” + “Sungate®” 400 (3) Clear by PPG Industries,

Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Azuria” Glass, “Solarcool” (Pyrolitic) on





T. Type: Reflective Tinted Low-E Insulating Glass. Bronze Metallic outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarcool®” (2) “Solarbronze®” + “Sungate®” 400 (3) Clear by PPG


(Pyrolitic) on second surface (2), + 1/2 inch (13mm) air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) Clear Float Glass, Low-E Coating “Sungate” 400 (Sputtered) on third surface (3).



U. Type: Reflective Tinted Low-E Insulating Glass. Cool Gray Metallic outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarcool®” (2) “Solargray®” + “Sungate®” 400 (3) Clear by PPG Industries,

Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Solargray” Glass, “Solarcool” (Pyrolitic)




V. Type: Reflective Tinted Low-E Insulating Glass. Sky Blue Metallic outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarcool®” (2) “SolarblueTM” + “Sungate®” 400 (3) Clear by PPG Industries,

Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Solarblue” Glass, “Solarcool” (Pyrolitic)




W. Type: Reflective Tinted Low-E Insulating Glass. Dark Blue Metallic outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarcool®” (2) “Pacifica®” + “Sungate®” 400 (3) Clear by PPG Industries,

Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Pacifica” Glass, “Solarcool” (Pyrolitic) on




X. Type: Reflective Tinted Low-E Insulating Glass. Dark Gray Metallic outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarcool®” (2) “Graylite®” + “Sungate®” 400 (3) Clear by PPG Industries,

Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Graylite” Glass, “Solarcool” (Pyrolitic) on




Y. Type: Solar Control Low-E Clear Insulating Glass. Neutral Steel Metallic outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarban®” 80 (2) Clear + Clear by PPG Industries, Inc.


(2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) Clear Glass, “Solarban” 80 Solar Control (Sputtered) on second surface (2), + 1/2 inch (13mm) air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) Clear Float Glass.



Z. Type: Solar Control Low-E Clear Insulating Glass. Green-Gray Metallic outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarban®” 80 (2) Clear + “Optiblue®” by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) Clear Glass, “Solarban” 80 Solar Control

(Sputtered) on second surface (2), + 1/2 inch (13mm) air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) “Optiblue” (tinted) Float Glass.



AA. Type: Solar Control Low-E Clear Insulating Glass. Steely Blue-Green Metallic outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarban®” 80 (2) “Optiblue®” + Clear by PPG Industries, Inc (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Optiblue” (tinted) Float Glass, “Solarban”

80 Solar Control (Sputtered) on second surface (2), + 1/2 inch (13mm) air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) Clear Float Glass.



BB. Type: Solar Control Low-E Clear Insulating Glass. Deep Steel Blue Metallic outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarban®” 80 (2) “Optiblue®” + “Optiblue™” by PPG Industries, Inc (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Optiblue” (tinted) Float Glass, “Solarban”

80 Solar Control (Sputtered) on second surface (2), + 1/2 inch (13mm) air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) “Optiblue” Glass.


(4) Heat Transfer Coefficient: U-Value Winter – 0.29, U-Value Summer – 0.27. CC. Type: Reflective Tinted Solar Control Low-E Insulating Glass. Subtly Reflective Aqua Blue

outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Vistacool™” (2) “Azuria®” + “Solarban®” 60 (3) Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Azuria” Glass, “Vistacool” (Pyrolitic) on

second surface (2), + 1/2 inch (13mm) air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) Clear Float Glass, Low-E Coating “Solarban” 60 Solar Control (Sputtered) on third surface (3).



DD. Type: Reflective Tinted Solar Control Low-E Insulating Glass. Subtly Reflective Aqua Green outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Vistacool™” (2) “Caribia®” + “Solarban®” 60 (3) Clear by PPG Industries,

Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Caribia” Glass, “Vistacool” (Pyrolitic) on





EE. Type: Reflective Tinted Solar Control Low-E Insulating Glass. Subtly Reflective Gray outdoor

appearance. (1) Product: “Vistacool™” (2) “Solargray®” + “Solarban®” 60 (3) Clear by PPG Industries,


on second surface (2), + 1/2 inch (13mm) air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) Clear Float Glass, Low-E Coating “Solarban” 60 Solar Control (Sputtered) on third surface (3).



FF. Type: Reflective Tinted Solar Control Low-E Insulating Glass. Subtly Reflective Dark Blue outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Vistacool™” (2) “Pacifica®” + “Solarban®” 60 (3) Clear by PPG Industries,





GG. Type: Reflective Tinted Solar Control Low-E Insulating Glass. Natural Green Metallic outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarcool®” (2) “Solexia™” + “Solarban®” 60 (3) Clear by PPG Industries,





HH. Type: Reflective Tinted Solar Control Low-E Insulating Glass. Warm Green Metallic outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarcool®” (2) “Caribia®” + “Solarban®” 60 (3) Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Caribia” Glass, “Solarcool” (Pyrolitic) on




II. Type: Reflective Tinted Solar Control Low-E Insulating Glass. Green Metallic outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarcool®” (2) “Azuria™” + “Solarban®” 60 (3) Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Azuria” Glass, “Solarcool” (Pyrolitic) on





JJ. Type: Reflective Tinted Solar Control Low-E Insulating Glass. Bronze Metallic outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarcool®” (2) “Solarbronze®” + “Solarcool®” 60 (3) Clear by PPG

Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) ‘Solarbronze” Glass, “Solarcool”

(Pyrolitic) on second surface (2), + 1/2 inch (13mm) air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) Clear Float Glass, Low-E Coating “Solarban” 60 Solar Control (Sputtered) on third surface (3).



KK. Type: Reflective Tinted Solar Control Low-E Insulating Glass. Cool Gray Metallic outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarcool®” (2) “Solargray®” + “Solarban®” 60 (3) Clear by PPG Industries,

Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Solargray’ Glass, “Solarcool” (Pyrolitic)




LL. Type: Reflective Tinted Solar Control Low-E Insulating Glass. Sky Blue Metallic outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarcool®” (2) “SolarblueTM” + “Solarban®” 60 (3) Clear by PPG Industries,

Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Solarblue’ Glass, “Solarcool” (Pyrolitic)




MM. Type: Reflective Tinted Solar Control Low-E Insulating Glass. Dark Blue Metallic outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarcool®” (2) “Pacifica®” + “Solarban®” 60 (3) Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Pacifica’ Glass, “Solarcool” (Pyrolitic) on




NN. Type: Reflective Tinted Solar Control Low-E Insulating Glass. Dark Gray Metallic outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarcool®” (2) “Graylite®” + “Solarban®” 60 (3) Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Graylite” Glass, “Solarcool” (Pyrolitic) on




OO. Type: Reflective Tinted Solar Control Low-E Insulating Glass. Bright Blue outdoor appearance.


(1) Product: “Vistacool®” (2) “Azuria™” + “Solarban®” z50 (3) “Optiblue®” by PPG Industries, Inc.

(2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Azuria” Glass, “Vistacool” (Pyrolitic) on second surface (2), + 1/2 inch (13mm) air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) “Optiblue” Glass, Low-E Coating “Solarban” z50 Solar Control (Sputtered) on third surface (3).



PP. Type: Reflective Tinted Solar Control Low-E Insulating Glass. Bright Medium Teal outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Vistacool®” (2) “Caribia™” + “Solarban®” z50 (3) “Optiblue®” by PPG

Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Caribia” Glass, “Vistacool” (Pyrolitic) on

second surface (2), + 1/2 inch (13mm) air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) “Optiblue” Glass, Low-E Coating “Solarban” z50 Solar Control (Sputtered) on third surface (3).



QQ. Type: Reflective Tinted Solar Control Low-E Insulating Glass. Bright Dark Blue Granite outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Vistacool™” (2) “Solargray®” + “Solarban®” z50 (3) “Optiblue®” by PPG

Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Solargray” Glass, “Vistacool” (Pyrolitic)

on second surface (2), + 1/2 inch (13mm) air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) “Optiblue” Glass, Low-E Coating “Solarban” z50 Solar Control (Sputtered) on third surface (3).



RR. Type: Reflective Tinted Solar Control Low-E Insulating Glass. Bright Dark Blue Granite outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Vistacool™” (2) “Pacifica®” + “Solarban®” z50 (3) “Optiblue®” by PPG

Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Pacifica” Glass, “Vistacool” (Pyrolitic) on

second surface (2), + 1/2 inch (13mm) air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) “Optiblue” Glass, Low-E Coating “Solarban” z50 Solar Control (Sputtered) on third surface (3).



SS. Type: Subtly Reflective Solar Control Low-E Insulating Glass. Subtly Reflective Aqua-Blue outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Vistacool™” (2) “Azuria®” + “Solarban®” 70XL (3) “Starphire®” by PPG

Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Azuria” Glass, “Vistacool” (Pyrolitic) on

second surface (2), + 1/2 inch (13mm) air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) ‘Starphire” Glass, Low-E Coating “Solarban” 70XL Solar Control (Sputtered) on third surface (3).



TT. Type: Subtly Reflective Solar Control Low-E Insulating Glass. Subtly Reflective Aqua Green outdoor appearance.


(1) Product: “Vistacool™” (2) “Caribia®” + “Solarban®” 70XL (3) “Starphire®” by PPG Industries, Inc.

(2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Caribia” Glass, “Vistacool” (Pyrolitic) on second surface (2), + 1/2 inch (13mm) air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) ‘Starphire” Glass, Low-E Coating “Solarban” 70XL Solar Control (Sputtered) on third surface (3).



UU. Type: Subtly Reflective Solar Control Low-E Insulating Glass. Subtly Reflective Gray outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Vistacool™” (2) “Solargray®” + “Solarban®” 70XL (3) “Starphire®” by PPG

Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Solargray” Glass, “Vistacool” (Pyrolitic)

on second surface (2), + 1/2 inch (13mm) air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) ‘Starphire” Glass, Low-E Coating “Solarban” 70XL Solar Control (Sputtered) on third surface (3).



VV. Type: Subtly Reflective Solar Control Low-E Insulating Glass. Subtly Reflective Dark Blue outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Vistacool™” (2) “Pacifica®” + “Solarban®” 70XL (3) “Starphire®” by PPG

Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Pacifica” Glass, “Vistacool” (Pyrolitic) on




WW. Type: Reflective Solar Control Low-E Insulating Glass. Natural Green Metallic outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarcool®” (2) “Solexia™” + “Solarban®” 70XL (3) “Starphire®” by PPG

Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Solexia” Glass, “Solarcool” (Pyrolitic) on




XX. Type: Reflective Solar Control Low-E Insulating Glass. Warm Green Metallic outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarcool®” (2) “Caribia™” + “Solarban®” 70XL (3) “Starphire®” by PPG

Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Caribia” Glass, “Solarcool” (Pyrolitic) on




YY. Type: Reflective Solar Control Low-E Insulating Glass. Natural Green Metallic outdoor appearance.


(1) Product: “Solarcool®” (2) “Azuria™” + “Solarban®” 70XL (3) “Starphire®” by PPG Industries, Inc.

(2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Azuria” Glass, “Solarcool” (Pyrolitic) on second surface (2), + 1/2 inch (13mm) air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) ‘Starphire” Glass, Low-E Coating “Solarban” 70XL Solar Control (Sputtered) on third surface (3).



ZZ. Type: Reflective Solar Control Low-E Insulating Glass. Bronze Metallic outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarcool®” (2) “Solarbronze®” + “Solarban®” 70XL (3) “Starphire®” by PPG


(Pyrolitic) on second surface (2), + 1/2 inch (13mm) air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) ‘Starphire” Glass, Low-E Coating “Solarban” 70XL Solar Control (Sputtered) on third surface (3).



AAA. Type: Reflective Solar Control Low-E Insulating Glass. Gray Metallic outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarcool®” (2) “Solargray®” + “Solarban®” 70XL (3) “Starphire®” by PPG

Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Solargray” Glass, “Solarcool” (Pyrolitic)




BBB. Type: Reflective Solar Control Low-E Insulating Glass. Sky Blue Metallic outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarcool®” (2) “SolarblueTM” + “Solarban®” 70XL (3) “Starphire®” by PPG

Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Solarblue” Glass, “Solarcool” (Pyrolitic)




CCC. Type: Reflective Solar Control Low-E Insulating Glass. Dark Blue Metallic outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarcool®” (2) “Pacifica®” + “Solarban®” 70XL (3) “Starphire®” by PPG

Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Pacifica” Glass, “Solarcool” (Pyrolitic) on




DDD. Type: Reflective Solar Control Low-E Insulating Glass. Gray Metallic outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarcool®” (2) “Graylite®” + “Solarban®” 70XL (3) “Starphire®” by PPG

Industries, Inc.


(2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Graylite” Glass, “Solarcool” (Pyrolitic) on second surface (2), + 1/2 inch (13mm) air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) ‘Starphire” Glass, Low-E Coating “Solarban” 70XL Solar Control (Sputtered) on third surface (3).



EEE. Low-E Clear Insulating Glass. Clear color, reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarban®” R100 (2) Clear + Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) Clear Glass, “Solarban” R100 Solar

Control (Sputtered) on second surface (2), + 1/2 inch (13mm) air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) Clear (transparent) Float Glass.



FFF. Type: Ultra-Clear Low-E Insulating Glass. Ultra-Clear, reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarban®” R100 (2) “Starphire®” + “Starphire®” by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Starphire” Glass, “Solarban” R100 Solar

Control (Sputtered) on second surface (2), + 1/2 inch (13mm) air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) “Starphire” Float Glass.



GGG. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Emerald green color, reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarban®” R100 (2) “Atlantica™” + Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Atlantica™” Glass, “Solarban” R100




HHH. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Aquamarine color, reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarban®” R100 (2) “Azuria™” + Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Azuria™” Glass, “Solarban” R100 Solar




III. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Aqua-green color, reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarban®” R100 (2) “Caribia®” + Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Caribia®” Glass, “Solarban” R100 Solar




JJJ. Type: Low-E Insulating Glass. Steel Blue-Gray, reflective outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarban®” R100 (2) “Optiblue®” + Clear by PPG Industries, Inc.


(2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Optiblue” (tinted) Float Glass, “Solarban” R100 Solar Control (Sputtered) on second surface (2), + 1/2 inch (13mm) air space + 1/4 inch (6mm) Clear Float Glass.



KKK. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Cool gray color, reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarban®” R100 (2) “Solargray®” + Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Solargray®” Glass, “Solarban” R100




LLL. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Light-green color, reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarban®” R100 (2) “Solexia™” + Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Solexia™” Glass, “Solarban” R100 Solar




MMM. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Warm bronze color, reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarban®” R100 (2) “Solarbronze®” + Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Solarbronze” Glass, “Solarban” R100




NNN. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Sky blue color, reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarban®” R100 (2) “Solarblue™” + Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Solarblue” Glass, “Solarban” R100 Solar




OOO. Type: Low-E Tinted Insulating Glass. Dark blue color, reflective glass outdoor appearance. (1) Product: “Solarban®” R100 (2) “Pacifica®” + Clear by PPG Industries, Inc. (2) Insulating Unit Construction: 1/4 inch (6mm) “Pacifica” Glass, “Solarban” R100 Solar





PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Verify that glazing channels are clean and ready to accept glazing installation, and that weeps are unobstructed. Confirm that minimum required face and edge clearances will be maintained. Do not proceed with glazing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Examine glazing units prior to setting. Reject units that display edge or face damage that

may impede performance of unit or that will be visible when installed. 3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing channels with recommended solvent and wipe dry. Apply primers to joint surfaces to ensure adhesion of sealants, unless preconstruction sealant-substrate testing indicates no primer is required.

3.3 GLAZING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install glass and glazing materials in accordance with instructions of manufacturers and requirements of GANA Glazing Manual. (1) Install setting blocks of size and in location required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks

in bed of approved sealant. (2) Provide spacers for glass lites as recommended, based upon size of glass unit. (3) Comply with glass manufacturer’s limits on edge pressures. (4) Ensure that glazing units are set with proper and consistent orientation of glass units

toward interior and exterior. (5) Provide edge blocking where recommended. (6) Install sealants in accordance with requirements of Division 07 Section "Joint

Sealants."

B. Tape Glazing: Place tapes on fixed stops positioned to be flush or protrude slightly when compressed by glass. Install tapes continuously. Form butt joints at corners and where required, and seal tape joints with approved sealant. (1) Apply heel bead of glazing sealant along intersection of permanent stop and frame for

continuity of air and vapor seal. (2) Set glass lites centered in openings on setting blocks. (3) Install removable stops, and insert dense compression gaskets at corners, working

toward centers of lites, compressing glass against tape on fixed stops. (4) Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape or gasket on

exterior of glass unit.

C. Sealant Glazing: Install continuous spacers between glass lites and glazing stops. Install cylindrical sealant backing where recommended, in width and depth recommended to provide proper depth and width of sealant bead. Ensure sealant cannot block weep system. (1) Install sealant under pressure to completely fill glazing channel without voids, with full

bond to glass and channel surfaces. (2) Tool sealant bead to proper profile providing wash away from glass.

D. Sealant Glazing for Butt Glazing:

(1) Brace glass in position for duration of glazing process (2) Mask edges of glass at adjoining glass edges and between glass edges and framing

members. (3) Secure small diameter non-adhering foamed rod on back side of joint.


(4) Apply sealant to open side of joint in continuous operation; completely fill joint without displacing foam rod; tool sealant surface smooth to concave profile.

(5) Allow sealant to cure, then remove foam backer rod. (6) Apply sealant to opposite side; tool sealant smooth to concave profile. (7) Remove masking tape.

E. Gasket Glazing: Fabricate gaskets to fit openings exactly. Allow for stretching of gaskets

during installation. (1) Set soft compression gasket against fixed stop or frame, secure, with bonded miter

cut joints at corners. (2) Set glass lites centered in openings on setting blocks. (3) Install removable stops, and insert dense compression gaskets at corners, working

toward centers of lites, compressing glass against soft compression gaskets and to produce a weathertight seal. Seal joints in gaskets. Allow gaskets to protrude past face of glazing stops.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Protect installed glass from damage. Attach streamers or warning tape to framing members, away from contact with glass. Remove nonpermanent labels.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances during construction. Immediately

clean glass exposed to contamination using methods recommended by glass manufacturer.

C. Within 5 working days prior to inspection for Substantial Completion, clean all exposed glass surfaces using methods recommended by manufacturer. Remove glazing compounds from framing surfaces.

D. Remove and replace broken or damaged glass.

PART 4 END OF SECTION

Project name / project number/4-3-12 09 13 08 -1 wood floating floor

SECTION 09 13 08

FLOATING WOOD FLOOR

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools and equipment, and perform all operations necessary for the complete installation of the Floating Wood Floor System shown on contract drawings or indicated in the contract documents.

1.02 RELATED WORK Shall include but not be limited to:

A. Flooring

B. Waterproofing

1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. The Floating Floor System shall consist of isolation pads bonded to low density sound absorption acoustical material in roll form and perimeter isolation. The floated wood floor shall be constructed as detailed in the contract drawings and shall incorporate a minimum of two (2) layers ¾” plywood with one (1) layer of 30 lb. builders felt sandwiched between the two layers of plywood.


A. Floating floor materials shall be designed and fabricated at the facilities of a nationally recognized manufacturer having a minimum of five years’ experience in furnishing similar systems.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. The floating floor system shall be Model RIM by Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.,

Dublin, Ohio. Model RIM Floating Floor System shall consist of high density molded fiberglass pads individually coated with a flexible elastomeric membrane. Isolation pads shall be 2” thick and be spaced as recommended by the manufacturer but not greater than 16” centerline spacing. Pads shall be manufactured from annealed glass fibers stabilized by precompression during manufacture. Pads shall be

Project name / project number/4-3-12 09 13 08 -1 wood floating floor

designed to safely withstand a minimum imposed load of 75 PSF in all open areas and shall have a minimum overload capacity of 100% in all high load areas. Pads shall have satisfactorily passed WMATA Section 3.49 dynamic test for isolator permanence.

B. 1-1/2” thick low-density fiberglass absorption material shall be bonded to the isolation pads and shall cover a minimum of 95% of the area between the isolation pads.

C. Perimeter isolation shall be ¾” thick resilient material as recommended by the manufacturer.

2.02 PERFORMANCE TESTING

A. The isolation system shall have been tested for acoustical performance by an independent testing laboratory and the rating shall meet or exceed STC 66 and IIC 63 as tested over a 6” thick concrete structural slab. Dynamic natural frequency of the isolators shall be 16 Hz or lower and shall remain constant within 2 Hz over the entire load range of the floor system.

B. Contractor shall submit copies of certified acoustical test reports verifying performance criteria specified for the floating wood floor isolation system.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. The installation of all sound isolation materials specified herein, including those installed under other sections of the specifications, shall be in accordance with procedures submitted by the isolation material manufacturer, and approved by the Architect.

B. All sound isolation materials and building components supported by isolation

materials shall be free from rigid contact with any part of the building structure.

Life Sciences Building / 4-6-12 09 22 00 - 1 Seamless Acoustical Plaster System

SECTION 09 22 00

Seamless Acoustical Plaster System

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDES:

A. Mortar for unit masonry and stone veneer.



A. ASTM E605 – Density

B. ASTM E84 – Surface Burning Characteristics

C. ASTM C423-84 – Sound Absorption

D. ASTM E761 – Compression Strength

E. Provide Testing results and procedures from an independent and accredited acoustical testing laboratory. Edges of test samples must be sealed with wooden or metal frames.

F. Installer: licensed or approved by manufacturer or distributor.

G. Control Sample: Prior to installation of final coat, apply an area of 15 square feet for approval by architect of finish.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions & test data substantiating compliance with quality assurance.

B. Submit 3 inch square sample of StarSilent System showing texture and color for approval. Resubmit as required until approved.

C. Submit manufacturer’s written certification that product is 100% free of asbestos, polystyrene and cellulose.

D. Submit certification of applicator licensing.

E. Submit Independent Laboratory test data for specified finish and effect of painting.

1.05 MATERIAL HANDLING

A. Store material in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

Seamless Acoustical Plaster System 09 22 00 - 2 Life Sciences Building / 4-6-12

1) Store in space where material is well protected from damage, moisture and freezing.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer shall warrant the material to be supplied, agreeing to

repair/replace that which has cracked, flaked, dusted excessively, peeled or fallen from substrate, or otherwise deteriorated to a condition where it would not perform effectively as intended for a sound absorbent purpose; due to defective materials and not due to abuse, improper maintenance, unforeseeable ambient exposures, or other causes beyond anticipated conditions by manufacturer. The warranty period will be 5 years from date of substantial completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Recycled crushed glass board fastened to rigid ceiling framing. B. Base coat plaster. C. Top coat plaster with smooth finish to match submitted sample.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. StarSilent Panel System as supplied by Pyrok Inc., 914-777-7070, 914-277-5135 or approved equal

B. Finish shall be smooth finish.

C. Color shall be white (or spray painted in field by others) or custom colored.

PART 3 EXECUTIONS

3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION

A. Examine all substrate and condition. B. Building must be fully enclosed and weather tight. C. Do not apply finish coats when temperatures are below 55° F. D. Perform all patching and repairing of material required to be done due to

cutting, etc. by other trades.

3.02 APPLICATION

Life Sciences Building / 4-6-12 09 22 00 - 3 Seamless Acoustical Plaster System

A. Apply in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions:

1) Install 1 ½ inch cold rolled channel on 4 foot centers and 20 gauge 7/8 inch hot

channel on 400mm centers. 2) Fasten _____ mm thick StarSilent panels to ceiling or wall framing. 3) Apply StarSilent fix to panel edges and over fasteners. 4) Sand over fasteners and panel seams. 5) Apply StarSilent Top Basic over entire surface. 6) Apply StarSilent Top Finish over entire surface and trowel to smooth plaster finish.

B. Coordinate work with other trades when work may be affected or have an impact on

the installation.

3.03 CLEANING AND PATCHING

A. Remove fall out material immediately upon completion of the work in each area. Clean surfaces to remove evidence of soiling. Repair or replace damaged work surfaces to acceptable conditions.

B. Coordinate work with other work, to minimize possibility of damage to system

resulting from performance of subsequent work. As other units of work are completed in each area, patch damaged areas or surfaces of insulation by patching procedures as required to provide acceptable results.

C. Provide natural or mechanical ventilation as required to properly cure the acoustical

finish installation. D. Dispose of all waste materials in a proper and legal manner.

END OF SECTION

Project Name/Project Number/10-Apr-12 09 29 00 - 1 Gypsum Board CertainTeed Gypsum, Inc.

(Specifier Note: The purpose of this guide specification is to assist the specifier in cor-rectly specifying gypsum board products and installation. The specifier needs to edit the guide specifications to fit the needs of specific projects. Contact a CertainTeed Product Representative to assist in making the appropriate product selections. Throughout the guide specification, there are Specifier notes to assist in the editing of the file. The term Architect is used throughout these guide specifications, as a guide and may be edited to read “Design Professional”, “Engineer”, “Owner” or other appro-priate designation as required for specific project. References have been made within the text of the specification to MasterFormat 2004 Section numbers and titles, specifier need to coordinate this numbers and titles with sections included for the specific project. Brackets [ ]; “AND/OR”; and “OR” have been used to indicate when a selection is required.)

SECTION 09 29 00

GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Gypsum board wall panels

B. Gypsum Board soffit and ceiling panels

C. Accessories and Trim

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International (ASTM) 1. ASTM C 475 - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape

for Finishing Gypsum Board. 2. ASTM C 514 - Standard Specifications for Nails for the Application of

Gypsum Board. 3. ASTM C 665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal

Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing 4. ASTM C 840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of

Gypsum Board 5. ASTM C 954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the

Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 in. to 0.112 in. in Thickness

6. ASTM C 1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs

Gypsum Board 09 29 00 - 2 Project Name/Project Number/10-Apr-12

7. ASTM C 1047 - Standard Specification for Accessories For Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base

8. ASTM C 1396 - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board

B. Gypsum Association

1. GA-214 - Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board Finish 2. GA-216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board 3. GA-231 - Assessing Water damage to Gypsum Board 4. GA-238 - Guidelines for the Prevention of Mold Growth on Gypsum Board

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Section [01 33 00 Submittal Procedures] [insert section number and title].

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer current technical literature for each component.

C. Samples: 1. Board: Submit sample of each panel product specified, [6 inches square]

[insert size]. 2. Trim: Submit sample of each type of trim specified, [12 inches long] [insert

size]. 3. Texture: Submit sample [12 inches square] [insert size] of textured coated

gypsum board.

D. Quality Assurance Submittals

(Specifier Note: DELETE Design Data, Test Report submittal requirements when propriety specification is used and can be held. MAINTAIN Design Data, Test Report submittal requirement when other products may be submitted as substitution.)

1. Design Data, Test Reports: Provide manufacturer test reports indicating product compliance with indicated requirements.

2. Manufacturer Instructions: Provide manufacturer’s written installation instructions.

E. Closeout Submittals

1. Refer to Section [01 78 00 Closeout Submittals] [insert section number and title].


A. Qualifications: Installer shall have experience with installation of gypsum board under similar conditions.


B. Mock-ups:

1. Install mock-up using approved gypsum products, including fasteners and related accessories per manufacturer’s current printed instructions and recommendations.

a. Mock-up size: [10 feet by 10 feet] [insert size]. b. Mockup for [[each] [designated] level of exposed gypsum board

finish] AND/OR [[each] [designated] texture finish indicated] c. Mock-up Substrate: Match wall assembly construction. d. Mock-up may [not] remain as part of the work.


A. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original packages, indicating manufacturer and product name.

B. Store gypsum in accordance with GA-238 and manufacturer recommendations.


A. In accordance with ASTM C 840.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

(Specifier Note: Product Information is proprietary to CertainTeed Gypsum, Inc. products.)

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Basis of Design: CertainTeed Gypsum, Inc.; 4300 West Cypress Street, Suite 500, Tampa, FL 33607; 1-800-233-8990 (1-866-427-2872); www.certainteed.com

B. Equivalent Design: Manufacturer with products of equivalent design may include, but are not limited to:

1. National Gypsum Company 2. USG Corporation

http://www.certainteed.com/


2.2 GYPSUM BOARD WALL PANELS

A. Standard Gypsum Board Products

1. Regular Gypsum Board: Gypsum core panel solid set core enclosed in paper. Complying with ASTM C1396.

a. Basis of Design: ProRoc® Regular or Evenwall, manufactured by CertainTeed Gypsum, Inc.

b. Thickness: [1/2 inch] [1/4 inch] [3/8 inch] c. Width: [48 inches] [54 inches] [48 inches or 54 inches] d. Length: [8 feet] [9 feet] [10 feet] [12 feet] [Use longest length

available to avoid joints] e. Edges: [Square] [Rounded] [Tapered] [Evenwall]

2. Fire Rated Gypsum Board: Gypsum core panel with a specially formulated core for use in fire-resistive Type X designs. Complying with ASTM C 1396.

a. Basis of Design: ProRoc® Type X or Evenwall Type X, manufactured by CertainTeed Gypsum, Inc.

b. Thickness: 5/8 inch c. Width: [48 inches] [54 inches] [48 inches or 54 inches] d. Length: [8 feet] [9 feet] [10 feet] [12 feet] [Use longest length

available to avoid joints] e. Edges: [Tapered] [Evenwall]

3. Fire Rated Gypsum Board: Gypsum core panel with a solid set, fire-resistive core for use in fire-resistive Type C designs. Complying with and ASTM C 1396.

a. Basis of Design: ProRoc® Type C, manufactured by CertainTeed Gypsum, Inc.

b. Thickness: [1/2 inch] [5/8 inch] c. Width: 48 inches d. Length: [8 feet] [9 feet] [10 feet] [12 feet] [Use longest length

available to avoid joints] e. Edges: Tapered

B. Moisture Resistant Products

1. Water-Resistant Gypsum Board: Gypsum core panel with enhanced water resistant core for use behind tile in wet areas. Complying with ASTM C1396.

a. Basis of Design: ProRoc® Moisture Resistant, manufactured by CertainTeed Gypsum, Inc.

b. Thickness: 1/2 inch c. Width: 48 inches


d. Length: [8 feet] [9 feet] [10 feet] [12 feet] [Use longest length available to avoid joints]

e. Edges: Tapered

2. Fire Rated Water-Resistant Gypsum Board: Gypsum core panel with enhanced fire-resistance and water resistance core for use in fire-resistive Type X designs. Complying with ASTM C 1396, Type X.

a. Basis of Design: ProRoc® Moisture Resistant Type X, manufactured by CertainTeed Gypsum, Inc.

b. Thickness: 5/8 inch c. Width: 48 inches d. Length: [8 feet] [9 feet] [10 feet] [12 feet] [Use longest length


C. Specialty Products

1. Flexible Gypsum Board: Gypsum core panel with enhanced core to allow for flexibility; Complying with ASTM C 1396

a. Basis of Design: ProRoc® ¼” Flex, manufactured by CertainTeed Gypsum, Inc.

b. Thickness: 1/4 inch c. Width: 48 inches d. Length: [8 feet] [12 feet] [Use longest length available to avoid joints] e. Edges: Tapered

2. Gypsum Backer Board: Gypsum core panel for use as first layer in multi-layer applications or as base layer in ceilings for adhesive title applications. Complying with ASTM C 1396.

a. Basis of Design: ProRoc® Backer Board, manufactured by CertainTeed Gypsum, Inc.


available to avoid joints] e. Edges: Square

3. Fire Rated Gypsum Backer Board: Gypsum core panel with enhanced fire-resistant core for use as first layer in multi-layer applications or as base layer in ceilings for adhesive title applications in Type X designs. Complying with ASTM C 1396, Type X.

a. Basis of Design: ProRoc® Backer Board Type X, manufactured by CertainTeed Gypsum, Inc.

b. Thickness: 5/8 inch c. Width: 48 inches


d. Length: [8 feet] [9 feet] [10 feet] [12 feet] [14 feet] [16 feet] [Use longest length available to avoid joints]

e. Edges: Square

D. High Performance Products

1. Abuse Resistant Gypsum Board: Gypsum core panel with enhanced core to provide resistance to abuse. Complying with ASTM C 1396.

a. Basis of Design: ProRoc® Abuse Resistant, manufactured by CertainTeed Gypsum, Inc.



2. Fire Rated Abuse Resistant Gypsum Board: Gypsum core panel with enhanced core to provide resistance to abuse for use in fire-resistive Type X designs. Complying with ASTM C 1396, Type X.

a. Basis of Design: ProRoc® Abuse Resistant Type X, manufactured by CertainTeed Gypsum, Inc.



3. Fire Rated Shaft Liner Gypsum Board: Gypsum core shaftwall panel with enhanced fire resistant core. Complying with ASTM C 1396 Type X.

a. Basis of Design: ProRoc® Shaftliner Type X, manufactured by CertainTeed Gypsum, Inc.

b. Thickness: 1 inch c. Width: 24 inches d. Length: [8 feet] [12 feet] [Use longest length available to avoid joints] e. Edges: Modified Tapered

E. Plaster Base Products

1. Regular Veneer Plaster Base: Gypsum core lathing panel with face paper for use under veneer plaster finishes. Complying with ASTM C 1396.

a. Basis of Design: ProRoc® Veneer Plaster Base, manufactured by CertainTeed Gypsum, Inc.

b. Thickness: 1/2 inch. c. Width: 48 inches.


d. Length: [8 feet] [9 feet] [10 feet] [12 feet] [Use longest length available to avoid joints]

e. Edges: [Square] [Tapered]

2. Fire Rated Veneer Plaster Base: Gypsum core lathing panel with enhanced fire resistant core for use under veneer plaster finishes in Type X Designs. Complying with ASTM C 1396, Type X.

a. Basis of Design: ProRoc® Veneer Plaster Base Type X, manufactured by CertainTeed Gypsum, Inc.

b. Thickness: 5/8 inch. c. Width: 48 inches. d. Length: [8 feet] [9 feet] [10 feet] [12 feet] [Use longest length

available to avoid joints] e. Edges: [Square] [Tapered]

3. Fire Rated Veneer Plaster Base: Gypsum core lathing panel with enhanced Type C fire resistant core for use under veneer plaster finishes in Type X Designs. Complying with ASTM C 1396, Type C.

a. Basis of Design: ProRoc® Veneer Plaster Base Type C, manufactured by CertainTeed Gypsum, Inc.

b. Thickness: 1/2 inch. c. Width: 48 inches. d. Length: [8 feet] [12 feet] [Use longest length available to avoid joints] e. Edges: [Square] [Tapered]

2.3 GYPSUM BOARD CEILING AND SOFFIT PANELS

A. Exterior Soffit Board

1. Regular Exterior Soffit Board: Gypsum core soffit panel with sag resistant core. Complying with ASTM C 1396.

a. Basis of Design: ProRoc® Exterior Soffit Board, manufactured by CertainTeed Gypsum, Inc.

b. Thickness: 1/2 inch. c. Width: 48 inches. d. Length: [8 feet] [12 feet] [Use longest length available to avoid joints] e. Edges: Tapered

2. Fire Rated Exterior Soffit Board: Gypsum core soffit panel with enhanced fire and sag resistant core for use in fire resistive designs. Complying with ASTM C 1396, Type X.

a. Basis of Design: ProRoc® Exterior Soffit Board Type X, manufactured by CertainTeed Gypsum, Inc.

b. Thickness: 5/8 inch.


c. Width: 48 inches. d. Length: [8 feet] [12 feet] [Use longest length available to avoid joints] e. Edges: Tapered

B. Interior Ceiling Board

1. Regular Gypsum Ceiling Board: Gypsum Core panel with enhanced sag resistant core. Complying with ASTM C 1396.

a. Basis of Design: ProRoc® Interior Ceiling, manufactured by CertainTeed Gypsum, Inc.

b. Thickness: 1/2 inch. c. Width: 48 inches. d. Length: [8 feet] [12 feet] [14 feet] [Use longest length available to

avoid joints] e. Edges: Tapered

2. Gypsum Ceiling Cove and Cornice: Profile molding for installation at wall/ceiling joint. Complying with ASTM C 1396.

a. Basis of Design: Ceiling Décor Cove and Cornice, manufactured by CertainTeed Gypsum, Inc.

b. Thickness: [3/8 inch] [3/4 inch] c. Profile Width: [4-1/2 inch] [4-7/16 inch] d. Length: [8 feet] [12 feet] [Use longest length available to avoid joints] e. Edges: Square

3. Gypsum Ceiling Step: Gypsum board used as base steps for application of ceiling cove and cornice.

a. Basis of Design: Ceiling Décor Steps, manufactured by CertainTeed Gypsum, Inc.

b. Thickness: 1/2 inch c. Width: 4 inches d. Length: 8 feet

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: Complying with ASTM C 1047.

1. Corner Bead 2. Casing Beads: [LC-Bead] [L-Bead] [U-Bead] 3. Control Joint

B. Fasteners:

1. Screws: [ASTM C 954] [ASTM C 1002] as recommended by panel manufacturer.


2. Nails: ASTM C 514 with heads, lengths, configurations, and finish as recommended by panel manufacturer.

3. Adhesive: Recommended by panel manufacturer.

C. Joint Treatment

1. Tape: Comply with ASTM C 475 2. Joint Compound: Comply with ASTM C 475

D. Texture Finishes

1. Primer 2. Wall Texture: [Fine] [Medium] [Coarse] 3. Ceiling Texture: [Fine] [Medium] [Coarse]

E. Sealant

(Specifier Note: Sealants may be specified in this section or may be specified elsewhere in Division 07. EDIT paragraphs below dependent upon location of sealant specification.)

1. Refer to Section [07 92 00 Joint Sealants] [insert section number and title].

OR

2. Acoustical Sealant: Nondrying, non-hardening, non-skinning, non-staining, non-bleeding, gunnable type as recommended by panel manufacturer.

F. Insulation

(Specifier Note: Insulation may be specified in this section or may be specified in Division 09. EDIT paragraphs below dependent upon location of acoustical insulation specification.)

1. Refer to Section [09 81 00 Acoustic Insulation] [insert section number and title].

OR

2. Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I, mineral fiber insulation blankets without membrane facing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine gypsum board panels for damage and existence of mold. Install undamaged panels


B. Examine gypsum board in accordance with GA 231 for water damage.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with [ASTM C 840] [GA 216]

3.3 FINISHING

A. General: Comply with [ASTM C 840] [GA 214 and GA 216]

1. Level 1: Plenums, service corridors; above ceilings 2. Level 2: Areas of water resistant gypsum backing board under tile;

exposed areas where appearance is not critical. 3. Level 3: Areas to receive heavy or medium textured coatings; heavy-

grade wallcoverings. 4. Level 4: Areas to receive flat sheen paint finish; light textured coatings;

lightweight wallcoverings. 5. Level 5: Areas to receive gloss, semi-gloss sheen paints; critical lighting

conditions.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products from damage during remainder of the construction period.

B. Remove and replace panels that are damaged.

END OF SECTION

Boucke 4-6-12 09 30 13 - 1 Porcelain Ceramic Tile

SECTION 09 30 13

PORCELAIN CERAMIC TILE PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

This section specifies ceramic, porcelain and quarry tile, // marble thresholds and window

stools, // terrazzo divider strips, // waterproofing membranes for thin-set applications, //

crack isolation membranes, // tile backer board. //

1.2 RELATED WORK

//A. Preformed sealant joints in tile flooring: Section 07 95 13, EXPANSION JOINT COVER

ASSEMBLIES.//

A. Sealing of joints where specified: Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS.

B. Color, texture and pattern of field tile and trim shapes, size of field tile, // trim shapes, //

and color of grout specified: Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES.

SPEC WRITER NOTE: Verify and coordinate the following paragraph to include reference to application of metal lath; DELETE if not applicable. Refer to paragraphs under PART 2 - PRODUCTS.

C. Plastering: // Section 09 23 00, GYPSUM PLASTERING // Section 09 24 00,

PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING.//

D. Metal and resilient edge strips at joints with new // resilient flooring, // and carpeting: //

Section 09 65 19, RESILIENT TILE FLOORING // Section 09 68 00, CARPETING.//

SPEC WRITER NOTE: Delete submittals for products not used.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA,

AND SAMPLES.

B. Samples:

1. Base tile, each type, each color, each size.

2. Mosaic floor tile panels, 225 mm by 225 mm (9 inches by 9 inches), each type, color,

size and pattern.

3. Paver tile, each size, type, color and pattern.

4. Quarry tile, each type, color, and size.


5. Porcelain tile, each type, color, patterns and size.

6. Wall (or wainscot) tile, each color, size and pattern.

7. Trim shapes, bullnose cap and cove including bullnose cap and base pieces at internal

and external corners of vertical surfaces, each type, color, and size.

8. Therapeutic pool tile, panels 300 mm (12 inches) square, each type, size, color,

typical lettering and special shapes.

C. Product Data:

1. Ceramic and porcelain tile, marked to show each type, size, and shape required.

2. Chemical resistant mortar and grout (Epoxy and Furan).

3. Cementitious backer unit.

4. Dry-set Portland cement mortar and grout.

5. Divider strip.

6. Elastomeric membrane and bond coat.

7. Reinforcing tape.

8. Leveling compound.

9. Latex-Portland cement mortar and grout.

10. Commercial Portland cement grout.

11. Organic adhesive.

12. Slip resistant tile.

13. Waterproofing isolation membrane.

14. Fasteners.

D. Certification:

1. Master grade, ANSI A137.1.

2. Manufacturer's certificates indicating that the following materials comply with

specification requirements:

a. Chemical resistant mortar and grout (epoxy and furan).

b. Modified epoxy emulsion.

c. Commercial Portland cement grout.

d. Cementitious backer unit.

e. Dry-set Portland cement mortar and grout.

f. Elastomeric membrane and bond coat.

g. Reinforcing tape.


h. Latex-Portland cement mortar and grout.

i. Leveling compound.

j. Organic adhesive.

k. Waterproof isolation membrane.

l. Factory mounted tile suitability for application in wet area specified under 2.1, A,

3 with list of successful in-service performance locations.

1.4 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. Deliver materials in containers with labels legible and intact and grade-seals unbroken.

B. Store material to prevent damage or contamination.

SPEC WRITER NOTE: Update applicable publications to current issue at time of project preparation.

1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS

A. Publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.

Publications are referenced in text by basic designation only.

B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

A10.20-05 ..............................Safety Requirements for Ceramic Tile, Terrazzo, and

Marble Works

A108.1A-05 ...........................Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set Method with

Portland Cement Mortar

A108.1B-05 ............................Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement

Mortar Setting Bed with dry-Set or latex-Portland Cement

Mortar

A108.1C-05 ............................Contractors Option; Installation of Ceramic Tile in the

Wet-Set method with Portland Cement Mortar or

Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement

Mortar Setting Bed with Dry-Set or Latex-Portland Cement

Mortar

A108.4-05 ..............................Installation of Ceramic Tile with Organic Adhesives or

Water Cleanable Tile Setting Epoxy Adhesives

A108.5-05 ..............................Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry-Set Portland Cement

Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar


A108.6-05 ..............................Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant,

Water Cleanable Tile-Setting and Grouting Epoxy

A108.8-05 ..............................Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant Furan

Resin Mortar and Grout

A108.10-05 ............................Installation of Grout in Tilework

A108.11-05 ............................Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer Units

A108.13-05 ............................Installation of Load Bearing, Bonded, Waterproof

Membranes for Thin-Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension

Stone

A118.1-05 ..............................Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar

A118.3-05 ..............................Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy

and Water Cleanable Tile-Setting and Grouting Epoxy

Adhesive

A118.4-05 ..............................Latex-Portland Cement Mortar

A118.5-05 ..............................Chemical Resistant Furan Mortars and Grouts for Tile

Installation

A118.6-05 ..............................Standard Cement Grouts for Tile Installation

A118.9-05 ..............................Cementitious Backer Units

A118.10-05 ............................Load Bearing, Bonded, Waterproof Membranes for Thin-

Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone Installation

A136.1-05 ..............................Organic Adhesives for Installation of Ceramic Tile

A137.1-88 ..............................Ceramic Tile

C. American Society For Testing And Materials (ASTM):

A185-07 .................................Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcing

C109/C109M-07 ....................Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of

Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2 inch. or [50-mm] Cube

Specimens)

C241-90 (R2005) ...................Abrasion Resistance of Stone Subjected to Foot Traffic

C348-02..................................Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Hydraulic-

Cement Mortars


C627-93(R2007) ....................Evaluating Ceramic Floor Tile Installation Systems Using

the Robinson-Type Floor Tester

C954-07..................................Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board on

Metal Plaster Base to Steel Studs from 0.033 in (0.84 mm)

to 0.112 in (2.84 mm) in thickness

C979-05..................................Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete

C1002-07................................Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of

Panel Products

C1027-99(R2004) ..................Determining “Visible Abrasion Resistance on Glazed

Ceramic Tile”

C1028-07................................Determining the Static Coefficient of Friction of Ceramic

Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal

Dynamometer Pull Meter Method

C1127-01................................Standard Guide for Use of High Solids Content, Cold

Liquid-Applied Elastomeric Waterproofing Membrane with

an Integral Wearing Surface

C1178/C1178M-06 ................Standard Specification for Coated Glass Mat Water-

Resistant Gypsum Backing Panel

D4397-02 ...............................Standard Specification for Polyethylene Sheeting for

Construction, Industrial and Agricultural Applications

D5109-99(R2004) ..................Standard Test Methods for Copper-Clad Thermosetting

Laminates for Printed Wiring Boards

D. Marble Institute of America (MIA): Design Manual III-2007

E. Tile Council of America, Inc. (TCA):

2007........................................Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

SPEC WRITER NOTES: 1. Make material requirements agree with

applicable requirements specified in the referenced Applicable Publications. Update and specify only that which applies to the project. Delete non applicable items.

2. Where tile is indicated for installation in swimming pools, on exteriors, or in wet areas,


do not use back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies unless tile manufacturer provides certificate that mounting is suitable for these installations and has a list of successful projects in-service performance.

3. Do not use raised profile tile for slip resistant tile except for porcelain tile.

4. Do not use glazed tile for floors. 5. Do not edit slip resistant tile paragraph.

2.1 TILE

A. Comply with ANSI A137.1, Standard Grade, except as modified:

1. Inspection procedures listed under the Appendix of ANSI A137.1.

2. Abrasion Resistance Classification:

a. Tested in accordance with values listed in Table 1, ASTM C 1027.

b. Class V, 12000 revolutions for floors in Corridors, Kitchens, Storage including

Refrigerated Rooms

c. Class IV, 6000 revolutions for remaining areas.

3. Slip Resistant Tile for Floors:

a. Coefficient of friction, when tested in accordance with ASTM C1028, required

for level of performance:

1) Not less than 0.7 (wet condition) for bathing areas.

2) Not less than 0.8 on ramps for wet and dry conditions.

3) Not less than 0.6, except 0.8 on ramps as stated above, for wet and dry

conditions for other areas.

b. Tile Having Abrasive Grains:

1. Unglazed Ceramic Mosaic Tile: Abrasive grains throughout body of the tile.

2. Quarry Tile: Abrasive grains uniformly embedded in face at rate of

approximately 7.5 percent of surface area.

c. Porcelain Paver Tile: // Matte surface finish // with raised ridges spaced uniformly

over tile surface. //

4. Mosaic tile may be mounted or joined together by a resinous bonding material along

tile edges.


5. Do not use back mounted tiles in showers // therapeutic pools, // natatorium, //

hydrotherapy, // whirlpool baths, // and congregate baths // unless certified by

manufacturer as noted in paragraph 1.3.D.

6. Factory Blending: For tile with color variations, within the ranges selected during

sample submittals blend tile in the factory and package so tile units taken from one

package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match

approved samples.

SPEC WRITER NOTE: Use of wax as a temporary protective coating for exposed tile surfaces is required with furan mortars and grouts, latex modified mortars and grouts, and unglazed paver tile.

7. Factory-Applied Temporary Protective Coating:

a. Protect exposed face surfaces (top surface) of tile against adherence of mortar and

grout by pre-coating with a continuous film of petroleum paraffin wax, applied

hot.

b. Do not coat unexposed tile surfaces.

c. Pre-wax tiles set or grouted with // furan or epoxy // or // latex modified mortars.//

B. Unglazed Ceramic Mosaic Tile: Nominal 6 mm (1/4 inch) thick with cushion edges.

C. Unglazed Quarry Tile: Nominal 13 mm (1/2 inch) thick, square edges.

D. Glazed Wall Tile: Cushion edges, glazing, as specified in Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE

FOR FINISHES.

E. Porcelain Paver Tile: Nominal 8 mm (5/16 inch) thick, with cushion edges. Porcelain tile

produced by the dust pressed method shall be made of approximately 50% feldspar; the

remaining 50% shall be made up of various high-quality light firing ball clays yielding a

tile with a water absorption rate of 0.5% or less and a breaking strength of between 390 to

400 pounds.

SPEC WRITER NOTES: 1. Coordinate trim shape requirements with tile

sizes scheduled in Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES.

2. Coordinate for tile sizes when combined with ANSI A137.1 that rounded trim shapes, will produce complete wall or floor tile patterns as per color design.


3. Rounded, cove and bullnose shapes are mandatory shapes.

4. At top of tile wainscot that finish flush with wall surfaces above shown on details use flat cap (top) shape.

5. Bullnose cap pieces of internal corner at top of wainscot set by thin set method is available only in 106 mm by 106 mm (4-1/4 by 4-1/4 inch) size; coordinate with Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES.

6. Assure details show trim shape lay out when trim shape is not the size of adjoining tile and cove and bullnose trim shapes for installation methods specified.

7. When Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES specifies that new tile work in existing spaces shall not match existing tile work, see subparagraph 3.3, G, PART 3 for existing conditions.

8. Square internal and external corners are not acceptable. Do not change requirements.

F. Trim Shapes:

1. Conform to applicable requirements of adjoining floor and wall tile.

2. Use slip resistant trim shapes for horizontal surfaces of showers // congregate baths,

natatorium, hydrotherapy, therapeutic pool,// overflow ledges, recessed steps, shower

curbs, drying area curbs, and seats.

3. Use trim shapes sizes conforming to size of adjoining field wall tile // including

existing spaces // unless detailed or specified otherwise in Section 09 06 00,

SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES.

4. Internal and External Corners:

a. Square internal and external corner joints are not acceptable.

b. External corners including edges: Use bullnose shapes.

c. Internal corners: Use cove shapes.

d. Base to floor internal corners: Use special shapes providing integral cove vertical

and horizontal joint.

e. Base to floor external corners: Use special shapes providing bullnose vertical

edge with integral cove horizontal joint. Use stop at bottom of openings having

bullnose return to wall.


f. Wall top edge internal corners: Use special shapes providing integral cove vertical

joint with bullnose top edge.

g. Wall top edge external corners: Use special shapes providing bullnose vertical

and horizontal joint edge.

h. For unglazed ceramic mosaic and glazed wall tile installed in Portland cement

mortar setting bed, use cove and bullnose shapes as applicable. When ceramic

mosaic wall and base tile is required, use C Series cove and bullnose shapes.

i. For unglazed ceramic mosaic and glazed wall tile installed in dry-set Portland

cement mortar, latex-Portland cement mortar, and organic adhesive (thin set

methods), use cove and surface bullnose shapes as applicable.

j. For quarry tile work, use cove and bullnose shapes as applicable.

k. Provide cove and bullnose shapes // for countertops, // stools, // saddles, // where

shown, // and required to complete tile work.

2.2 CEMENTITIOUS BACKER UNITS

A. Use in showers or wet areas.

B. ANSI A118.9.

C. Use Cementitious backer units in maximum available lengths.

D. Backer unit meet or exceed the following additional physical properties:

Property Test Method Value

Water absorption ASTM C948 Less than 20 percent by weight

2.3 JOINT MATERIALS FOR CEMENTITIOUS BACKER UNITS

A. Reinforcing Tape: Vinyl coated woven glass fiber mesh tape, open weave, 50 mm (2

inches) wide. Tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing will not be permitted.

B. Tape Embedding Material: Latex-Portland cement mortar complying with ANSI A118.4.

C. Joint material, including reinforcing tape, and tape embedding material, shall be as

specifically recommended by the backer unit manufacturer.

2.4 FASTENERS

A. Screws for Cementitious Backer Units.

1. Standard screws for gypsum board are not acceptable.

2. Minimum 11 mm (7/16 inch) diameter head, corrosion resistant coated, with washers.


3. ASTM C954 for steel 1 mm (0.033 inch) thick.

4. ASTM C1002 for steel framing less than 0.0329 inch thick.

B. Washers: Galvanized steel, 13 mm (1/2 inch) minimum diameter.

2.5 GLASS MAT WATER RESISTANT GYPSUM BACKER BOARD

Confirm to ASTM C1178/C1178M, Optional System for Cementious Backer Units.

2.6 SETTING MATERIALS OR BOND COATS

A. Conform to TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation.

B. Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A108.1.

C. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.4.

1. For wall applications, provide non-sagging, latex-Portland cement mortar complying

with ANSI A118.4.

2. Prepackaged Dry-Mortar Mix: Factory-prepared mixture of Portland cement; dry,

redispersible, ethylene vinyl acetate additive; and other ingredients to which only

water needs to be added at Project site.

D. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.1. For wall applications, provide non-

sagging, latex-Portland cement mortar complying with ANSI A118.4.

E. Organic Adhesives: ANSI A136.1, Type 1.

F. Chemical-Resistant Bond Coat:

1. Epoxy Resin Type: ANSI A118.3.

2. Furan Resin Type: ANSI A118.5.

SPEC WRITER NOTES: 1. Use paragraph G and H for existing buildings

when depressed structural slab does not occur and a raised floor with curb is not acceptable for handicapped. Do not use on new buildings.

2. Use ANSI A 118.10 for tile embedded in top coat of urethane waterproofing.

3. Details required of systems showing termination and joints with other materials.

4. This system does not provide for slopes to drain and will follow profile of floor.

G. Elastomeric Waterproofing Membrane and Bond Coat:

1. TCA F122-02.

2. ANSI A118.10.


3. One component polyurethane, liquid applied material having the following additional

physical properties:

a. Hardness: Shore "A" between 40-60.

b. Elongation: Between 300-600 percent.

c. Tensile strength: Between 40-60 psig.

d. No volatile compounds.

4. Coal tar modified urethanes are not acceptable.

H. Waterproofing Isolation Membrane:

1. Sheet System TCA F122-02.

2. Optional System to elastomeric waterproof membrane.

3. Composite sheet consisting of ASTM D5109, Type II, Grade I Chlorinated

Polyethylene (CM) sheet reinforced on both sides with a non-woven polyester fiber.

4. Designed for use in wet areas as an isolation and positive waterproofing membranes

for thin-set bonding of sheet to substrate and thin-set bonding of ceramic and

porcelain tile or marble to sheet. Suited for both horizontal and vertical applications.

5. Conform to the following additional physical properties:

Property Units Results Test Method

Hardness Shore A

Points 70-80 ASTM D2240 (10 Second Reading)

Shrinkage Percent 5 maximum ASTM D1204

Brittleness No crack remains flexible at temperature-37 degrees C (-25 degrees F)

ASTM D2497 13 mm (1/2- inch) Mandrel Bend

Retention of Properties after Heat Aging

Percent of original

80 Tensile 80 Breaking 80 Elongation

ASTM D3045, 90 degrees C (194 degrees F) for 168 hours

6. Manufacturer’s standard sheet size with prefabricated or preformed inside and outside

corners.

7. Sheet manufacturer’s solvent welding liquid or xylene and edge sealant.


2.7 GROUTING MATERIALS

A. Coloring Pigments:

1. Pure mineral pigments, limeproof and nonfading, complying with ASTM C979.

2. Add coloring pigments to grout by the manufacturer.

3. Job colored grout is not acceptable.

4. Use is required in Commercial Portland Cement Grout, Dry-Set Grout, and

Latex-Portland Cement Grout.

B. White Portland Cement Grout:

1. ANSI A118.6.

2. Use one part white Portland cement to one part white sand passing a number 30

screen.

3. Color additive not permitted.

SPEC WRITER NOTE: Commercial Portland Cement Grout is sanded, and Dry-Set Grout is unsanded.

C. Commercial Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6 color as specified.

D. Dry-Set Grout: ANSI A118.6 color as specified.

E. Latex-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6 color as specified.

1. Unsanded grout mixture for joints 3.2 mm (1/8 inch) and narrower.

2. Sanded grout mixture for joints 3.2 mm (1/8 inch) and wider.

F. Chemical-Resistant Grout:

1. Epoxy grout, ANSI A118.3.

2. Furan grout, ANSI A118.5.

2.8 PATCHING AND LEVELING COMPOUND

A. Portland cement base, polymer-modified, self-leveling compound, manufactured

specifically for resurfacing and leveling concrete floors. Products containing gypsum are

not acceptable.

B. Shall have minimum following physical properties:

1. Compressive strength - 25 MPa (3500 psig) per ASTM C109/C109M.

2. Flexural strength - 7 MPa (1000 psig) per ASTM C348 (28 day value).

3. Tensile strength - 600 psi per ANSI 118.7.

4. Density – 1.9.


C. Capable of being applied in layers up to 38 mm (1-1/2 inches) thick without fillers and up

to 100 mm (four inches) thick with fillers, being brought to a feather edge, and being

trowelled to a smooth finish.

D. Primers, fillers, and reinforcement as required by manufacturer for application and

substrate condition.

E. Ready for use in 48 hours after application.

SPEC WRITER NOTE: Include marble when limited to items specified and no other marble is used on project. Include marble in new section on marble if other marble items occur. Do not use synthetic marble unless abrasive hardness is 10 or more.

2.9 MARBLE

A. Soundness Classification in accordance with MIA Design Manual III Groups.

B. Thresholds:

1. Group A, Minimum abrasive hardness (Ha) of 10.0 per ASTM C241.

2. Honed finish on exposed faces.

SPEC WRITER NOTE: 1. See MIA Design Manual for thin stock. 2. Coordinate details for beveled edges where

marble thresholds project above adjacent flooring with 19 mm (3/4 inch) minimum thickness and 6 mm (1/4 inch) minimum thickness at beveled edge.

3. Detail joint with other materials, and show where used.

4. Detail thresholds not more than 12.7 mm (1/2 inch above adjoining finished floor surfaces, with transition edges beveled on a slope of no greater than 1:2 on existing floor slabs provide 13 mm(1/ 2 inch) about ceramic tile surface with beveled edges.

3. Thickness and contour as shown.

4. Fabricate from one piece without holes, cracks, or open seams; full depth of wall or

frame opening by full width of wall or frame opening; 19 mm (3/4-inch) minimum

thickness and 6 mm (1/4-inch) minimum thickness at beveled edge.


5. Set not more than 13 mm (1/2-inch) above adjoining finished floor surfaces, with

transition edges beveled on a slope of no greater than 1:2. On existing floor slabs

provide 13 mm (1/2-inch) above ceramic tile surface with bevel edge joint top flush

with adjacent floor.

6. One piece full width of door opening. Notch thresholds to match profile of door

jambs.

C. Window Stools:

1. Group A or B.

2. Polished finish on exposed faces.

3. Size and thickness as shown.

SPEC WRITER NOTE: Coordinate with details to show joints with other materials and show location where used.

2.10 METAL DIVIDER STRIPS

A. Terrazzo type divider strips.

B. Heavy top type strip with 5 mm (3/16 inch) wide top and 38 mm (1-1/2 inch) long leg.

C. Embedded leg perforated and deformed for keying to mortar.

D. Aluminum or brass as specified in Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES.

2.11 WATER

Clean, potable and free from salts and other injurious elements to mortar and grout

materials.

2.12 CLEANING COMPOUNDS

A. Specifically designed for cleaning masonry and concrete and which will not prevent bond

of subsequent tile setting materials including patching and leveling compounds and

elastomeric waterproofing membrane and coat.

B. Materials containing acid or caustic material not acceptable.

2.13 FLOOR MORTAR BED REINFORCING

ASTM A185 welded wire fabric without backing, MW3 x MW3 (2 x 2-W0.5 x W0.5).

2.14 POLYETHYLENE SHEET

A. Polyethylene sheet conforming to ASTM D4397.

B. Nominal thickness: 0.15 mm (six mils).

C. Use sheet width to minimize joints.


PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Maintain ambient temperature of work areas at not less than 16 degree C (60 degrees F),

without interruption, for not less than 24 hours before installation and not less than three

days after installation.

B. Maintain higher temperatures for a longer period of time where required by

manufacturer's recommendation and ANSI Specifications for installation.

C. Do not install tile when the temperature is above 38 degrees C (100 degrees F).

D. Do not install materials when the temperature of the substrate is below 16 degrees C (60

degrees F).

E. Do not allow temperature to fall below 10 degrees C (50 degrees F) after fourth day of

completion of tile work.

3.2 ALLOWABLE TOLERANCE

A. Variation in plane of sub-floor, including concrete fills leveling compounds and mortar

beds:

1. Not more than 1 in 500 (1/4 inch in 10 feet) from required elevation where Portland

cement mortar setting bed is used.

2. Not more than 1 in 1000 (1/8 inch in 10 feet) where dry-set Portland cement, and

latex-Portland cement mortar setting beds and chemical-resistant bond coats are used.

B. Variation in Plane of Wall Surfaces:

1. Not more than 1 in 400 (1/4 inch in eight feet) from required plane where Portland

cement mortar setting bed is used.

2. Not more than 1 in 800 (1/8 inch in eight feet) where dry-set or latex-Portland cement

mortar or organic adhesive setting materials is used.

3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION

SPEC WRITER NOTES: 1. Read the requirements of the "Forward,

Explanation and Notes" of ANSI A108.1, A and B and the referenced ANSI specifications for the installation of ceramic tiles.

2. Coordinate specifications and details for existing conditions.

3. Clarify and use the term "thin set" on drawings and in the specifications.


4. Details are required to show interface conditions and joints with other materials, especially for different conditions such as new construction and existing conditions.

A. Cleaning New Concrete or Masonry:

1. Chip out loose material, clean off all oil, grease dirt, adhesives, curing compounds,

and other deterrents to bonding by mechanical method, or by using products

specifically designed for cleaning concrete and masonry.

2. Use self-contained power blast cleaning systems to remove curing compounds and

steel trowel finish from concrete slabs where ceramic tile will be installed directly on

concrete surface with thin-set materials.

3. Steam cleaning or the use of acids and solvents for cleaning will not be permitted.

B. Patching and Leveling:

1. Mix and apply patching and leveling compound in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions.

2. Fill holes and cracks and align concrete floors that are out of required plane with

patching and leveling compound.

a. Thickness of compound as required to bring finish tile system to elevation shown.

b. Float finish // except finish smooth for elastomeric waterproofing. //

c. At substrate expansion, isolation, and other moving joints, allow joint of same

width to continue through underlayment.

3. Apply patching and leveling compound to concrete and masonry wall surfaces that

are out of required plane.

4. Apply leveling coats of material compatible with wall surface and tile setting material

to wall surfaces, other than concrete and masonry that are out of required plane.

C. Mortar Bed for Slopes to Drains:

1. Slope compound to drain where drains are shown.

2. Install mortar bed in depressed slab sloped to drains not less than 1 in 200 (1/16 inch

per foot).

3. Allow not less than 50 mm (2 inch) depression at edge of depressed slab.

4. Screed for slope to drain and float finish.


5. Cure mortar bed for not less than seven days. Do not use curing compounds or

coatings.

D. Additional preparation of concrete floors for tile set with epoxy, or furan-resin shall be in

accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.

E. Cleavage Membrane:

1. Install polythene sheet as cleavage membrane in depressed slab when waterproof

membrane is not scheduled or indicated.

2. Turn up at edge of depressed floor slab to top of floor.

F. Walls:

1. In showers or other wet areas cover studs with polyethylene sheet.

SPEC WRITER NOTES: 1. Where full height tile walls or tile wainscots are

required on new metal lath surfaces, specify scratch and leveling coats applied as specified below.

2. Coordinate with Paragraph 1.2, and with specification Section 09 23 00, GYPSUM PLASTERING and 09 24 00, PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING for metal lath installation with this section for tile set in Portland cement, scratch and leveling coat on metal lath.

3. Use of Cementitious Backer unit is preferred in showers or other wet areas.

4. Where isolated tile panels are required on plaster or gypsum board walls apply adhesives.

2. Apply patching and leveling compound to concrete and masonry surfaces that are out

of required plane.

3. Apply leveling coats of material compatible with wall surface and tile setting material

to wall surfaces, other than concrete and masonry that are out of required plane.

4. Apply metal lath to framing in accordance with ANSI A108.1:

a. Use fasteners specified in paragraph "Fasteners." Use washers when lath opening

is larger than screw head.

b. Apply scratch and leveling coats to metal lath in accordance with ANSI

A108.1.C.

c. Total thickness of scratch and leveling coats:


1) Apply 9 mm to 16 mm (3/8 inch to 5/8 inch) thick over solid backing.

2) 16 mm to 19 mm (5/8 to 3/4 inch) thick on metal lath over studs.

3) Where wainscots are required to finish flush with wall surface above, adjust

thickness required for flush finish.

d. Apply scratch and leveling coats more than 19 mm (3/4 inch) thick in two coats.

SPEC WRITER NOTE: Use paragraph G when alterations occur in existing work and removal of existing finish flooring and walls occurs.

G. Existing Floors and Walls:

1. Remove existing composition floor finishes and adhesive. Prepare surface by

grinding, chipping, self-contained power blast cleaning or other suitable mechanical

methods to completely expose uncontaminated concrete or masonry surfaces. Follow

safety requirements of ANSI A10.20.

2. Remove existing concrete fill or topping to structural slab. Clean and level the

substrate for new setting bed and waterproof membrane or cleavage membrane.

3. Where new tile bases are required to finish flush with plaster above or where they are

extensions of similar bases in conjunction with existing floor tiles cut channel in floor

slab and expose rough wall construction sufficiently to accommodate new tile base

and setting material.

SPEC WRITER NOTE: See "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation". Details for plumbing items, expansion joints, and where waterproof membranes occur.

3.4 CEMENTITIOUS BACKER UNITS

A. Remove polyethylene wrapping from cementitious backer units and separate to allow for

air circulation. Allow moisture content of backer units to dry down to a maximum of 35

percent before applying joint treatment and tile.

B. Install in accordance with ANSI A108.11 except as specified otherwise.

C. Install units horizontally or vertically to minimize joints with end joints over framing

members. Units with rounded edges; face rounded edge away from studs to form a V

joint for joint treatment.

D. Secure cementitious backer units to each framing member with screws spaced not more

than 200 mm (eight inches) on center and not closer than 13 mm (1/2 inch) from the edge


of the backer unit or as recommended by backer unit manufacturer. Install screws so that

the screw heads are flush with the surface of the backer unit.

E. Where backer unit joins shower pans or waterproofing, lap backer unit over turned up

waterproof system. Install fasteners only through top one-inch of turned up waterproof

systems.

F. Do not install joint treatment for seven days after installation of cementitious backer unit.

G. Joint Treatment:

1. Fill horizontal and vertical joints and corners with latex-Portland cement mortar.

Apply fiberglass tape over joints and corners and embed with same mortar.

2. Leave 6 mm (1/4 inch) space for sealant at lips of tubs, sinks, or other plumbing

receptors.

3.5 GLASS MAT WATER-RESISTANT GYPSUM BACKER BOARD

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. TCA Systems W245-01.

B. Treat joints with tape and latex-Portland cement mortar or adhesive.

3.6 MARBLE

A. Secure thresholds and stools in position with minimum of two stainless steel dowels.

B. Set in dry-set Portland cement mortar or latex-Portland cement mortar bond coat.

C. Set threshold to finish 12mm (1/2 inch) above ceramic tile floor unless shown otherwise,

with bevel edge joint top flush with adjacent floor similar to TCA detail TR611-02.

3.7 METAL DIVIDER STRIPS

A. Install metal divider strips in floor joints between ceramic and quarry tile floors and

between tile floors and adjacent flooring of other materials where the finish floors are

flush unless shown otherwise.

B. Set divider strip in mortar bed to line and level centered under doors or in openings.

//C. At preformed sealant joint: Refer to Section 07 95 13, EXPANSION JOINT COVER

ASSEMBLIES.

1. Comply with recommendations in TCA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation"

Vertical and Horizontal Joint Design Essentials. TCA System EJ 171-02.

a. Locate joint in tile surfaces directly above joint in sub-floor or where indicated

when used with isolation membranes to allow off-setting of joint location from

sub-floor joint.

b. Fasten full length to sub-floor using a construction adhesive.


c. Trowel setting material with full coverage over the entire leg.

2. Set tile up against the joint ensuring that the top edge of the joint is flush or slightly

below the top of the tile. //

3.8 CERAMIC TILE - GENERAL

A. Comply with ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards in "Specifications for

Installation of Ceramic Tile" applicable to methods of installation.

B. Comply with TCA Installation Guidelines:

SPEC WRITER NOTES: 1. Modify and edit setting bed materials to suit job

conditions. 2. For new work set floor tile on mortar bed

minimum thickness of 32 mm (1-1/4 inches), increased to provide positive slopes to drains.

3. Use with reinforcing over cleavage or waterproof membranes.

4. Tile in depressed slab areas may also be set in epoxy or furan mortar, dry-set or latex-Portland cement mortar over "set-up" mortar fills.

5. 75 mm (3 inches) depressed floor slabs are required for floor mortar beds.

6. For existing areas where floors can not be cut for depressed mortar beds and a waterproof membrane is required, consider an elastomeric bond coat over an elastomeric membrane with waterproof isolation membrane system option.

7. Note requirement for drying period (14 to over 60 days) for latex-Portland cement mortar setting beds. Latex (except acrylic) will re-emulsify if exposed to water when not thoroughly dry. Do not use latex-Portland cement in water pools.

8. Wall tile for wet areas such as showers and washing areas: Set tile over metal lath base with Portland cement mortar scratch and leveling coats or over Cementitious backer unit. Use Portland cement mortar, dry-set Portland cement mortar or latex-Portland cement mortar, setting or bond coat as specified.

9. Coordinate to show on drawing, details of each different method of setting at wall, cap strip and base. Show details and extent of expansion joints, waterproofing, and location of areas to be sloped and differences in elevation of floors, top of drains, curbs, and similar features.


10. Clearly define, or show on drawings, where each different setting method is to be used if not clearly defined in Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES finish schedule remarks.

11. For design of various systems see Tile Council of America Inc., "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation."

12. Thin-set tile can only follow slope of sub-floor or contour of walls as only a minimum amount of adjustment can be made.

13. Do not install building expansion joints in ceramic tile floors over water-proof membranes.

C. Installing Mortar Beds for Floors:

1. Install mortar bed to not damage cleavage or waterproof membrane; 32 mm (1-1/2

inch) minimum thickness.

2. Install floor mortar bed reinforcing centered in mortar fill.

3. Screed finish to level plane or slope to drains where shown, float finish.

4. For thin set systems cure mortar bed not less than seven days. Do not use curing

compounds or coatings.

5. For tile set with Portland cement paste over plastic mortar bed coordinate to set tile

before mortar bed sets.

D. Setting Beds or Bond Coats:

1. Where recessed or depressed floor slabs are filled with Portland cement mortar bed,

set ceramic mosaic floor tile in either Portland cement paste over plastic mortar bed

or latex-Portland cement mortar over cured mortar bed except as specified otherwise,

ANSI A108-1C, TCA System F121-02 or F111-02.

2. Use quarry tile in chemical-resistant bond coat, // except in floor of walk-in

refrigerator rooms use: TCA system R 612-02. //

a. Portland cement paste over plastic mortar bed. ANSI A108.1A.

b. Dry-set Portland cement mortar over cured mortar bed. ANSI A108.1B.

3. Pools Holding Water: ANSI A108. 1C. Do not use Latex Portland cement mortar.

SPEC WRITER NOTE: 1. List or specify locations where elastomeric bond

cost systems occurs by room number and name and coordinate with specification Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES.


2. Use only for existing buildings where a depressed slab can not be installed and a curb is not acceptable.

3. Insure details show and identify these system including joints with adjacent materials.

4. Do not use in new buildings.

4. Set floor tile in elastomeric bond coat over elastomeric membrane ANSI 108. 13,

TCA System F122 // where scheduled, // in following spaces, // and where shown. //

a.

b.

c.

5. Set wall tile installed over concrete or masonry in dry-set Portland cement mortar, or

latex-Portland cement mortar, ANSI 108.1B.and TCA System W211-02, W221-02 or

W222-02.

6. Set wall tile installed over concrete backer board in latex-Portland cement mortar,

ANSI A108.1B.

7. Set wall tile installed over Portland cement mortar bed on metal lath base in Portland

cement paste over plastic mortar bed, or dry-set Portland cement mortar or

latex-Portland cement mortar over a cured mortar bed, ANSI A108.1C, TCA System

W231-02, W241-02.

8. Set tile over concrete in therapeutic pools in Portland cement paste or dry set Portland

cement mortar, ANSI A108.1C, TCA System S151-02

9. Set tile installed over gypsum board and gypsum plaster in organic adhesive, ANSI

A108.4, TCA System W242-02.

10. Set trim shapes in same material specified for setting adjoining tile.

E. Workmanship:

1. Lay out tile work so that no tile less than one-half full size is used. Make all cuts on

the outer edge of the field. // Align new tile work scheduled for existing spaces to the

existing tile work unless specified otherwise. //

2. Set tile firmly in place with finish surfaces in true planes. Align tile flush with

adjacent tile unless shown otherwise.

3. Form intersections and returns accurately.

4. Cut and drill tile neatly without marring surface.


5. Cut edges of tile abutting penetrations, finish, or built-in items:

a. Fit tile closely around electrical outlets, piping, fixtures and fittings, so that plates,

escutcheons, collars and flanges will overlap cut edge of tile.

b. Seal tile joints water tight as specified in Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS,

around electrical outlets, piping fixtures and fittings before cover plates and

escutcheons are set in place.

6. Completed work shall be free from hollow sounding areas and loose, cracked or

defective tile.

7. Remove and reset tiles that are out of plane or misaligned.

8. Floors:

a. Extend floor tile beneath casework and equipment, except those units mounted in

wall recesses.

b. Align finish surface of new tile work flush with other and existing adjoining floor

finish where shown.

c. In areas where floor drains occur, slope to drains where shown.

d. Shove and vibrate tiles over 200 mm (8 inches) square to achieve full support of

bond coat.

9. Walls:

a. Cover walls and partitions, including pilasters, furred areas, and freestanding

columns from floor to ceiling, or from floor to nominal wainscot heights shown

with tile.

b. Finish reveals of openings with tile, except where other finish materials are shown

or specified.

c. At window openings, provide tile stools and reveals, except where other finish

materials are shown or specified.

d. Finish wall surfaces behind and at sides of casework and equipment, except those

units mounted in wall recesses, with same tile as scheduled for room proper.

10. Joints:

a. Keep all joints in line, straight, level, perpendicular and of even width unless

shown otherwise.

b. Make joints 2 mm (1/16 inch) wide for glazed wall tile and mosaic tile work.


c. Make joints in quarry tile work not less than 6 mm (1/4 inch) nor more than 9 mm

(3/8 inch) wide. Finish joints flush with surface of tile.

d. Make joints in Paver tile, porcelain type; maximum 3 mm (1/8 inch) wide.

11. Back Buttering: For installations indicated below, obtain 100 percent mortar coverage

by complying with applicable special requirements for back buttering of tile in

referenced ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards:

a. Tile wall installations in wet areas, including showers, tub enclosures, laundries

and swimming pools.

b. Tile installed with chemical-resistant mortars and grouts.

c. Tile wall installations composed of tiles 200 by 200 mm (8 by 8 inches or larger.

d. Exterior tile wall installations.

3.9 CERAMIC TILE INSTALLED WITH PORTLAND CEMENT MORTAR

SPEC WRITER NOTES: 1. Slope mortar fill to floor drains. 2. Mortar bed thickness should be the same

thickness throughout where no drain occur. 3. Mortar and other requirements for shower

receptors are specified in ANSI A108.1. Coordinate with details shown.

4. Clearly detail fills for minimum and maximum thickness required by slopes.

A. Mortar Mixes for Floor, Wall And Base Tile (including Showers, // and Therapeutic

Pools //): ANSI A108.1.except specified otherwise.

B. Installing Wall and Base Tile: ANSI A108.1, except specified otherwise.

C. Installing Floor Tile: ANSI A108.1, except as specified otherwise. Slope mortar beds to

floor drains a minimum of 1 in 100 (1/8 inch per foot).

3.10 PORCELAIN TILE INSTALLED WITH LATEX PORTLAND CEMENT BONDONG MORTAR

Due to the denseness of porcelain tile use latex Portland cement bonding mortar that

meets the requirements of ANSI A118.4.Bonding mortars shall be mixed in accordance

with manufacturer’s instructions. Improper liquid ratios and dwell time before placement

of bonding mortar and tile shall affect bond.

3.11 THIN SET CERAMIC AND PORCELAIN TILE INSTALLED WITH DRY-SET PORTLAND CEMENT AND LATEX-PORTLAND CEMENT MORTAR

A. Installation of Tile: ANSI A108.5, except as specified otherwise.


B. Slope tile work to drains not less than 1 in 100 (1/8 inch per foot).

3.12 THIN SET CERAMIC AND PORCELAIN TILE INSTALLED WITH ORGANIC ADHESIVE

Installation of Tile: ANSI A108.4.

3.13 THIN SET CERAMIC AND PORCELAIN TILE INSTALLED WITH CHEMICAL-RESISTANT BOND COAT

A. Epoxy Resin Type: Install tile in accordance with Installation of Tile with Epoxy Mortar;

ANSI A108.6.

B. Furan Resin Type: Proportion, mix and place in accordance with the manufacturer's

printed instructions. Set tile in accordance with ANSI A108.8.

SPEC WRITER NOTE: Use 3.13 and 3.14 only for existing slabs where depressed floor slab is not possible.

3.14 CERAMIC AND PORCELAIN TILE INSTALLED WITH ELASTOMERIC BOND COAT

A. Surface Preparation: Prepare surfaces as specified in paragraph 3.3G

B. Installation of Elastomeric Membrane: ANSI A108.13 and TCA F122-02.

1. Prime surfaces, where required, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

2. Install first coat of membrane material in accordance with manufacturer's instructions,

in thickness of 0.75 to 1.3 mm (30 to 50 mils).

3. Extend material over flashing rings of drains and turn up vertical surfaces not less

than 100 mm (four inches) above finish floor surface.

4. When material has set, recoat areas with a second coat of elastomeric membrane

material for a total thickness of 1.3 to 1.9 mm (50 to 75 mils).

5. After curing test for leaks with 25 mm (one inch) of water for 24 hours.

C. Installation of Tile in Elastomeric Membrane:

1. Spread no more material than can be covered with tile before material starts to set.

2. Apply tile in second coat of elastomeric membrane material in accordance with the

coating manufacturer's instructions in lieu at aggregate surfacing specified in ASTM

C1127. Do not install top coat over tile.

3.15 GROUTING

A. Grout Type and Location:


1. Grout for glazed wall and base tile, paver tile and unglazed mosaic tile // except for

therapeutic pool // Portland cement grout, latex-Portland cement grout, dry-set grout,

or commercial Portland cement grout.

SPEC WRITER NOTE: List all high heat appliances continuously giving off heat in contact with floors in the following paragraph 2, b, 2.

2. Grout for quarry tile floor and base:

a. Grout for floors of walk-in refrigerated rooms: Epoxy grout.

b. Therapeutic pool areas: Portland cement grout.

c. Grout for Kitchens:

1) Chemical-resistant grout as specified and recommended by manufacturer of

bond coat.

2) Use only furan resin grout within 600 mm (2 feet) of ovens, steam kettles,

water heaters, steam pipes, and // ____. // in rooms.

3) Epoxy grout designed for equivalent heat resistance to furan resin grout may

be used for furan resin grout.

3. Grout for tile of therapeutic pools: Portland cement grout.

B. Workmanship:

1. Install and cure grout in accordance with the applicable standard.

2. Portland Cement grout: ANSI A108.10.

3. Epoxy Grout: ANSI A108.6.

4. Furan and Commercial Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A108.8 and in accordance with

the manufacturer's printed instructions.

5. Dry-set grout: ANSI A108.5.

SPEC WRITER NOTE: Sealant installed at paragraph 3.15 joints only. This work is not to be confused with joint sealing of grouted joints.

3.16 MOVEMENT JOINTS

A. Prepare tile expansion, isolation, construction and contraction joints for installation of

sealant. Refer to Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS.

B. TCA details EJ 171-02.


C. At expansion joints, rake out joint full depth of tile and setting bed and mortar bed. Do

not cut waterproof or isolation membrane.

D. Rake out grout at joints between tile, // tub, // service sink, // at toe of base, // and where

shown // not less than 6 mm (1/4 inch) deep.

3.17 CLEANING

A. Thoroughly sponge and wash tile. Polish glazed surfaces with clean dry cloths.

B. Methods and materials used shall not damage or impair appearance of tile surfaces.

C. The use of acid or acid cleaners on glazed tile surfaces is prohibited.

D. Clean tile grouted with epoxy, furan and commercial Portland cement grout and tile set in

elastomeric bond coat as recommended by the manufacturer of the grout and bond coat.

3.18 PROTECTION

A. Keep traffic off tile floor, until grout and setting material is firmly set and cured.

B. Where traffic occurs over tile floor, cover tile floor with not less than 9 mm (3/8 inch)

thick plywood, wood particle board, or hardboard securely taped in place. Do not remove

protective cover until time for final inspection. Clean tile of any tape, adhesive and stains.

3.19 TESTING FINISH FLOOR

A. Test floors in accordance with ASTM C627 to show compliance with codes 1 through 10.

B. Test kitchen and storage rooms.

END OF SECTION

Life Sciences Building / 4-3-12 09 30 16 - 1 Quarry Tile

SECTION 09 30 16

QUARRY TILE

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Quarry tile and trim units, including unglazed quarry tile and trim units.


A. Exterior Tile Units: Division 2 Unit Pavers Section.

B. Concrete Substrate: Division 3 Concrete Sections.

C. Plywood Subfloor: Division 6 Carpentry Sections.

D. Waterproofing: Division 7 Waqaterproofing Sections.

E. Sealants: Division 7 Joint Sealers Sections.

F. Tile Backer Board: Division 9 Gypsum Board Section.

G. Tile Installation: Division 9 Tile Section.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. American national Standards institute (ANSI):

1. ANSI A 108 Series – Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile and Dimensional Tile.

2. ANSI A 108. 1 A – Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet Set Method.

3. ANSI A 108. 10 – Load Bearing, Bonded, Waterproof Membranes for ThinSet Ceramic Tile and Dimensional Tile.

4. ANSI A 118 Series – Specifications for Ceramic Tile Mortars and Grouts.

5. ANSI A 136.1 Organic Adhesives for Installation of Ceramic Tile.

6. ANSI A 137.1 Specifications for Ceramic Tile.

B. American Society for testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM C499 Facial Dimensions and thickness if Flat, Rectangukar Ceramic Wall and Floor Tile.

Quarry Tile 09 30 16 - 2 Life Sciences Building / 4-3-12

2. ASTM C501 Relative Resistance to Wear of Unglazed Ceramic Tile by the Taber Abraser.

3. ASTM C 1028 Test Method for Determining the Static Coefficiant of Friction of Ceramic Tile and Other Tile Like Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull Meter Method.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Submittal Procedures Section.

B. Product Data: Submit product data, including manufacturer’s product sheet, for specified products

C. Samples: Submit selection and verification samples for finishes, colors and textures

D. Quality Assurance Submittals: Submit the following:

1. Test reports: Certified test reports showing compliance with specifies performance characteristics and physical properties.

2. Certificates: Product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and physical requirements.

3. Master Grade Certificate: Submit material master grade certification for quarry tile products.

4. Manufacturer's Instructions: Manufacturer's installation instructions.

E. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following:

1. Maintenance Data: Maintenance data for installed products in accordance with Division 1 Closeout Submittals, Maintenance Data and Operation Data Section, Include methods for maintaining installed products and precautions against cleaning materials and methods detrimental to finishes and performance.

2. Warranty: Warranty documents specified herein.


A. Installer Qualifications: Installer experienced, as determined by contractor, in performing work of this section who has specialized in the installation of work similar to that required for this project and who is acceptable to product manufacturer.

B. Material Certificates: Provide Master Grade Certificates for each shipment of quarry tile signed by tile manufacturer and Installer.

C. Pre Installation Meetings: Conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, substrate conditions, manufacturer's installation instructions and manufacturer's warranty


requirements, Comply with Division 1 Project Management and Coordination, Project Meetings Section.


A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01 65 00.

B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01 66 00.

C. Protect cement from moisture and humidity


A. Temperature Requirements: Maintain ambient temperature and humidity conditions in spaces where products will be installed for time period before, during and after installation as recommended by manufacturer.

1. Minimum Temperature: Maintain temperature at 50oF (10oC) minimum during installation and for seven days after completion.

• Specifier Note: Coordinate Article below with Conditions of the Contract and with Division I Closeout Submittals, Warranty Section. PART 2 PRODUCTS

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Project Warranty: Refer to Conditions of the Contract for project warranty provisions.

B. Manufacturer's Warranty; Submit, for Owner's acceptance, manufacturer's standard warranty document executed by authorized company official. Manufacturer's warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under the Contract Documents.

• Specifier Note: Coordinate Paragraph below with manufacturer's warranty requirements, Manufacturer has specific notification requirements for claims of latent and nonlatent defects under the warranty.

1. Warranty Period: ( Specify term ) years commencing on Date of Substantial Completion.

• Specifier Note: Coordinate Article below with Division I Closeout Submittals, Maintenance Materials Section.

1.08 MAINTENANCE


A. Extra Materials: Deliver to Owner extra materials from same production run as products installed, Package products with protective covering and identify with descriptive labels. Comply with Division I Closeout Submittals, Maintenance Materials Section.

• Specifier Note: Revise Paragraph below size and percentage as required.

1. Quantity: Furnish quantity of full size units equal to 2% of amount installed for tile and trim units.

2. Delivery, Storage and Protection: Comply with Owner's requirements for delivery, storage and protection of extra materials.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 QUARRY TILE A. Manufacturer: Metropolitan Ceramics, by Ironrock Capital, Inc. Retain or delete Paragraph below per project requirements and specifier's practice.

1. Contact: P.0. Box 9240, Canton, OH 44711; Telephone: (800) 325-3945, (330) 484-4887; Fax: (330) 484-4880.

2. Proprietary Products: ( Somerset™, QUARRYBASICS®, ENVIROQUARRY®,

DURA-QUARRYTM, Metro Tread® , Down to Earth®, vitreous quarry tile and trim units

a. Somerset™ Quarry Tile: i. Tile Description: Unglazed, relieved edge flat tile.

ii. Wearing Surface: (ASTM C501 Abrasion resistance index 35 or better.) Metropolitan tests at > 80 or better (specify wearing surface).

iii. Coefficient of Friction (ASTM C1028): No industry standard. At time of manufacture, Somerset™ meets or exceeds measure of 0.70 dry and 0.60 wet. (Specify coefficient of friction).

iv. Face size tolerance (ASTM C499) Average facial dimension of each tile in the sample shall not vary more than 4% of nominal dimensions

v. Thickness: 1/2" (13 mm). vi. Reduction Fired Colors (range): (#250 Galaxy) (#255 Aztec) (#350 Harvard

Square) (#458 Cordoba) b. Quarrybasics® Quarry Tile:


i. Tile Description: Unglazed, relieved edge flat tile. ii. Wearing Surface: (ASTM C501 Abrasion resistance index 35 or better.) (

Metropolitan tests at > 80 or better). (Specify face wearing surface). iii. Coefficient of Friction (ASTM C1028): No industry standard. At time of

manufacture, all Metropolitan Quarrybasics colors meet or exceed measure of 0.70 dry and 0.60 wet. Quarrybasics X-Colors (enhanced slip resisting product) meets or exceeds 0.90 dry and 0.70 wet at time of manufacture. (Specify coefficient of friction).

iv. Face size tolerance (ASTM C499) Average facial dimension of each tile in the

sample shall not vary more than 4% of nominal dimensions. v. Thickness: 1/2" (13 mm). vi. Clear Tone Colors: ( #310 Mayflower Red, #507 Puritan Gray ,#105 Buckskin,

#107 Boulevard,#505 Plaza Gray, #108 Chestnut Brown, # 101 Oyster Bay, #220 Auburn, #205 Adobe).

vii. X' Tone Colors metallic additive tiles: ( #15X Malibu Beach.)(#31X

Commercial Red),(#57X Stone Gray). c. ENVIROQUARRY® Quarry Tile:

i. Tile Description: Unglazed, relieved edge flat tile with in excess of 50% pre-consumer recycled content.

ii. Wearing Surface: (ASTM C501 Abrasion resistance index 35 or better.) (

Metropolitan tests at > 80 or better). (Specify face wearing surface).

iii. Coefficient of Friction (ASTM C1028): No industry standard. At time of manufacture, ENVIROQUARRY meets or exceeds measure of 0.70 dry and 0.60 wet. (Specify coefficient of friction).

iv. Face size tolerance (ASTM C499) Average facial dimension of each tile in the sample shall not vary more than 4% of nominal dimensions.

v. Thickness: 1/2" (13 mm).

vi. Colors: #850 Reduction Fired (range). (Runs may vary due to recycled content).

d. DURA-QUARRYTM Quarry Tile: i. Tile Description: Unglazed, relieved edge flat tile with in excess of 50%

pre-consumer recycled content.


ii. Wearing Surface: (ASTM C501 Abrasion resistance index 35 or better.) ( Metropolitan tests at > 80 or better). (Specify face wearing surface).

iii. Coefficient of Friction (ASTM C1028): No industry standard. At time

of manufacture, ENVIROQUARRY meets or exceeds measure of 0.70 dry and 0.60 wet. (Specify coefficient of friction).

iv. Face size tolerance (ASTM C499) Average facial dimension of each

tile in the sample shall not vary more than 4% of nominal dimensions. v. Thickness: 1/2" (13 mm) Special Order 3/8” (9.5 mm).

vi. Colors: #308 Single Tone. (Runs may vary due to recycled content). e. Metro Tread® Quarry Tile:

i. Tile Description: Unglazed, relieved edge tile with treads.

ii. Wearing Surface: Nine raised treads, spaced 5/8" (16 mm) running length of each tile.

iii. Coefficient of Friction (ASTM C1028): No industry standard. At time of manufacture Metropolitan Metro Tread (enhanced slip resisting product) meets or exceeds 0.90 dry and 0.70 wet. (Specify coefficient of friction)

iv. Face Dimensions: 6” x 6” (152mm x 152mm).

v. Face size tolerance (ASTM C499) Average facial dimension of each tile in the sample shall not vary more than 4% of nominal dimensions.

vi. Thickness: 1/2" (13 mm).

vii. Color: ( MT 31T Mayflower Red. ) ( MT 57T Puritan Gray.) (MT 15T Buckskin)

f. Down to Earth® Quarry Tile:

i. Tile Description: Unglazed, square edge flat tile with textured surface.


ii. Wearing Surface: (ASTM C501 Abrasion resistance index 35 or better.) Metropolitan tests at > 80 or better (specify wearing surface).

iii. Coefficient of Friction (ASTM C1028): No industry standard. At time of manufacture, all Metropolitan colors meet or exceed measure of 0.80 dry and 0.70 wet. (Specify coefficient of friction).

iv. Face size tolerance (ASTM C499) Average facial dimension of each tile in the sample shall not vary more than 4% of nominal dimensions

v. Thickness: 1/2" (13 mm).

vi. Colors: (#255 Desert Floor) (#155 Cobblestone) (#350 Red Paver) (#458 Bedrock)

3. Trim produst Description: Manufacturer’s standard trim units.

4. Protective Coating: No protective coating required. See manufacturer’s recommendationsw for sealing.

5. Quarry Tile Products Testing: Comply with ANSI A137.1

B. Substitutions: No substitutions permitted.

2.02 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Reference: Refer to Tile Setting And Accessories Section. 1. Setting Materials: Refer to ANSI A108.1A, ANSI A118 series and ANSI 136.1

2. Grouting Materials: Refer to ANSI 108.10, ANSI A118 series.

3. Accessory Materials: Refer to Tile Setting And Accessories Section

4. Sealant Materials: Refer to Joint Sealant Section.

5. Backer Board: Refer to Gypsum Board, Cementitious Section.


2.03 SOURCE QUALITY

A. Source Quality: Obtain quarry tile from a single manufacturer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

• Specifier Note: Retain or delete Article below to suit project requirements and specifier's practice.

3.01 MANUFACURER’S INSTRUCTIONS

A. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer's product data, including product technical bulletins, product catalog installation instructions and product carton instructions.

3.02 EXAMINATION

A. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify substrate conditions, which have been previously installed under other sections, are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.03 PREPARATION

A. References:

1. ANSI Tile Installation Standard: Comply with ANSI A108 series.

2. TCA Installation Reference: Comply with TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation.

B. Filed Blending: Mix and blend tile from several cartons to ensure random distribution of shade variations.

C. Floor Tile Installation:

1. General: Install quarry floor tile and trim in accordance with industry reference standards.

2. Joint Widths: Allow for joints widths in quarry floor tile as indicated on drawings.

D. Wall Tile Installation

1. General: Install quarry wall tile and trim in accordance with industry reference standards.

2. Joint Widths: Allow for joints width in wuarry wall tile as indicated on drawings.

E. Patterns: Install quarry tile in pattern indicated on drawings.

F. Related Materials Installation:

1. Concrete: Refer to Division 3 Concrete Sections.

2. Wood (Plywood): Refer to Division 6 Carpentry Sections.


3. Waterproofing: Refer to Division 7 Waterproofing Sections.

4. Sealants: Refer to Division 7 Joint Sealers Sections.

5. Tile Backer Board: Refer to Division 9 Gypsum Board Section.

6. Tile Accessories: Refer to Tile Setting And Accessories Section.


A. Cleaning: Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. Repair or replace damaged installed products, clean installed products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions prior to owner's acceptance. Remove construction debris from project site and legally dispose of debris.

B. Protection: Protect installed product's finish surfaces from damage during construction.

END OF SECTION

Life Sciences 4-6-12 09 51 13 - 1 Acoustical Panel Ceilings

SECTION 09 51 13

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL AND SUPPLEMENTARY PROVISIONS

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Section Includes: SOUND SILENCER, Porous Expanded Polypropylene acoustical ceiling tile [Select and specify supporting Suspension Grid, if grid is to be a part of this section].

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 9 Sections: Acoustical Suspension. [Cross reference suspension grid system, if grid is specified under a separate section]

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM C635: Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings.

2. ASTM E84: Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of

Building Materials.

3. ASTM E1264: Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products.

4. ASTM C423-99a: Sound Absorption by Reverberation Room Method.


A. Performance Requirements:

1. Provide acoustical ceiling assembly designed and tested to provide surface burning characteristics (ASTM E84) as follows:

a. Flame spread: [1” F/S, 3] [ 2” F/S, 5] b. Smoke Developed: [1” S/D, 84] [2” S/D,113]

2. Provide acoustical ceiling system, which has been manufactured, fabricated and installed to provide Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC) rating as follows:

Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09 51 13 - 2 Life Sciences 4-6-12

a. [Specify required NRC rating.] E-400 Mounting. [1” NRC .50] [2” NRC .70]

b. For direct adhesive or mechanical fastener mounting Type A Mounting [1” NRC .45] [2” NRC .70]

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with Conditions of the Contract

and Division 1 Submittal Procedures Section. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions. C. Samples: Submit [State number of samples required] samples: 6" x 6" (152 x

152 mm) for each PEPP ceiling unit required, showing full range of exposed texture to be expected in completed work.

D. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: Submit the following:

1. Test reports: Upon request submit certified test reports from recognized test laboratories

2. Certificates: Submit manufacturer's certificate that products meet or exceed specified requirements.


A. Installer Qualifications: Utilize an installer having demonstrated experience on

projects of similar size and complexity

B. Regulatory Requirements and Approvals: [Non required .

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING

A. General: Comply with Division 1 Product Requirement Section. B. Delivery: Deliver material in the manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged

containers with identification labels intact. C. Provide labels indicating brand name, source of procurement, style, size and

thickness D. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful

environmental conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer.


1.7 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Requirements:

1. Do not install ceiling panels until building is closed in and HVAC system is operational.

1.8 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials: Provide [A recommended percentage of] [Specify percentage.]

additional material for use by owner in building maintenance and repair.

B. Provide new unopened cartons of extra materials, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with appropriate labels.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

A. Acoustical ceiling Tile shall be as provided by Acoustical Surfaces Inc, 123 Columbia Court N. Chaska, Minn. 55318. Ph: 1 (800) 448 –0121

1. SOUND SILENCER, Porous Expanded Polypropylene (PEPP) Lay-In Grid Ceiling Panels:

a. Material description: Sound Silencer panels shall be manufactured from expanded polypropylene beads, which shall be capable of being recycled.

b. Thickness [1" (25.4 mm) thick] [2" (51 mm) thick.

c. Color, [White, Charcoal]

d. Acoustical panels shall be impervious to moisture, excessive humidity or water.

2.1 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS.

A. Substitutions: No substitutions permitted without express prior approval from Architect

prior to bidding.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

A. Comply with the instructions and recommendations of the ceiling tile manufacturer.

Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09 51 13 - 4 Life Sciences 4-6-12

B. Install materials in accordance with governing regulations, fire resistance

rating requirements, and industry standards applicable to work.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Site Verification of Conditions:

1. Examine surfaces scheduled to receive suspended or directly attached acoustical units for unevenness, irregularities and dampness that would affect quality and execution of work.

2. Do not proceed with installation of ceiling system until unacceptable conditions are corrected.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Do not begin installation until materials sufficient to complete an entire

room are received and are ready for installation. B. Ceiling areas shall be measured to establish layout of acoustical units to balance

border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid use of less-than-half width units at borders

C. Grid layout shall be symmetrically laid out in each space. Coordinate work with

other trades so that lighting fixtures, grilles and other ceiling fixtures work with grid layout.

D. Do not use universal splices or other splices, which would obstruct passage of

recessed lighting fixtures through grid openings or limit fixture relocation upon flanges of ceiling grids.

E. Support for suspension system shall be from structure above, not from

ductwork, metal deck, equipment or piping. F. Hangers shall be spaced not more than 6" (152 mm) from ends and not more

than 4' (1219 mm) on centers on runners. G. Wall moldings shall be installed at the perimeter of each acoustical ceiling area

and at locations where edge of units would otherwise be exposed.

1. Secure moldings to supporting construction by fastening with screw anchors into the substrate, through holes drilled in vertical leg. Space holes not more than 3" (76 mm) from each end and not more than 16" (406 mm) on center along each molding.


2. Level moldings with ceiling suspension system, to a level tolerance of 1/8" (3.2 mm) in 12' (3658 mm).

3. Miter corners of moldings accurately to provide hairline joints, securely

connected to prevent dislocation. Cope exposed flanges of intersecting suspension system members, so that flange faces will be flush.

4. Furnish additional tees for supporting grilles, diffusers and light fixtures. Refer

to reflected ceiling, HVAC and electrical plans for location. 5. Arrange acoustical units and orient directionally patterned units, if any, in

manner shown on reflected ceiling plans.

H. Field cut acoustical panels as required, in accordance with manufacturers

recommended procedures and equipment.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, trim, edge moldings and suspension members to comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning.

B. Remove and replace tiles, which cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to

permanently eliminate evidence of damage.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed work from damage due to subsequent construction activity, including temperature and humidity limitations and dust control, so that the work will be without damage and deterioration at the time of acceptance by the Owner.

END OF SECTION

Child Care Center 4-6-12 09 63 40 - 1 Stone Flooring

SECTION 09 63 40

STONE FLOORING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Echeguren slate flooring and flagstone paving installations with accessories, as required

for complete installation. Coordinate installation with waterproofing membrane at setting

beds.


A. Division 7: Waterproofing membrane at slate setting beds.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ANSI A 108.1: Installation of Tile with Portland Cement Mortar.

B. ANSI A 108.5: Installation of Tile with Latex-Portland Cement Mortar.

C. ANSI A 108.10: Installation of Grout in Tilework.

D. Tile Council of America (TCA): Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature for each manufactured material.

B. Shop Drawings: Provide pattern drawings indicating field and edge conditions for each

area of stone flooring. Indicate locations and widths of expansion, contraction, control,

and isolation joints in slate flooring substrates and finished surfaces.

C. Samples: Furnish samples of each type, color, grade, and finish of slate and each color of

grout required for Project.

D. Color Charts: Show full range of colors, textures and patterns available for each type of

slate.

Stone Flooring 09 63 40 - 2 Child Care Center 4-6-12

E. Full Size Samples: Prepare sample panels consisting of not less than four slate units with

grout mounted on plywood, clearly indicating pattern, coloration, and joints.

F. Certification: Furnish manufacturer certification materials comply with Contract

Documents for each shipment and type of slate, signed by supplier and installer.

G. Maintenance Instructions: Furnish maintenance instructions including information

regarding recommended materials and methods for cleaning and maintaining slate

flooring systems.


A. Source: Obtain each stone from single quarry source, with consistent color range and

texture throughout work; do not change sources or kinds of materials during course of

work.

B. Installer Qualifications: Firm with minimum five years successful experience completing

installation similar to that required.

C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct meeting at site prior to commencing work related to

slate flooring installation.

D. Require attendance of parties directly affecting installation. Review procedures and

coordination required with related work.

E. Field Mock-Up: Provide mock-up of each type of installation using approved materials

and specified methods of installation. Obtain Architect’s acceptance of mock-up prior to

start of installation. Approved mock-up may be incorporated into Project.



A. Handle material to prevent chipping, breakage, soiling or other damage. Protect edges of

materials with wood or other rigid materials. Place and stack skids and units to distribute

weight evenly and to prevent breakage or cracking.

1.07 SITE CONDITIONS

A. Provide sufficient heat and ventilation in areas where work is being performed, so as to

allow to properly set, maintain for minimum 7 days after completion. Take precautionary

measures necessary to ensure excessive temperature changes do not occur.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Slate: Echeguren Slate Inc.

B. Flooring and Paving Slate: Provide non-slip units with minimum 0.60 coefficient of

friction when tested in accordance with ASTM C 1028.

C. Reinforced Portland Cement Setting Bed: Portland cement bed conforming to ANSI A

108.1 and TCA recommendations including separator sheet and reinforcing mesh.

D. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1, white, non-staining.

E. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S.

F. Sand: ASTM C144, clean, free of substances harmful to stone, mortar, and adjacent

materials.

G. Reinforcing: 2 inch by 2 inch, 16/16 gage galvanized steel welded wire mesh.

H. Separator Sheet: Minimum 6 mil polyethylene sheet. Where over waterproof membrane,

separator sheet may be deleted.


I. Medium (Unreinforced) Portland Cement Setting Bed: High-strength medium bed

thickness, Portland cement based formula applications designed specifically for stone

setting beds; comply with ANSI A118.1 and Ceramic Tile Institute 64-1.

J. Acceptable Manufacturer: Custom Building Products/Custom Marble and Granite

Adhesive Mortar Mix. Substitutions: Refer to Division 1.

K. Bond Strength: 300 psi, ASTM C 482 (7 day).

L. Compressive Strength: 2500 psi, ASTM C 109 (7 day).

M. Latex Thin Set: Thinset bond coat, consisting of latex-cementitious mortar conforming to

ANSI A 118.4.

N. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Custom Building Products.

2. Mapei Corp.

3. Laticrete International Inc.

4. Substitutions: Refer to Division 1.

O. Grout: ANSI A 118.6, latex-cementitious type, uniform in color, resistant to shrinkage.

[Special Note: Other grout systems are available, review TCA Handbook.]

P. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Custom Building Products.

2. Mapei Corp.

3. Laticrete International Inc.

4. Substitutions: Refer to Division 1.

Q. Colored Mortar Aggregate: Ground sound stone, as required to match approved sample.


R. Color Admix: ASTM C979, pure, non-fading mineral oxides designed and mixed to

provide uniform color Match unless otherwise indicated.

S. Waterproof Membrane: Refer to Division 7.

T. Cleaning and Sealing Materials: Types as recommended by slate supplier.

1. Cleaner: HMK Stone & Marble Care (415-546-3822)/R55 Regular [R63 Acid

Base Extra Strength].

2. Clear Sealer: HMK Stone & Marble Care/S34 penetrating sealer with minimal

color change.

3. Color Enhancer Sealer (Matte Finish): HMK Stone & Marble Care/S35

penetrating sealer and color enhancer, with matte finish.

4. Color Enhancer Sealer (Satin Sheen): HMK Stone & Marble Care/S37 penetrating

sealer and color enhancer, with satin sheen.

2.02 FABRICATION

A. Provide suppliers standard field sizes as indicated; fabricate special pieces as shown and

as detailed on final shop drawings. Field cuts for fit and clearance to match quality of

shop cut stone.

B. Provide openings and similar spaces and features as required for contiguous work.

2.03 MIXES

A. Site-Made Setting Mortar: ASTM C 270, Type M mortar; mix and proportion

cementitious materials for site-made leveling coats, setting beds and grout.

B. Manufactured Mortars and Grout: Mix and proportion pre-mixed setting beds and grout

materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Examine subbase and supporting structure for stone.

B. Start of work indicates acceptance of conditions.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Prior to installing , ensure surfaces are level.

B. Tolerances:

1. Bed Set Slate: Maximum surface variation of 1/4 inch in 10 feet.

2. Thin Set Slate: Maximum surface variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet.

C. Ensure surfaces are clean and well cured, and sloped to drains where drains are provided.

D. Do not commence work until surface conditions are within tolerances required for proper

installation; apply latex leveling material where necessary to meet required tolerances.

E. Clean stone before setting by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushes followed by

thorough sponging with clear water; use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no

caustic nor harsh fillers or abrasives.

F. Waterproof Membrane: Take special care not to damage waterproofing system. Comply

with waterproof membrane manufacturer recommendations for installation of over

waterproof membrane.

3.03 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not use material with chips, cracks, voids, discolorations or other defects which might

be visible or cause staining in finished work.

B. Execute work with skilled mechanics and employ skilled fitters at site to do necessary

field cutting as stone is set.


C. Provide openings and other spaces as shown or required for contiguous work. Close up

openings in stone after other work is in place. Use materials and set to match surrounding

work. Field cuts for fit and clearance to match quality of shop cut stone. Provide

openings and similar spaces and features as required for contiguous work.

D. Set stone in accordance with approved patterns and mock-up.

E. Joint width: Cut to provide uniform 1/4 inch wide joints. [NOTE: Contact slate supplier

regarding specific slate selection before specifying tighter joints.]

F. Grouting: Comply with ANSI A 108.10. with slate supplier recommendations, and with

grout manufacturer recommendations and installation instructions.

3.04 BED SET STONE INSTALLATION

A. Reinforced Portland Cement Setting Bed: [NOTE: Use reinforced setting for ungauged

slate and as needed to prevent cracking in substrate from broadcasting through slate

installation.]

1. Apply Portland cement mortar setting bed, install reinforcing mesh, and apply

additional Portland cement mortar to proper line and tamp firmly.

2. Lap reinforcing minimum one full mesh and install so reinforcing is approximately in

middle of mortar bed.

3. Setting bed shall be of uniform 1-1/4 inch nominal thickness, allowing for variations

necessary for indicated slopes.

4. Apply setting bed over areas no greater than can be covered while setting bed remains

plastic.

5. Trowel or brush thin layer, 1/32 inch to 1/16 inch thickness, of latex-cement paste

over setting bed or to slate.


6. Apply slate in place and beat firmly into straight, uniform joints.

7. Bring surfaces to true level at proper elevation.

8. Complete beating and leveling within one hour of setting; wipe clean with soft damp

cloth.

B. Medium (Unreinforced) Portland Cement Setting Bed: [NOTE: Use medium setting bed

for ungauged slate and where reinforcing is not necessary.]

1. Thoroughly clean subfloor and moisten without soaking.

2. Apply Portland cement mortar setting bed to proper line and tamp firmly.

3. Setting bed shall be of uniform 1/4 inch to 1 inch thick nominal thickness.

4. Apply setting bed over areas no greater than can be covered while setting bed remains

plastic.

5. Trowel or brush thin layer, 1/32 inch to 1/16 inch thickness, of latex-cement paste

over setting bed or to back of slate.

6. Apply slate in place and beat firmly into straight, uniform joints.

7. Bring surfaces to true level at proper elevation.

8. Complete beating and leveling within one hour of setting; wipe clean with soft damp

cloth.

3.05 THIN SET STONE INSTALLATION

A. [NOTE: USE THIN SET FOR GAUGED SLATE.]

B. Install in accordance with ANSI A 108.5, slate supplier recommendations, and latex

admix manufacturer recommendations and installation instructions for type of substrate.

C. Latex-Cement Thin Set Floors over Concrete: TCA F113.

D. Latex-Cement Thin Set Floors over Waterproof Membrane: TCA F122.


E. Place in accordance with patterns indicated on Drawings; carefully plan layouts, ensure

pattern is

uninterrupted from one surface to the next and through doorways.

F. Patterns: [Random irregular; Rectangles; Squares; Random rectangular; Coursed; Other].

1. Apply latex thin set to back of where necessary to ensure 100% bond between bond

coat and substrate; replace tiles which break due to voids between and substrate.

2. Place thresholds level and true to line; in correct alignment with , doors and

partitions.

3. Neatly cut around fixtures and drains; accurately form corners, base, intersections and

returns.

4. Locate expansion joints, control joints, contraction joints, and isolation joints where

indicated; where not indicated, provide as recommended by supplier and as approved

by Architect.

5. Ensure joints are uniform in width, subject to normal variance in tolerance allowed in

slate size; ensure joints are watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar or grout.

6. Sound slate after setting, remove and replace hollow sounding units.

7. Allow to set for a minimum 48 hours prior to grouting.

8. Grout to comply with recommendations of grout manufacturer and as specified.

9. Leave completed installation free of broken, damaged and faulty slates.

3.03 CLEANING AND SEALING

A. After completion of work, point open joints and replace defective work.

B. Clean surfaces free of foreign matter upon completion of grouting.


C. Use clean water and stiff bristle fiber brushes. Do not use wire brushes, acid type

cleaning agents, cleaning compounds with caustic or harsh fillers, or other materials or

methods which could damage stone.

D. Seal slate and grout surfaces as recommended

END OF SECTION

Child Care/ 04-03-12 09 64 5 Cork Flooring

SECTION 09 64 5

ARCHITECHRAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR INDOOR RESILIENT ATHLETIC

SURFACING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Supply and installation of the indoor resilient multipurpose surfacing B. Application of the game lines C. References for the correct construction and preparation of concrete slabs to receive resilient

flooring.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

Manufacturer’s promotional brochures, specifications and installation instructions.

B. Samples:

1. Submit for selection and approval three (3) sets of the indoor resilient multipurpose surfacing, manufacturer’s brochures, samples or sample boards of all of the available colors, textures and styles.

2. Submit color samples of all the available game line paint colors for selection and approval.

C. Closeout Submittals:

1. Submit three (3) copies of the indoor resilient multipurpose surfacing and manufacturer’s maintenance instructions.

2. Submit three (3) copies of the material and installation warranties as specified.


A. Qualifications:

1. The indoor resilient multipurpose surfacing shall be manufactured in an ISO 9001 certified plant. The indoor resilient multipurpose surfacing shall be manufactured in an ISO 14001 certified plant.

2. The indoor resilient multipurpose surfacing supplier shall be an established firm experienced in the field and appointed as a distributor by the manufacturer of the indoor resilient multipurpose surfacing.

B. Certifications:


1. Installer to submit the indoor resilient athletic surfacing manufacturer’s or distributor’s certification attesting that they are an approved installer of the indoor resilient multipurpose surfacing.

2. The indoor resilient multipurpose surfacing manufacturer to submit official ISO 9001 certification for the facility in which the indoor resilient multipurpose surfacing is manufactured.

3. The indoor resilient multipurpose surfacing manufacturer to submit official ISO 14001 certification for the facility in which the indoor resilient multipurpose surfacing is manufactured.

C. Testing:

Tests shall be relative for multi-purpose use with certificates from independent testing resources to be made available upon request. Test results shall be no more than 5 years old and performed according to ASTM and/or EN standard testing procedures.


A. Delivery:

Material shall not be delivered until all related work is in place and finished and/or proper storage facilities and conditions can be provided and guaranteed stable according to the manufacturer’s recommendations.

1.5 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. It is the responsibility of the general contractor/construction manager to maintain project/site conditions acceptable for the installation of the indoor resilient multipurpose flooring.

B. The area in which the indoor resilient multipurpose surfacing will be installed shall be dry and weather tight. Permanent heat, light and ventilation shall be installed and operable.

C. All other trades shall have completed their work prior to the installation of D. the resilient athletic flooring. The general contractor or Construction Manager shall maintain

a secure and clean working environment before, during and after the installation. Suspension of other trades’ work may be authorized providing their work will not damage the new flooring. Maintain a stable room temperature of at least 65°F for a minimum of one (1) week prior to, during, and thereafter installation. An effective low-permeance vapor barrier is placed directly beneath the concrete subfloor. For “on” or “below grade” installations, it is recommended to provide a permanent vapor barrier resistant to long term hydrostatic pressure/moisture exposure. Protrusions should be sealed to prevent moisture migration into the slab. Moisture should not be allowed to

E. enter the slab after the completed construction.


F. Concrete subfloor surface pH level within the 7 to 10 range dependent upon installation type. G. Concrete subfloor should be no greater than 1/8" within a 10 ft diameter. This tolerance can

be measured in accordance with ASTM E1155. A specified (FF ) of 50 and an (FL ) of 30 should reach this degree of floor flatness and floor level. There is no numerical correlation between F numbers and the deviation from the straight edge; however the above specified numbers should achieve a flat floor with minimal deviation in the slab. Reference ACI 117 and ACI 302.1R. The general contractor should provide a certificate of compliance with the above recommendations.

H. Concrete subfloor must be clean and free of all foreign materials or objects including, but not limited to, curing compounds and sealers.

I. Fill cracks, grooves, voids, depressions, and other minor imperfections with Ardex (or equal) cement-based patching/leveling compounds. Follow the manufacturer’s directions. Moveable joints must be treated utilizing specific transitioning joint devices depending upon the architect’s recommendations. Follow current ASTM F710 guidelines for the preparation of concrete slabs to receive resilient flooring.

J. Refer to ACI 302.2R “Guidelines for Concrete Slabs that Receive Moisture-Sensitive Flooring Materials” for concrete design and construction.

K. Concrete slab shall be fortified with continual steel reinforcement. Fiber reinforcement alone shall not be considered adequate fortification.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Materials:

The indoor resilient athletic surfacing shall be covered by the manufacturer against product defects for 8 years. A 3rd party limited warranty shall also be provided as reinforcement. The manufacturer of the indoor resilient multipurpose surfacing must provide this warranty upon request.

B. Installation:

The installation of the indoor resilient multipurpose surfacing shall be covered against poor workmanship and faulty installation by a two (2) year written, limited warranty provided by the contractor performing/overseeing the installation.

1.7 ADDITIONAL MATERIALS

Furnish to the owner additional materials containing a total of at least 1% of each different color or design of the indoor resilient athletic surfacing used on the project.

1.8 LEED™ CERTIFICATION


The indoor resilient athletic surfacing should be able to help this facility to achieve points towards LEED™ certification. Flooring system must be certified by FloorScore

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

The basis of the design for the indoor resilient multipurpose surfacing is EcoPure as manufactured by Tarkett Sports. All other installation accessories and related components must be either made or approved by the indoor resilient athletic surfacing manufacturer. Other products may be approved as equal if deemed qualified and submitted in accordance with the General Conditions. Test reports confirming compliance from an Independent Sports Laboratory must be provided along with samples, technical data, installation, maintenance, and warranty prior to acceptance as an alternative product.

2.2 MATERIALS.

EcoPure - Prefabricated 4.6 mm foam backed linoleum sports surfacing with marbled design and slightly textured surface as supplied by Tarkett Sports. Product to be naturally bacteriostatic and will not contribute to the proliferation of bacteria or fungus. The material’s surface shall be protected with XF® X-treme performance finish or equivalent for ease of maintenance. Floor covering requiring waxes or other restorative treatments shall not be considered. Welding rod shall also incorporate the XF® X-treme finish or equivalent.

1. Physical properties of the indoor resilient athletic surfacing shall conform to the following minimums:

2. Color: As available from the indoor resilient athletic surfacing manufacturer’s standard range.

Product Type Linoleum Sports Flooring

Total Potential Credits 10 Building Reuse Maintain Interior Nonstructural Elements MR 1.2 Renovation 1

Construction Waste Management MR 2 Renovation 2 Recycled Content MR 4 New/Renovation 2

Materials and Resources Rapidly Renewable Materials MR 6 New/Renovation 1

Indoor Environmental Air Quality Low VOC Adhesives/Sealants

IEQ 4.1 New/Renovation 1

Low-emitting Materials Paints and Coatings IEQ 4.2 New/Renovation 1

Low-Emitting Materials Flooring Systems IEQ 4.3 New/Renovation 1 Low-Emitting Materials Composite Wood and Agrifiber

Products IEQ 4.4 New/Renovation 1


B. Welding Rod:

As supplied by the indoor resilient athletic surfacing manufacturer or supplier. Color to blend with the indoor resilient athletic surfacing color or design. All seams shall be heat welded. Welding rod shall also incorporate the XF® X-treme finish or equivalent.

C. Adhesive:

As approved by the indoor resilient athletic surfacing manufacturer.

D. Game Line Paint Primer:

As approved by the indoor resilient athletic surfacing manufacturer.

E. Game Line Paint:

As approved by the indoor resilient athletic surfacing manufacturer. Colors are to be selected from the manufacturer’s standard range.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. It is the responsibility of the general contractor/construction manager to ensure that project/site conditions are acceptable for the installation of the indoor resilient athletic flooring.

B. Verify that the area in which the indoor resilient athletic surfacing will be installed is dry and weather tight. Verify that permanent heat, light and ventilation is installed and operable.

C. Verify that all other work that could cause damage, dirt and dust or interrupt the normal pace of the indoor resilient athletic flooring installation is completed or suspended.

D. Verify that there is a stable room temperature of at least 65°F. E. Verify that there are no foreign materials or objects on the subfloor and that the subfloor is

clean and ready for installation. F. Direct Full Spread Adhering to Concrete Subfloor : moisture content less than 5

pounds/1,000 sq.ft./24 hours when tested using calcium chloride per ASTM F 1869 or no more than 80 % RH when tested per ASTM F2170.

G. If both tests are performed, use the highest value. Do not average the results of the tests. Report all field test results in writing to the General Contractor, Architect, and End User prior to installation.

H. Verify that the concrete subfloor surface pH level is within the 7 - 10 range. I. Document the results indicating the slab is within manufacturer’s tolerances J. for slab deviation.

3.2 PREPARATION OF SURFACES


A. Sand the entire surface of the concrete slab. B. Sweep the concrete slab so as to remove all dirt and dust. If a sweeping compound is to

be used it must be a sweeping compound that does not contain oil or other items that may inhibit the adhesive bond.

C. Slab must be dust free. In the event that dust impairs adhesive bond, priming the slab prior to application of adhesive may be necessary. Follow installation guidelines.

3.3 OPTIONS FOR MOISTURE MITIGATION

A. For projects with moisture conditions higher than the specified tolerances, consult with the moisture mitigation provider regarding compliance and performance requirements. Silicate or Elastomeric type moisture mitigation systems shall not be accepted. Trained and certified applicators are required.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. The installation area shall be closed to all traffic and activity for a period to be set by the indoor resilient athletic surfacing installer. The indoor resilient athletic surfacing installation shall not begin until the installer is familiar with the existing conditions.

B. All necessary precautions should be taken to minimize noise, smell, dust, the use of hazardous materials and any other items that may inconvenience others.

C. Install the indoor resilient athletic surfacing in strict accordance with the indoor resilient athletic surfacing manufacturer’s written instructions.

D. Install the indoor resilient athletic surfacing minimizing cross seams. Provide a seam diagram during the submittal process for approval prior to installation.

E. Paint game lines using approved game line paint primer and game line paint in strict accordance with the game line paint manufacturer’s instructions.

F. Install appropriate threshold plates or transition strips where necessary.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Remove all unused materials, tools, and equipment and dispose of any debris properly. Clean the indoor resilient athletic surfacing in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

3.6 PROTECTION

If required, protect the indoor resilient athletic surfacing from damage using coverings approved by the manufacturer until acceptance of work by the customer or their authorized representative.

A. RELATED STANDARDS AND GUIDELINES ASTM F1869 “Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Evaporation

B. Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride” ASTM F2170 “Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity

C. In Concrete Floor Slabs Using In-Situ Probes”


D. ASTM F710 “Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring” ACI 302.2R-06 “Guideline for Concrete Slabs that Receive Moisture-Sensitive

END OF SECTION

Chemistry Building/ 92-07 / 4-5-12 09 64 66 -1 Wood Athletic Flooring

SECTION 09 64 66

WOOD ATHLETIC FLOORING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES

A. MFMA (Maple Flooring Manufactures Association).

B. FIBA (The International Basketball Federation).


A. All system component parts must be supplied by Action Floor Systems, LLC.

B. Manufacturer shall be an established firm experienced in field and have been in business a minimum of ten (10) years; Action Floor Systems, LLC or an approved equal.

C. Facility personnel responsible for the assembly and disassembly of the portable floor shall be instructed in the proper procedures by a qualified factory representative.

D. Flooring system shall be independently verified to meet or exceed the SCORES criteria for environmental design and athletic performance: Sustainable Construction of Renewable Engineered Surfaces.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturers product data: Submit Action’s NitroPanel specification sheets..

B. Samples: Submit one (1) sample of the NitroPanel if requested by architect.

C. Maintenance literature: Submit one (1) copy of manufactures maintenance instructions.

D. ASTM C270 – Mortar for Unit Masonry.


A. The portable floor system shall be stored indoors in a protected dry area with temperature and relative humidity conditions that approximate the conditions of the assembled area. The portable floor system shall be protected at all times from contact with moisture and excessive relative humidity.

B. Permanent heating and ventilation shall be installed and operating, a moderate room temperature shall be maintained prior, during, and after delivery and/or installation.

C. The concrete slab shall be dry, free of foreign materials and ready for installation. Moderate room temperature of 65 degrees (18 C) or more shall be maintained a week

Wood Athletic Flooring 09 64 66 -2 Chemistry Building/ 92-07 / 4-5-12

preceding and throughout the duration of the installation. Humidity conditions within the building shall approximate humidity conditions which will prevail when the building is occupied. Care should be taken to maintain humidity within the range of 35% to 50%.

D. The storage area should maintain a temperature of 60 to 80 degrees F (16 to 27 degrees C), with a relative humidity of 35 to 50%. The storage room must be well ventilated and dry with a temperature and relative humidity approximating the installed conditions.

1.05 WARRANTY

A. Action Floor Systems, LLC. warrants the material it ships to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year. The exclusive remedy under this warranty shall be replacement or repair of defective material supplied by Action Floor Systems, LLC. All implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for intended use are limited to the period of this warranty. This warranty excludes consequential damages.

B. This warranty does not cover damage caused by fire, winds, floods, chemicals, or other abuse, or by failure of other contractors to adhere to specifications, or neglect of reasonable precaution to provide adequate ventilation during hot and humid weather. This warranty also excludes damage due to excessive dryness or excessive moisture from humidity, spillage, migration through the slab or wall or any other source. This warranty also excludes damage to floors due to ordinary wear and tear, faulty construction of the building, (other than the flooring installation), separation of the concrete slab underlying the floor, settlement of the walls, or use of water on the floor or faulty assembly, disassembly, storage, and improper care of the floor system.

C. During the warranty period, the floor cannot be coated without the permission of the floor contractor.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Flooring

1. Flooring shall be Northern Hard Maple flooring, 2nd&Btr. LL, ERT, 25/32" x 2-1/4" (20mm x 57mm), MFMA grade marked & stamped as manufactured by Action Floor Systems, LLC, or 25/32” x 1-1/2” (20mm x 38mm) (optional).

2. Grades available are MFMA 1st and 3rd grade.

3. FSC Certified lumber (Optional).

B. Subfloor

1. Subfloor shall be 1/2" (12mm) 4ply, C-D face exposure 1, rated plywood, OSB (oriented strand board) is not allowed.

C. Sleepers


1. High strength laminated 1-3/8” x 1-3/8” (35mm x 35mm) sleepers, LSL or SPF sleepers are not allowed.

D. Resilient Pads

1. Natural rubber Nitro pads 3/4" (19mm), factory attached and spaced with Nitro pad guards

E. Panel Attachments

1. Machine fasten maple flooring strips through the plywood subfloor into each high strength laminated sleeper.

2. Panels incorporate a continuous HDP tongue and groove assembly, tapered tongue and groove with adjacent panels providing integral alignment and prevent vertical movement between panels.

3. NitroPanel inner panel connections shall not be visible when the floor system is assembled. Nitro pins shall be included for panel assembly of the floor system in the factory located holes of the overlapping steel assembly brackets.

F. Fasteners

1. Flooring fasteners shall be 2" (50mm) cleats, or 15-gauge coated staples.

G. Floor System

1. Floor system shall consist of 203 full (4’ x 8’ (1.2m x 2.4m)) panels and 14 half (4’ x 4’ (1.2m x 1.2m)) panels for a court size of 60’ x 112’ (18.2m x 34.1m).

2. Finished court dimension can be modified in 4’ (1.2m) increments for width and length, overall court: x (Optional).

2.02 FLOOR SANDING

A. Use coarse, medium, and fine grade sandpaper.

B. After sanding, buff entire floor using 100-grit screen or equal grit sandpaper, with a heavy-duty buffing machine.

2.03 FINISHING

A. Inspect entire area of floor to ensure that the surface is acceptable for finishing, completely free of sanding dust and perfectly clean.

B. Apply seal and finish per manufacturer's instructions.

C. Buff and vacuum or tack between each coat after it dries.

Wood Athletic Flooring 09 64 66 -4 Chemistry Building/ 92-07 / 4-5-12

D. Apply game lines accurately after the seal coat, after buffing and vacuuming. Lay out in accordance with drawings. For game lines, use current rules of association having jurisdiction. Lines shall be straight with sharp edges. Game line paint shall be compatible with finish.

E. Gameline colors, markings and, graphics shall be provided by the owner or architect to Action.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Inspect concrete slab for proper tolerance and dryness reporting any discrepancies in writing to the customer.

B. All work to put the concrete slab in acceptable condition shall be the responsibility of the customer.

C. Area of installation shall be dry, clean, and ready for installation. Subfloor shall have a tolerance of 1/8” (3mm) in 10’ (3m).

3.02 ASSEMBLY

A. Begin with row A as the starting point. With panel A1 in position, place panel A2 and insert Nitro Pin. Swing panel A2 into position. Align panels using a string line to ensure proper installation. Continue assembly of remaining rows following the number panels sequence, securing the panels together with Nitro pins.

3.03 DISASSEMBLY

A. Dry mop entire floor prior to disassembly.

B. Disassemble in opposite order. Remove Nitro pins and swing each panel clear of following panel edges.

C. Stack full rows together in reverse sequence, with the Nitro panels stacked face to face with a protective sheet between faces.

3.04 CLEAN UP

A. Clean up all unused materials and debris and remove from premises, properly dispose of all waste materials.

3.05 MAINTENANCE

A. Upon completion of floor installation, the owners, attendants or individuals in charge and responsible for the upkeep of the building are to see that the care and maintenance instructions of the MFMA are followed. Failure to do so may void warranty.

END OF SECTION

Life Science / 4-3-12 09 65 16 - 1 Resilient Sheet Flooring

SECTION 09 65 16

RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Traffic Membrane, consisting of welded seam PVC waterproofing, over the following surfaces:

1. Balcony decks and roof decks

2. Walkways, ramps, and stairways.

3. Patios and courtyards


A. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Scuppers, counter flashings, and fascias.

B. Section 07710 - Manufactured Gutters and Downspouts: Scuppers, counter flashings, and fascias.

C. Section 15160 - Roof drains

1.03 REFERENCES

A. CAN/ULC-S107 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Roof Coverings; National Standard of Canada.

B. CCMC - Technical Guide for PVC Sheet Waterproofing (Exposed to Light Pedestrian Traffic); National Research Council, Canada Construction Materials Centre (CCMC).

C. CGSB 37.54-95 - Roofing and Waterproofing Membrane, Sheet Applied, Flexible, Polyvinyl Chloride; Canadian General Standards Board.

D. CGSB 37-GP-55M - Application of Sheet Applied Flexible Polyvinyl Chloride Roofing Membrane; Canadian General Standards Board.

E. ASTM E 108 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings.

F. ICC - Acceptance Criteria for Walking Decks; ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (ICC-ES).

G. UBC Std 15-2 - Test Standard for Determining the Fire Retardancy of Roof-covering

Resilient Sheet Flooring 09 65 16 - 2 Life Science / 4-3-12

Materials; International Conference of Building Officials.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Manufacturer's specifications, including data substantiating compliance with physical properties specified.

C. Shop Drawings: Installation and seaming plan, showing joints, termination details, and interface with other materials.

D. Samples: Two 8-1/2 by 11 inch (210 by 250 mm) pieces showing finish, pattern, color, and backing; labeled.

E. Manufacturer's printed installation instructions and recommendations, including precautions required for seaming and adhering membrane.

F. Installer's Qualifications.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in providing products of the type specified in this section, with minimum of 15 years documented experience with products in use.

B. Installer Qualifications: Trained and currently certified by manufacturer.

C. Pre-installation Meeting: Discuss waterproofing practices and precautions applicable to this project.

1. Convene minimum of 7 days prior to start of installation. 2. Require the attendance of:

a. Manufacturer's representative. b. Contractor's field superintendent. c. Installation foreman. d. Other trades affected by this work. e. Owner's representative.


A. Deliver products in manufacturer's original containers, dry and undamaged, with seals and labels intact.

1. Label uncured materials, both sheets and canned goods, with date of manufacturer and shelf life.

2. Do not use creased or damaged sheets. 3. Do not use products after end of shelf life.

B. Store and handle materials to prevent damage. 1. Place materials on pallets.


2. Prevent creasing of rolled materials. 3. Do not use polyethylene to cover stored materials

(canvas tarpaulins are acceptable). 4. Keep containers closed, except when removing

materials from them.

C. Keep materials at temperature between 40 degrees F (4.4 degrees C) and 80 degrees F (26.6 degrees C); if adhesives are exposed to lower temperature, verify usability with manufacturer before using.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Provide manufacturer's 10 year warranty for membrane leaks due to a manufacturing defect, covering materials, and/or repair and replacement labor.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer: Provide products of Duradek/Durarail U.S. Inc., 1722 Iron Street, North Kansas City, MO 64116. ASD. Tel: (816) 421-5830. Fax: (816)421-2924.

B. Manufacturer: Provide products of Duradek/Durarail Canada Ltd., 8288 129th Street, Surrey, BC V3W 0A6 Canada. ASD. Tel: (604) 591-5594. Fax: (604) 591-3100.

D. Requests for substitution will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01 60 00.

E. Substitutions: Not permitted.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Traffic Membrane: Duradek Ultra; polyester reinforced PVC membrane with ultra-violet resistance, for fully-adhered installation with heat-welded seams and perimeter attachment.

1. Sheet Width: 54 inches (1371.5 mm).and 72 inches (1828.8mm) 2. Overall Sheet Thickness: 0.060 inch (1.5 mm). 3. PVC Film Thickness: 0.050 inch (1.3 mm). 4. Weight: 50 oz/sq yd (1695 g/sq m). 5. Color: As selected by Architect.

A Color: Ultra Supreme Granite. B Color: Ultra Supreme Taupe.

6. Coefficient of Friction: a. Dry leather: 0.53.


b. Dry rubber: 0.89. c. Wet leather: 0.62. d. Wet rubber: 0.92. C Color: Ultra Classic Sandstone D Color: Ultra Classic Steel E Color: Ultra Marble Mocha. F Color: Ultra Marble Pewter. G Color: Ultra Marble Slate. H Color: Ultra Supreme Chip I Color: Ultra Heritage Agate J Color: Ultra Heritage Aspen K Color: Ultra Heritage Sienna L Color: Ultra Heritage Sunrise M Color: Ultra Surcoseal Cappuccino N Color: Ultra Surcoseal Grey. O Color: Ultra Surcoseal Greige. P Color: Ultra Surcoseal Latte Q Color: Ultra Surcoseal Suede R Color: As selected by Architect.

6. Coefficient of Friction: a. Dry leather: 0.50. b. Dry rubber: 0.70. c. Wet leather: 0.60. d. Wet rubber: 0.65.

7. Flammability (ASTM E 108 and UBC Std 15-2): Class A, when installed over non-combustible substrate.

8. Flammability (CAN/ULC-S107): Class A, when installed over non-combustible substrate.

9. Comply with CAN/CGSB-37.54. 10. National Building Code of Canada Compliance: Comply with National

Building Code of Canada 2005, Part 9, Clause 9.26.2.1(1)(h), and CCMC Technical Guide for PVC Sheet Waterproofing (Exposed to Light Pedestrian Traffic), as evidenced by current Evaluation Report prepared by National Research Council, Canada Construction Materials Centre (CCMC).

11. CMHC Approval: Approved by Canada Mortgage and Housing Corporation for use in construction financed or insured under the National Housing Act.

12. International Building Code Compliance: Comply with 2006 International Building Code requirements for walking decks and ICC Acceptance Criteria for Walking Decks, as evidenced by current Evaluation Report prepared by ICC Evaluation Service (ICC-ES).

B. Surface Conditioners, Adhesives, Sealants, Fillers, and Cleaners: As specified or provided by membrane manufacturer.

C. Perimeter Fasteners: Mechanical fastening devices furnished by membrane manufacturer; color coordinated to membrane color.

D. PVC Coated Metal, Scuppers, Overflow Drains, Roof Drains, and Trims furnished by membrane manufacturer.


E. Adjacent Flashings: Specified in other sections; installed by others.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work and conform to membrane manufacturer's requirements.

B. Verify that deck is: 1. Secure, well supported, solid, and in accordance with local code

structural requirements. 2. Clean and smooth, free of depressions, waves, and projections, properly

sloped to drains, valleys, or eaves. 3. Dry and free of ice and snow.

C. Verify that adjacent precast deck members are flush within 1/4 inch (6 mm) vertical variation, with grout keys filled flush.

D. Notify the Architect of any conditions that would prevent satisfactory completion of the work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Do not proceed with installation until substrate preparation is complete.

B. Coordinate timing of installation to avoid construction traffic over completed traffic membrane surfaces.

D. Wood Deck: Fill joints, knot holes, voids, and low areas with filler and sand smooth.

E. Wood Deck: Cover with cementitious board meeting requirements of Class A approved application. Fill joints, knot holes, voids, and low areas with filler and sand smooth.

G. Concrete Deck: Fill surface imperfections and variations with leveling compound. Test for and remove surface contaminants.

H. Coordinate installation with installation of drains and similar accessories.


3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, applicable codes, and CGSB-37-GP-55M.

B. Do not install when temperature is below 25 degrees F (minus 3.8 degrees C) or above 98 degrees F (36.6 degrees C). Do not install when winds are gusting over 30 mph (48.3 kph).

C. Do not dilute primers, adhesives, coatings, or sealants.

D. Install membrane with minimum number of seams possible. Overlap seams 3/4 inch (19 mm), to shed water; heat-weld all seams.

E. Adhere membrane to substrate.

F. Mechanically fasten all perimeter edges and penetrations.

G. Install flashings and accessories. Seal around all penetrations, drains, and edges.

3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Clean soiled areas in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Repair damaged areas to match original materials.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. Protect finished work from traffic using durable temporary materials.

END OF SECTION

Life Sciences 4-6-12 09 65 19 - 1 Resilient Tile (VCT)

Section 09.65.19

RESILIENT TILE FLOORING INCLUDING

VINYL COMPOSITION TILE

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Resilient Tile (Vinyl Composition Tile) Flooring.

B. Related Sections:

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives, include printed statement of VOC content and chemical components.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size samples of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern required.

E. Product Schedule: For resilient products. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Mockups: Provide resilient products with mockups specified in other Sections.

Resilient Tile (VCT) 09 65 19 - 2 Life Sciences 4-6-12


A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by Tarkett, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 85 deg F (29 deg C).


A. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

B. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by Tarkett, but not less than 65 deg F (18 deg C) or more than 85 deg F (29 deg C) in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation.

C. Maintain the ambient relative humidity between 40% and 60% during installation.

D. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by Tarkett, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 85 deg F (29 deg C).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING

A. Resilient Vinyl ComPosition Tile Flooring 1. Azrock TEXTILE specify – Resilient Vinyl Composition Tile Flooring with the

following physical characteristics: a. Complies with requirements for ASTM F 1066, Class 2 (Through Pattern)

Standard Specification for Vinyl Composition Floor Tile b. Wear layer/Overall thickness: 1/8" (3.2 mm) c. Tile sizes: 12" x 12" (30.5 cm x 30.5 cm) and 12" x 24" (30.5 cm x 61 cm) d. Slip Resistance: ADA Compliant e. ASTM F 970, Standard Test Method for Static Load Limit – 150 PSI f. ASTM E 648, Standard Test method for Critical Radiant Flux of 0.45

watts/cm2 or greater, Class I g. Warranty: 5 year Manufacture's Warranty h. Azrock TEXTILE may be installed with SpraySmart System • For Azrock TEXTILE Tile specify (V ____ [Specify color by number and

name])


2. Azrock VCT, SOLIDS & FEATURE STRIPS specify – Resilient Vinyl Composition Tile Flooring with the following physical characteristics: a. Complies with requirements for ASTM F 1066, Class 1 (Solid Color)

Standard Specification for Vinyl Composition Floor Tile b. Wear layer/Overall thickness: 1/8" (3.2 mm) c. Tile sizes: 12" x 12" (30.5 cm x 30.5 cm) d. Slip Resistance: ADA Compliant e. ASTM F 970, Standard Test Method for Static Load Limit – 150 PSI f. ASTM E 648, Standard Test method for Critical Radiant Flux of 0.45

watts/cm2 or greater, Class I g. Warranty: 5 year Manufacture's Warranty h. Azrock VCT, SOLIDS & FEARTURE STRIPS may be installed with

SpraySmart System

• For Azrock VCT Tile specify (V ____ [Specify color by number and name])

• For Azrock SOLIDS Tile specify (VS ____ [Specify color by number and name])

• For Azrock FEATURE STRIPS specify (FS ____ [Specify color by number and name])

2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, Portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation.

B. Adhesives: As recommended by Tarkett to meet site conditions. 1. Vinyl Composition Tile:

a. Tarkett 100 Clear Thin Spread Adhesive b. Tarkett 940 Two-Part Polyurethane Adhesive c. Tarkett 122 SpraySmart Adhesive (up to 8 pounds calcium chloride \ 90%

relative humidity and less than 11 pH)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the work.

B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to Azrock written instructions to ensure adhesion of Resilient Tile Flooring. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and

hardeners. 2. Remove substrate paint, coatings and other substances that are incompatible with

adhesives or contain soap, wax, oil, solvents, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

3. Mechanically remove contamination on the substrate that may cause damage to the resilient flooring material. Permanent and non-permanent markers, pens, crayons, paint, etc., must not be used to write on the back of the flooring material or used to mark the substrate as they could bleed through and stain the flooring material.

4. Prepare Substrates according to ASTM F 710 including the following: a. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed

with installation only after substrates pass testing. 1) Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Results

must not exceed 5 lbs. Moisture Vapor Emission Rate per 1,000 sq. ft. in 24 hours. Special Note: If MVER is greater than 5 lbs. but less than 8 lbs. see

requirements for Tarkett SpraySmart Adhesive. – or –

2) Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Results must not exceed 80%. Special Note: If MVER is greater than 80% but less than 90% see

requirements for Tarkett SpraySmart Adhesive. b. A pH test for alkalinity must be conducted. Results should range between 7

and 9. If the test results are not within the acceptable range of 7 to 9, the installation must not proceed until the problem has been corrected. Special Note: If pH reading exceeds 9 but less than 11 see requirements

for Tarkett SpraySmart Adhesive. c. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by

manufacturer. 5. Wood subfloors must have a minimum 18" (45.7 cm) of cross-ventilated space

beneath the bottom of the joist. a. The floor must be rigid, free of movement. b. Single wood and tongue and groove subfloors should be covered with ¼"

(6.4 mm) or ½" (12.7 mm) APA approved underlayment plywood. 1) Use ¼" (6.4 mm) thick underlayment panels for boards with a face

width of 3" (76 mm) or less. 2) Use ½" (12.7 mm) thick underlayment panels for boards with a face

width wider than 3" (76 mm). c. Do not install over OSB (Oriented Strand Board), particle board, chipboard,

lauan or composite type underlayments.


B. Fill cracks, holes, depressions and irregularities in the substrate with good quality Portland cement based underlayment leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

C. Floor covering shall not be installed over expansion joints.

D. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. 1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be

installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.

E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation.

3.3 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient tile flooring.

B. Vinyl Composition Tile Flooring: 1. Install with Azrock/Tarkett adhesive specified for the site conditions and follow

adhesive label for proper use. 2. Follow Azrock's recommendation for Quarter Turn tiles. 3. Open enough cartons of floor tiles to cover each area, and mix tile to ensure shade

variations do not occur within any one area. 4. Roll the flooring in both directions using a 100 pound three-section roller.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.

C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

D. No traffic for 24 hours after installation. Special Note: When Tarkett SpraySmart Adhesive is used traffic may be allowed

immediately after installation

E. No heavy traffic, rolling loads, or furniture placement for 72 hours after installation.


Special Note: When Tarkett SpraySmart Adhesive is used traffic may be allowed immediately after installation

F. Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion.

G. Wait 72 hours after installation before performing initial cleaning. Special Note: When Tarkett SpraySmart Adhesive is used maintenance may be

started immediately after installation.

H. A regular maintenance program must be started after the initial cleaning. Special Note: When Tarkett SpraySmart Adhesive is used maintenance may be

started immediately after installation.

END OF SECTION

Project Name/ Project Number/ 4-3-12 09 66 16 Epoxy Terrazzo

Section 09 66 16 Epoxy Terrazzo

(Revised 6/94 Supersedes all previous Specifications for Epoxy Terrazzo)

SECTION 09 EPOXY TERRAZZO 1/4" OR 3/8" nominal thickness. PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS

NOTE: DELETE NONAPPLICABLE ITEMS.

A. Furnishing and/or installation

of metal lath and scratch coat. Section____________________ B. Attachment of metal stairs, any welding and mesh reinforcing. Section____________________ C. Furnishing and setting of floor drains. Section____________________ D. Furnishing and setting surface hardware. Section____________________ E. Setting of metal base beads and wood ground, Section____________________ NOTE: DELETE IN CASES WHERE JURISDICTION PERMITS TERRAZZO

CONTRACTOR TO INSTALL. F. Backing for Epoxy Terrazzo base must be cement board or exterior grade plywood,

concrete block, concrete or cement plaster. G. Concrete subfloor, Section_________________________________________________________ NOTE: CONCRETE SUBFLOOR TO BE LEVEL (MAXIMUM VARIATION NOT TO

EXCEED 1/4 INCH IN 10 FEET) AND TO HAVE A STEEL TROWEL FINISHED SURFACE. NO CURING AGENTS OR OTHER ADDITIVES WHICH COULD PREVENT BONDING SHOULD BE USED. THE SLAB SHOULD HAVE AN EFFICIENT MOISTURE BARRIER UNDER THE CONCRETE SLAB WHEN PLACED DIRECTLY ON GRADE. SAW CUTTING OF CONTROL JOINTS MUST BE DONE BETWEEN 12-24 HOURS AFTER PLACEMENT OF THE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE.

H. Broom clean area to receive terrazzo of loose chips, laitance and all foreign matter. I. Sufficient water, temporary heat and light, and adequate electric with suitable outlets

connected and distributed for use within 100 feet of any working space.


NOTE: AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SHALL BE MAINTAINED AS PER MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDATIONS, MINIMUM 50 DEGREES FAHRENHEIT.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Acceptable supplier:

1. Materials furnished shall meet NTMA Specifications. B. Installer qualifications:

1. Installer shall be a contractor member of NTMA and shall perform all work in accordance with NTMA standards.

2. If installer is not a contractor member of NTMA, they shall submit a list of completed projects of a similar magnitude and complexity.

1.03 SUBMITTAL A. Samples:

1. Submit a maximum of three samples, minimum 6" x 6" for each color and type of terrazzo.

2. Submit two, 6" minimum lengths of each type and kind of divider strips. B. Maintenance Literature:

1. Submit two copies of maintenance recommendations of NTMA or maintenance product members of NTMA.

C. Certification: 1. Suppliers shall furnish certification attesting that materials meet specification

requirements. 2. Suppliers shall furnish properly labeled material and Material Safety Data Sheets

which comply to current state and federal requirements. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery of materials:

1. Deliver materials in a manner to prevent damage to containers and/or bags. B. Storage of materials:

1. Store materials in a clean, dry and heated (if necessary) location (50 -90 degrees Fahrenheit) furnished by others.

1.05 GUARANTEE One year from date of substantial completion of Terrazzo installation.


PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Primer: As recommended by Epoxy Resin Supplier. B. Epoxy resin mixed according to manufacturers recommendation and tested without

aggregate added. All specimens cured for 7 days at 75 degrees plus or minus 2 degrees Fahrenheit and 50% plus or minus 2 R.H. The product shall meet the following requirements:

PROPERTY TEST METHOD REQUIREMENT HARDNESS ASTM D-2240 using Shore D Durometer 60 -85 TENSILE ASTM D-638 run at .2" min. 3,000 psi min. STRENGTH Specimen made using “C” die listed in ASTM D-412 COMPRESSIVE ASTM D-695, Specimen B cylinder 10,000 psi min STRENGTH CHEMICAL ASTM D-1308 -7 days at room temperature by RESISTANCE immersion method have no deleterious effects. The following contaminants used: Distilled Water1% Soap Solution Mineral Water10% Sodium Hydroxide Isopropanol10% Hydrochloric Acid Ethanol ........ 30% Sulfuric Acid .025 Detergent Solution5% Acetic Acid C. Epoxy Resin mixed according to manufacturers recommendations and blended with 3

volumes of Georgia White marble blended 60% #1 chip and 40% #0 chip, ground and grouted with epoxy resin according to 3.02 C-2-Finishing to a nominal 1/4" thickness. All specimens cured 7 days at 75 degrees plus or minus 2 degrees Fahrenheit and 50% plus or minus 2% R.H. The finished epoxy terrazzo shall meet the following requirements: 1. Flammability: When tested in accordance with ASTM-D-635, the Epoxy terrazzo

shall comply with the following value:Self-extinguishing, extent of burning 0.25 inches maximum.

2. Thermal Coefficient of Linear Expansion: when tested in accordance with ASTM-D-696, the Epoxy terrazzo will comply with the following value: 25 x 10-6 inches per inch per degrees to 140 degrees Fahrenheit maximum. Temperature range -12 degrees to 140 degrees Fahrenheit.


3. Bond Strength: When tested in accordance with Field Test Method for surface soundness and adhesion as described in ACI Committee No. 403 Bulletin Title No. 59-43 (Pages 1139-1141) the Epoxy terrazzo shall comply with the following value: 100% concrete failure minimum, with 300 PSI minimum tensile strength. NOTE: THIS TEST IS INTENDED TO EVALUATE THE BOND TO THE CONCRETE SUBFLOOR. A 100% CONCRETE FAILURE INDICATES A GOOD BOND.

D. Marble Chips: 1. Size: To conform with NTMA gradation standards. NOTE: SEE PRODUCT INFORMATION. 2. Abrasion and Impact resistance when testing in accordance with ASTM C 131-89

shall not exceed 40% loss. 3. 24 Hour absorption rate not to exceed 0.75 percent. 4. Chips shall contain no deleterious or foreign matter. 5. Dust content less than 1% by weight.

E. Strips: 1. Stop and divider “L” strips_______________________gauge.

(Select gauge white alloy of zinc or plastic. Consult with manufacturer of epoxy resin if brass strips are desired.)

NOTE: SELECT GAUGE FROM FOLLOWING GAUGE 18, 16, OR 14 B & S GAUGE OR 1/8, 1/4 OR 3/8 INCH HEAVY TOP “L” OR “K” TYPE. 2. CONSTRUCTION JOINT DOUBLE “L” STRIPS, BACK TO BACK...16 GAUGE WHITE ALLOY OF ZINC MATERIAL.

F. Terrazzo Cleaner: 1. Ph factor between 7 and 10, where applicable. 2. Biodegradable and phosphate free.

G. Sealer: 1. Ph factor between 7 and 10, where applicable. 2. Shall not discolor or amber 3. Flash point: ASTM D-56, 80 degrees Fahrenheit minimum, where applicable. 4. U/L listed as “Slip Resistant.”

2.02 MIXES A. Terrazzo Selection:

1. Type: ________________________________________________________ NOTE: SELECT COLOR AND DESIGN FROM NTMA INFORMATION GUIDE OR COLOR PLATES. ANY DEVIATION MUST BE CLEARLY STIPULATED.

B. Proportions: 1. Epoxy Terrazzo Topping: In accordance with resin supplier’s recommendations.

C. Mixing: 1. Terrazzo Topping: Charge and mix marble chips, filler and epoxy resin in

accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.


PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine areas to receive terrazzo for defects in existing work that affect proper

execution of Epoxy Terrazzo. 1. Defects in existing work that affect proper execution of terrazzo.

NOTE: CRACKS IN SUBSTRATE WILL USUALLY BE TRANSMITTED THROUGH TOPPING TO SURFACE.

2. Deviations beyond allowable tolerance for the concrete slab work. NOTE: SUBFLOOR NOT TO VARY MORE THAN 1/4 INCH FROM TRUE PLANE IN 10 FEET. EPOXY TERRAZZO, AS SPECIFIED,IS NOT INTENDED TO LEVEL SUBSTRATE AND WILL ONLY FOLLOW THE CONTOUR OF THE CONCRETE SLAB. IF, FOR ANY REASON, THE SUBCONTRACTOR QUESTIONS THE SUITABILITY OF THE SUBSTRATE FOR BONDING, ANY WORK REQUIRED TO ELIMINATE NON-CONFORMITY OF SUBSURFACE SPECIFICATIONS IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF OTHERS, ANY MATERIALS USED TO CORRECT NONCONFORMITY MUST BE COMPATIBLE WITH EPOXY SYSTEM SELECTED AND BE APPROVED BY THE TERRAZZO CONTRACTOR.

B. Start work only when all defects have been corrected by others. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Subfloor:

1. Prepare substrate to receive epoxy terrazzo in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

2. Install control joints directly above control joints in subfloor. 3. Install divider strips as shown on drawings.

B. Placing Terrazzo: 1. Prime subfloor in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 2. Place terrazzo mixture in panels formed by divider strips. Trowel mixture to top of

strips. C. Finishing:

1. Rough Grinding: a. Grind with 24 or finer grit stones or with comparable diamond plates. b. Follow initial grind with 80 or finer grit stones.

2. Grouting: a. Cleanse terrazzo with clean water and rinse. b. Remove excess rinse water and hand apply grout using identical color as used in

topping, taking care to fill voids. 3. Cure Grout.

NOTE: GROUT MAY BE LEFT ON TERRAZZO UNTIL ALL HEAVY AND MESSY WORK IN PROJECT IS COMPLETED.

4. Fine Grinding: a. Grind with 80 or finer grit stones until all grout is removed from surface. b. Upon completion, terrazzo shall show a minimum of 70% of marble chips.


D. Cleaning and Sealing: 1. Wash all surfaces with a neutral cleaner. 2. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. 3. Apply sealer in accordance with manufacturer’s directions.

E. Protection: 1. Upon completion, the work shall be ready for final inspection and acceptance by

the owner or his agent. 2. The General Contractor shall protect the finished work from the time that the

terrazzo contractor completes the work.

GUIDE SPECIFICATION FOR CONDUCTIVE EPOXY TERRAZZO SECTION 09 CONDUCTIVE EPOXY TERRAZZO The following should be added to the Epoxy Resin Terrazzo Specification. 2.01 MATERIALS H. Resin Epoxy Terrazzo:

7. Conductivity: Meet or exceed all the requirements of Bulletin 56A of the National Fire Prevention Association for Conductive Floors. NOTE: 1.01.H.7 THIS REQUIREMENT CALLS FOR CONDUCTIVE FLOORS TO HAVE AN ELECTRICAL RESISTANCE OF LESS THAN 1,000,000 OHMS AND MORE THAN 25,000 OHMS

GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONDUCTIVE POLYESTER TERRAZZO SECTION 09 CONDUCTIVE POLYESTER TERRAZZO The following should be added to the Polyester Resin Terrazzo Specification. 2.01 MATERIALS J. Polyester Terrazzo:

15. Conductivity: Meet or exceed all the requirements of Bulletin 56A of the National Fire Prevention Association for conductive floors. NOTE: 2.01.J/15 THIS REQUIREMENT CALLS FOR CONDUCTIVE FLOORS TO HAVE AN ELECTRICAL RESISTANCE OF LESS THAN 1,000,000 OHMS AND MORE THAN 25,000 OHMS.

Forestry Building / 4-6-12 09 67 00 - 1 Fluid-Applied Flooring

SECTION 09 67 00

FLUID-APPLIED FLOORING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. SECTION INCLUDES:

1. Moisture vapor emission testing.

2. Surface preparation.

3. Joint treatment.

4. Furnishing and installation of chemical resistant polyurethane floor coating system.

B. RELATED SECTIONS:

1. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete:

a. Concrete slabs on or below grade shall be installed over an effective moisture vapor barrier.

b. Concrete slabs shall be cured 30 days, be structurally sound and have a steel trowel finish.

c. Surface shall be well sloped to drains, straight and level with the permissible degree of tolerance of 1/4” in 10’-0” in any direction.

d. No curing compounds or surface contaminants shall be used in placing new concrete.


A. The flooring system shall consist of a primer coat and a finish coat. Total dry film thickness shall be 4-6 mils.

B. Finished flooring system shall have the following performance characteristics:

1. Gloss (60 degrees): 90-95

2. Hardness (sward): 30

3. Tabor Abrasion: (1000 gm load, 1000 cycles, CS-17 wheel): 40 mg loss.

4. Flexibility (ASTM D-222): Passes 1/8 inch.

Fluid-Applied Flooring 09 67 00 - 2 Forestry Building / 4-6-12

5. Impact Resistance (ASTM D-2794): Passes 160 inch-pounds, direct and reverse.

C. Chemical Resistance: (ASTM D-1308 24 hour exposure) Unaffected by the following:

1. Gasoline

2 Hydraulic Fluid #83282

3. Mineral Spirits

4. 50% Sodium Hydroxide

5. 25% Hydrochloric Acid

6. 25% Sulfuric Acid

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer’s product data, literature and brochures.

B. Submit manufacturer’s samples showing color choices and texture.

C. Submit a statement from the manufacturer indicating the installer’s certification.

D. Prior to commencing work, installer shall prepare two 6” x 6” samples of the resinous flooring chosen for the project showing actual color, thickness and texture. These samples shall serve as a basis for comparison throughout the duration of the work.


A. All resin material used in this system shall be manufactured by a single manufacturer to ensure compatibility and proper bonding.

B. Applicator must have a minimum of 3 years experience in installing polymeric flooring systems and be certified by the manufacturer.

C. All work shall be performed in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions


A. All material shall be delivered to the jobsite in unopened containers clearly labeled by the manufacturer and stored in a dry location at a minimum of 65 degrees F.

1.06 WARRANTY

Forestry Building / 4-6-12 09 67 00 - 3 Fluid-Applied Flooring

A. Manufacturer shall guarantee that his materials are free from defects and comply with published specifications.

B. Applicator shall warranty against faulty workmanship for a period of 3 years from substantial completion of the project.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Resin materials shall be supplied by Arizona Polymer Flooring Inc., Glendale, Arizona.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Primer: 39 percent volume solids, two-component, VOC compliant, aliphatic chemical resistant polyurethane.

B. Finish Coat: 39 percent volume solids, two-component, VOC compliant, aliphatic chemical resistant polyurethane.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions:

1. Inspect surfaces to receive floor system.

2. Conduct calcium chloride moisture vapor emission testing according to ASTM 1869-04. If test reading is above three pounds, consult Arizona Polymer Flooring before proceeding.

3. Before starting work, report in writing to the Architect any unsatisfactory conditions.

4. Application of any material shall signify that surfaces have been inspected and are satisfactory.


A. Surfaces to receive flooring system shall be abraded to a minimum of 5 mil profile using shot blasting or acid etching. If acid etching is used, it shall be done in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions. Etching shall be accomplished using a mechanical scrubber with an aggressive “nylogrit” type brush.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Allow sufficient time for the installation of the flooring system. At no time shall the speed of project completion be allowed to detrimentally effect the application.

Fluid-Applied Flooring 09 67 00 - 4 Forestry Building / 4-6-12

B. Provide sufficient light, power, heat and working conditions to permit proper application of the materials. Substrate temperature shall be at a minimum of 50°F during application and for 48 hours thereafter.

C. Prime prepared substrate with Polyurethane 250 at 250-300 sq. ft. per gallon. Allow to cure overnight before proceeding.

D. If slip resistance is required, broadcast 60 mesh bleached aluminum oxide at a rate of 1-2 pounds per 1000 sq. ft. into the prime coat. Allow to cure overnight before proceeding.

E. Apply finish coat of Polyurethane 250 at 300-325 sq. ft. per gallon.


A. Installer shall monitor the thickness of the system as the work progresses. Areas found not to meet the required thickness shall receive additional material until desired thickness is attained.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. Installation areas must be kept free from traffic and other trades during the application procedure and cure time.

3.06 MAINTENANCE

A. Floor should be cleaned with ammonia and water or a mild, non-filming detergent. For difficult stains, paint thinner may be used without harming the finish.

END OF SECTION

Life Sciences 4-6-12 09 68 00 - 1 Carpeting

SECTION 09 68 00

CARPETING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

Section specifies carpet, edge strips, adhesives, and other items required for complete

installation.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Color and texture of carpet and edge strip: Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR

FINISHES.

B. Resilient wall base: Section 09 65 13, RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES.


A. Carpet installed by mechanics certified by the Floor Covering Installation Board.

B. Certify and label the carpet that it has been tested and meets criteria of CRI IAQ Carpet

Testing Program for indoor air quality.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA,

AND SAMPLES.

B. Product Data:

1. Manufacturer’s catalog data and printed documentation stating physical

characteristics, durability, resistance to fading and flame resistance characteristics for

each type of carpet material and installation accessory.

2. Manufacturer’s printed installation instructions for the carpet, including preparation

of installation substrate, seaming techniques and recommended adhesives and tapes.

3. Manufacturer’s certificate verifying carpet containing recycled materials include

percentage of recycled materials as specified.

C. Samples:

1. Carpet: "Production Quality" samples 300 x 300 mm (12 x 12 inches) of carpets,

showing quality, pattern and color specified in Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR

FINISHES.

Carpeting 09 68 00-2 Life Sciences 4-6-12

2. Floor Edge Strip (Molding): 150 mm (6 inches) long of each color and type specified.

3. Base Edge Strip (Molding): 150 mm (6 inches) long of each color specified.

D. Shop Drawings: Installers layout plan showing seams and cuts for sheet carpet and carpet

module.

E. Maintenance Data: Carpet manufacturer’s maintenance instructions describing

recommended type of cleaning equipment and material, spotting and cleaning methods

and cleaning cycles.


A. Deliver carpet in manufacturer’s original wrappings and packages clearly labeled with

manufacturer’s name, brand, name, size, dye lot number and related information.

B. Deliver adhesives in containers clearly labeled with manufacturer’s name, brand name,

number, installation instructions, safety instructions and flash points.

C. Store in a clean, dry, well ventilated area, protected from damage and soiling. Maintain

storage space at a temperature above 16 degrees C (60 degrees F) for 2 days prior to

installation.


Areas in which carpeting is to be installed shall be maintained at a temperature above 16

degrees C (60 degrees F) for 2 days before installation, during installation and for 2 days

after installation. A minimum temperature of 13 degrees C (55 degrees F) shall be

maintained thereafter for the duration of the contract. Traffic or movement of furniture or

equipment in carpeted area shall not be permitted for 24 hours after installation. Other

work which would damage the carpet shall be completed prior to installation of carpet.

1.7 WARRANTY

Carpet and installation subject to terms of "Warranty of Construction" FAR clause

52.246-21, except that warranty period is extended to two years.

1.8 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS

A. Publication listed below form a part of this specification to extent referenced.

Publications are referenced in text by basic designation only.

B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

ANSI/NSF 140-10..................Sustainable Carpet Assessment Standard


C. American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (AATCC):

AATCC 16-04 ........................Colorfastness to Light

AATCC 129-10 ......................Colorfastness to Ozone in the Atmosphere under High

Humidities

AATCC 134-11 ......................Electric Static Propensity of Carpets

AATCC 165-08 ......................Colorfastness to Crocking: Textile Floor Conerings-

AATCC Crockmeter Method

D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

ASTM D1335-05 ...................Tuft Bind of Pile Yarn Floor Coverings

ASTM D3278-96 (R2004) .....Flash Point of Liquids by Small Scale Closed-Cup

Apparatus

ASTM D5116-10 ...................Determinations of Organic Emissions from Indoor

Materials/Products

ASTM D5252-05 ...................Operation of the Hexapod Tumble Drum Tester

ASTM D5417-05 ...................Operation of the Vettermann Drum Tester

ASTM E648-10 ......................Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a

Radiant Heat Energy Source

E. The Carpet and Rug Institute (CRI):

CRI 104-11 .............................Installation of Commercial Carpet

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CARPET

A. Physical Characteristics:

1. Carpet free of visual blemishes, streaks, poorly dyed areas, fuzzing of pile yarn, spots

or stains and other physical and manufacturing defects.

2. Manufacturers standard construction commercial carpet:

a. Broadloom; maximum width to minimum use

b. Modular Tile: 660 mm (24 inches) square tile.

3. Provide static control to permanently control static build upto less than 2.0 kV when

tested at 20 percent relative humidity and 21 degrees C (70 degrees F) in accordance

with AATCC 134.


4. Pile Height: Maximum 3.25 mm (0.10 inch).

5. Pile Fiber: Nylon with recycled content 25 percent minimum branded (federally

registered trademark).

6. Pile Type: Level Loop.

7. Backing materials: Manufacturer’s unitary backing designed for glue-down

installation using recovered materials.

8. Appearance Retention Rating (ARR): Carpet shall be tested and have the minimum

3.5-4.0 Severe ARR when tested in accordance with either the ASTM D 5252

(Hexapod) or ASTM D 5417 (Vettermann) test methods using the number of cycles

for short and long term tests as specified.

9. Tuft Bind: Minimum force of 40 N (10 lb) required to pull a tuft or loop free from

carpet backing. Test per ASTM D1335.

10. Colorfastness to Crocking: Dry and wet crocking and water bleed, comply with

AATCC 165 Color Transference Chart for colors, minimum class 4 rating.

11. Colorfastness to Ozone: Comply with AATCC 129, minimum rating of 4 on the

AATCC color transfer chart.

12. Delamination Strength: Minimum of 440 N/m (2.5 lb/inch) between secondary

backing.

13. Flammability and Critical Radiant Flux Requirements:

a. Test Carpet in accordance with ASTM E 648.

b. Class I: Not less than 0.45 watts per square centimeter.

c. Class II: Not less than 0.22 watts per square centimeter.

d. Carpet in corridors, exits and Medical Facilities: Class I.

14. Density: Average Pile Yarn Density (APYD):

a. Corridors, lobbies, entrances, common areas or multipurpose rooms, open offices,

waiting areas and dining areas: Minimum APYD 6000.

b. Other areas: Minimum APYD 4000.

15. VOC Limits: Use carpet and carpet adhesive that comply with the following limits for

VOC content when tested according to ASTM D 5116:

a. Carpet, Total VOCs: 0.5 mg/sq.m x hr.


b. Carpet, 4-PC (4-Phenylcyclohexene): 0.05 mg/sq.m x hr.

c. Carpet, Formaldehyde: 0.05 mg/sq.m x hr.

d. Carpet, Styrene: 0.4 mg/sq.m x hr.

e. Adhesive, Total VOCs: 10.00 mg/sq.m x hr.

f. Adhesive, Formaldehyde: 0.05 mg/sq.m x hr.

g. Adhesive, 2-Ethyl-1-Hexanol: 3.00 mg/sq.m x hr.

B. Shall meet platinum level of ANSI/NSF 140.

C. Color, Texture, and Pattern: As specified in Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR

FINISHES.

2.2 ADHESIVE AND CONCRETE PRIMER

A. Waterproof, resistant to cleaning solutions, steam and water, nonflammable, complies

with air-quality standards as specified. Adhesives flashpoint minimum 60 degrees C (140

degrees F), complies with ASTM D 3278.

B. Seam Adhesives: Waterproof, non-flammable and non-staining.

2.3 SEAMING TAPE

A. Permanently resistant to carpet cleaning solutions, steam, and water.

B. Recommended by carpet manufacturer.

2.4 EDGE STRIPS (MOLDING)

A. Metal:

1. Hammered surface aluminum, pinless, clamp down type designed for the carpet being

installed.

2. Floor flange not less than 38 mm (1-/2 inches) wide, face not less than 16 mm (5/8

inch) wide.

3. Finish: Clear anodic coating unless specified otherwise in Section 09 06 00,

SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES.

B. Vinyl Edge Strip:

1. Beveled floor flange minimum 50 mm (2 inches) wide.

2. Beveled surface to finish flush with carpet for tight joint and other side to floor finish.

3. Color as specified in Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES.

C. Carpet Base Top Edge Strip:


1. Vinyl "J" strip wall flange minimum of 38 mm (1-1/2 inches) wide with cap beveled

from wall to finish flush with carpet being installed.

2. Color as specified in Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES.

2.5 LEVELING COMPOUND (FOR CONCRETE FLOORS)

A. Provide Portland cement bases polymer modifier with latex or polyvinyl acetate resin

manufactured specifically for resurfacing and leveling concrete floors. Products

containing gypsum are not acceptable.

B. Determine the type of underlayment selected for use by condition to be corrected.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Examine surfaces on which carpeting is to be installed.

B. Clean floor of oil, waxy films, paint, dust and deleterious substances that prevent

adhesion, leave floor dry and cured, free of residue from curing or cleaning agents // and

existing carpet materials //.

C. Correct conditions which will impair proper installation, including trowel marks, pits,

dents, protrusions, cracks or joints.

D. Fill cracks, joints depressions, and other irregularities in concrete with leveling

compound.

1. Do not use adhesive for filling or leveling purposes.

2. Do not use leveling compound to correct imperfections which can be corrected by

spot grinding.

3. Trowel to smooth surface free of trowel marks, pits, dents, protrusions, cracks or joint

lines.

E. Test new concrete subfloor prior to adhesive application for moisture and surface

alkalinity per CRI 104 Section 6.3.1 or per ASTM E1907.

3.2 CARPET INSTALLTION

A. Do not install carpet until work of other trades including painting is complete and dry.

B. Install in accordance with CRI 104 direct glue down installation.

1. Relax carpet in accordance with Section 6.4.

2. Comply with indoor air quality recommendations noted in Section 6.5.

3. Maintain temperature in accordance with Section 15.3.


C. Secure carpet to subfloor of spaces with adhesive applied as recommended by carpet

manufacturer.

D. Follow carpet manufacturer's recommendations for matching pattern and texture

directions.

E. Cut openings in carpet where required for installing equipment, pipes, outlets, and

penetrations.

1. Bind or seal cut edge of sheet carpet and replace flanges or plates.

2. Use additional adhesive to secure carpets around pipes and other vertical projections.

G. Broadloom Carpet:

1. Install per CRI 104, Section 8.

2. Lay broadloom carpet lengthwise in longest dimension of space, with minimum

seams, uniformly spaced to provide a tight smooth finish, free from movement when

subjected to traffic.

3. Use tape-seaming method to join sheet carpet edges. Do not leave visible seams.

H. Carpet Modules:

1. Install per CRI 104, Section 13, Adhesive Application.

2. Lay carpet modules with pile in same direction unless specified other wise in Section

09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES.

3. Install carpet modules so that cleaning methods and solutions do not cause dislocation

of modules.

4. Lay carpet modules uniformly to provide tight flush joints free from movement when

subject to traffic.

3.3 EDGE STRIPS INSTALLATION

A. Install edge strips over exposed carpet edges adjacent to uncarpeted finish flooring.

B. Anchor metal strips to floor with suitable fasteners. Apply adhesive to edge strips, insert

carpet into lip and press it down over carpet.

C. Anchor vinyl edge strip to floor with adhesive apply adhesive to edge strip and insert

carpet into lip and press lip down over carpet.

D. Carpet Base Top Edge Strip Installation:

1. Place carpet molding at top edge of carpet where turned up as base.


2. Install molding in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. //

3.4 PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A. Remove waste, fasteners and other cuttings from carpet floors.

B. Vacuum carpet and provide suitable protection. Do not use polyethylene film.

C. Do not permit traffic on carpeted surfaces for at least 48 hours after installation. Protect

the carpet in accordance with CRI 104.

D. Do not move furniture or equipment on unprotected carpeted surfaces.

E. Just before final acceptance of work, remove protection and vacuum carpet clean.

END OF SECTION

Boucke Building 4-6-12 09 69 00 - 1 Access Flooring

SECTION 09 69 00

ACCESS FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Work of this section includes, but is not limited to: access floor panels, floor coverings, understructure and various electrical, data and communication accessories.


A. Concrete sealer shall be compatible with pedestal adhesive, see Division 3. B. Electrical contractor shall provide necessary material and labor to electrically connect the

access floor to the building, see Division 26. 1.3 ENVIROMENTAL CONDITIONS FOR STORAGE AND INSTALLATION

A. Area to receive and store access floor materials shall be enclosed and maintained at ambient temperature between 35° to 95° F and relative humidity levels between 20% to 80% relative. All floor panels shall be stored at ambient temperature between 50° to 90° F for at least 24 hours before installation begins. All areas of installation shall be enclosed and maintained at ambient temperature between 50° to 90° F and at relative humidity level between 20% to 80%, and shall remain within these environmental limits throughout occupancy.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. CISCA (Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association) - “Recommended Test Procedures for Access Floors” shall be used as a guideline when presenting load performance product information.

1.5 PERFORMANCE CERTIFICATION

A. Product tests shall be witnessed and certified by independent engineering and testing laboratory based in the U.S. with a minimum of five years experience testing access floor components in accordance CISCA “Recommended Test Procedures for Access Floors”.

1.6 COUNTRY-OF-ORIGIN AND PRODUCT MARKING

A. Access floor materials shall comply with the provisions outlined in FAR Subpart 25.2 – Buy American Act – Construction Materials.

B. Floor panels shall be permanently marked with manufacturer’s name, product identification,

manufacturing date and country-of-origin. Removable Product ID stickers are not acceptable.


Access Flooring 09 69 00 - 2 Boucke Building 4-6-12

A. Design Load: Panel supported on actual understructure (the system) shall be capable of supporting a safe working load or design load of 1000 lbs. This rating signifies that the system will withstand not only a concentrated load placed on a one square inch area at any location on the panel without yielding but also demonstrates the ability to withstand an overload capacity of two times its rating (ie. a safety factor of 2). (For a detailed description of this important criteria, refer to the Design Load bulletin at www.tateaccessfloors.com and click on Resources/Technical Bulletins).

B. Safety Factor: Panel supported on actual understructure (the system) shall be

capable of withstanding a minimum of (2) two times the design load anywhere on the panel without failure. Failure is defined as the point at which the system will no longer accept the load.

C. Uniform Load: Panel supported on actual understructure (the system) shall be

capable of supporting a uniform load of 350 lbs./ft2 placed on the entire area of the panel without yielding and generating a permanent set of no more than 0.010” once the load is removed. Note: The uniform load rating of an access floor panel as specified herein should not be confused with the “uniform live load” as specified in seismic zone applications.

D. Rolling Load: Panel supported on actual understructure (the system) shall be able to

withstand the following rolling loads at any location on the panel without developing a local and overall surface deformation greater than 0.040 inches. Note: wheel 1 and wheel 2 tests shall be performed on two separate panels.

Wheel 1: Size: 3” dia x 1 13/16” wide Load: 400 lbs. Passes: 10 Wheel 2: Size: 6” dia x 2” wide Load: 400 lbs. Passes: 10,000 E. Impact Load: Panel and supporting understructure (the system) shall be capable of

supporting an impact load of 150 lbs. dropped from a height of 36 inches onto a one square inch area (using a round or square indentor) at any location on the panel.

F. Panel Drop Test: Panel shall be capable of being dropped face up onto to a concrete

slab from a height of 36”, after which it shall continue to meet all load performance requirements as previously defined.

G. Panel Cutout: Panel with an 8” diameter interior cutout supported on actual

understructure shall be capable of maintaining its design load strength anywhere on the panel without the use of additional supports.

H. Flammability: System shall meet Class A Flame spread requirements for flame

spread and smoke development. Tests shall be performed in accordance with ASTM-E84-1998, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics for Building Materials.

I. Combustibility: All components of the access floor system shall qualify as non-

combustible by demonstrating compliance with requirements of ASTM E 136, Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750 deg C.

http://www.tateaccessfloors.com/


J. Recycled Content: Panel and understructure system shall be required to have a minimum recycled content of 25%.

K. Axial Load: Pedestal support assembly shall provide a 5000 lb. axial load without

permanent deformation. L. Overturning Moment: Pedestal support assembly shall provide an average overturning

moment of 1000 in-lbs. when glued to a clean, sound, uncoated concrete surface. ICBO number for the specific system or structural calculations shall be required attesting to the lateral stability of the system under seismic conditions.

M. Stringer Concentrated Load: Stringer shall be capable of withstanding a concentrated load

of 450 lbs. placed in its midspan on a one square inch area using a round or square indentor without exceeding a permanent set of 0.010” after the load is removed.

1.8 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS:

A. Access floor system, where indicated on the design documents, shall consist of modular and removable welded steel panels supported on all four edges by structural steel members which are designed to bolt onto adjustable height pedestal assemblies forming a modular grid pattern.

B. Panel shall be easily removed by one person with a suction cup lifting device and shall be

interchangeable except where cut for special conditions. C. Quantities, finished floor heights (FFH) and location of accessories shall be as specified on

the contract drawings. 1.9A SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW

A. Detail sheets, for each proposed product type, which provide the necessary information to

describe the product and its performance. B. Test reports, by an independent testing laboratory, certifying that component parts perform

as specified. 1.9B SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION

A. Manufacturer’s installation instructions and guidelines. B. Manufacturer’s Owner Manual outlining recommended care and maintenance procedures.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Access floor system shall be as manufactured by Tate Access Floors, Inc. and shall consist of All Steel ____ access floor panels supported by a bolted stringer understructure system.

B. Alternative products shall meet or exceed all requirements as indicated herein and must

receive prior written approval by the architect or designer.


C. Access floor manufacture shall be ISO9001: 2000 certified demonstrating it has a robust and well documented quality management system with continuous improvement goals and strategies.

D. Access floor manufacturer’s facilities shall be ISO14001:2004 certified

demonstrating that they maintain an environmental management system. 2.2 SUPPORT COMPONENTS

Pedestals:

A. Pedestal assemblies shall be corrosive resistant, all steel welded construction, and shall provide an adjustment range of +/- 1” for finished floor heights 6” or greater. Zinc electroplating shall be prohibited on all pedestal components, including head plate, threaded rod, adjustment nut, pedestal tube, base plate, and all fasteners.

B. Pedestal assemblies shall provide a means of leveling and locking the assembly at a

selected height, which requires deliberate action to change height setting and prevents vibration displacement.

C. Hot dip galvanized steel pedestal head shall be welded to a threaded rod that

includes a specially designed adjusting nut. The nut shall provide location lugs to engage the pedestal base assembly, such that deliberate action is required to change the height setting.

D. Threaded rod shall provide a specially designed anti-rotation device, such that when

the head assembly is engaged in the base assembly, the head cannot freely rotate (for FFH of 6” or greater). Note: This prevents the assembly from inadvertently losing its leveling adjustment when panels are removed from the installation during use.

E. Hot dip galvanized pedestal base assembly shall consist of a formed steel plate with

no less than 16 inches of bearing area, welded to a 7/8” square steel tube and shall be designed to engage the head assembly.

Stringer:

A. Stringers shall support each edge of panel.

B. Stringer shall have conductive galvannealed coating. Zinc electroplating shall be

prohibited on stringers and stringer fasteners.

C. Stringers shall be individually and rigidly fastened to the pedestal with one machine screw for each foot of stringer length. Bolts shall provide positive electrical contact between the stringers and pedestals. Connections depending on gravity or spring action are unacceptable.

D. Stringer grid shall be 4’ stringers in a basketweave configuration ensuring maximum

lateral stability in all directions. (Also available in 2’ x 4’ and 2’ x 2’ grid patterns).

2.3 PANEL COMPONENTS


Floor Panels:

A. Panels shall consist of a top steel sheet welded to a formed steel bottom pan. Mechanical or adhesive methods for attachment of the steel top and bottom sheets are unacceptable.

B. Floor panels shall be protected from corrosion by electro-deposited epoxy paint. The use of

zinc electroplating shall be prohibited. C. Perforated Airflow Panels: Perforated steel airflow panels designed for static loads of 1000

lbs. shall be interchangeable with standard field panels and shall have 25% open surface area with the following air distribution capability:

1. Panel without damper: 746 cfm at 0.1-inch of H2O (static pressure). 2. Panel with damper at 100% open position: 515 cfm at 0.1-inch of H2O (static

pressure).

D. GrateAire Panels: Die cast aluminum grate panels designed for static and rolling loads shall be interchangeable with standard field panels. Grate panels shall have 56% open area with the following air distribution capability without a damper: 2096 cfm at 0.1-inch of H2O (static pressure). Grate panels shall have the following load bearing capacities:

1. Design Load: Panel supported on actual understructure shall be capable of supporting

a safe working or design load of 1000 lbs. placed on a one square inch area, using a round or square indentor, at any location on the panel without yielding.

2. Uniform load: 250 lbs./ft.2 3. Safety Factor: (2) Times Design Load 4. Rolling Load: Grate panel and supporting understructure shall be able to withstand

the following rolling loads at any location on the panel without developing a local and overall surface deformation greater than 0.040 inches. Note: wheel 1 and wheel 2 tests shall be performed on two separate panels. Wheel 1: Size: 3” dia x 1 13/16” wide Load: 1000 lbs. Passes: 10 Wheel 2: Size: 6” dia x 2” wide Load: 800 lbs. Passes: 10,000

5. Impact load: 100 lbs.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. UL listed Power, Voice & Data Servicenters shall be provided in locations as detailed on the contract drawings. High capacity 11 ¼ inch square PVD Servicenters shall be capable of accommodating four duplex receptacles, three knockouts for standard voice/data faceplates or Tate voice/data interface plates (or grommeted interface plates). Standard capacity 7-5/16 by 6-15/16 inch PVD Servicenters shall be capable of accommodating two duplex receptacles and two Tate voice/data interface plates (or grommeted interface plates). The service outlet box shall be a drop-in design having a hinged Lexan lid with carpet insert and Lexan frame with tapered edge. Service outlet box shall be capable of withstanding without failure a load of 800 lb.

B. Provide manufacturer’s standard steps, fascia plate, perimeter support, and grommets where

indicated on the contract drawings.

C. Provide __________ spare floor panels and __________ square feet of understructure systems for each type used in the project for maintenance stock. Deliver to project in manufacturer’s standard packaging clearly marked with the contents.


D. Provide _________ panel lifting devices.

E. When applicable provide manufacturer’s standard underfloor air systems components (including, grilles, diffusers and perforated floor panels) where indicated on the contract drawings.

2.5 FINISHES

A. Finish the surface of floor panels with floor covering material as indicated on the

contract drawings. Where floor coverings are by the access floor manufacturer, the type, color and pattern shall be selected from manufacturer’s standard. All areas to be furnished with laminated floor panels must be maintained at ambient temperature between 50° to 90° F and at relative humidity level between 20% to 80% and shall remain within these ranges through installation and occupancy.

B. High-pressure laminate floor covering shall meet requirements of NEMA LD3, and

shall conform to one of the following grades: Grade HDH (1/8”/ 3.0mm) or Grade HDM (1/16”/ 1.5mm).

C. High-pressure laminate floor coverings shall have an edge condition that is integral

to the tile. Separate edge trim pieces are not acceptable.

D. All other tile coverings that require trim edge shall be applied to the panel’s top surface and shall not wrap around the panel’s edge.

E. Surface to Ground Resistance of Standard High Pressure Anti-Static Laminate

Covering: Average test values shall be within the range of 1,000,000 ohms (1.0 x 106) to 20,000 megaohms (2.0 x 1010 ohms), as determined by testing in accordance with the test method for conductive flooring specified in Chapter 3 of NFPA 99, but modified to place one electrode on the floor surface and to attach one electrode to the understructure. Resistance shall be tested at 500 volts.

F. Surface to Ground Resistance of Conductive Laminate Covering: Not less than

25,000 ohms (2.5 x 104), nor more than 1,000,000 ohms (1.0 x 106), as determined by testing in accordance with the test method for conductive flooring specified in Chapter 3 of NFPA 99, but modified to place one electrode on the floor surface and to attach one electrode to the understructure. Resistance shall be tested at 500 volts.

2.6 FABRICATION TOLERANCES

A. Floor panel flatness measured on a diagonal: +/- 0.035” B. Floor panel flatness measured along edges: +/- 0.025” C. Floor panel width or length of required size: +/- 0.010” D. Floor panel squareness tolerance: +/- 0.015”

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPERATION

A. Examine structural subfloor for unevenness, irregularities and dampness that would

affect the quality and execution of the work. Do not proceed with installation until structural floor surfaces are level, clean, and dry as completed by others.


B. Concrete sealers, if used, shall be identified and proven to be compatible with pedestal

adhesive. Verify that adhesive achieves bond to slab before commencing work. C. Verify dimensions on contract drawings, including level of interfaces including abutting

floor, ledges and doorsills.

D. The General Contractor shall provide clear access, dry subfloor area free of construction debris and other trades throughout installation of access floor system.

A. Area to receive and store access floor materials shall be enclosed and maintained at ambient

temperatures between 35° to 95° F and relative humidity levels between 20 to 80%. At least 24 hrs. before installation begins, all floor panels shall be stored at ambient temperatures between 50° to 90° F and relative humidity levels between 20% to 80% and shall remain within these environmental limits throughout occupancy.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Pedestal locations shall be established from approved shop drawings so that mechanical and electrical work can be installed without interfering with pedestal installation.

B. Installation of access floor shall be coordinated with other trades to maintain the integrity of

the installed system. All traffic on access floor shall be controlled by access floor installer. No traffic but that of access floor installers shall be permitted on any floor area for 24 hours to allow the pedestal adhesive to set. Access floor panels shall not be removed by other trades for 72 hours after their installation.

C. Floor system and accessories shall be installed under the supervision of the manufacturer’s

authorized representative and according to manufacturer’s recommendations. D. No dust or debris producing operations by other trades shall be allowed in areas where

access floor is being installed to ensure proper bonding of pedestals to subfloor. E. Access floor installer shall keep the subfloor broom clean as installation progresses. F. Partially complete floors shall be braced against shifting to maintain the integrity of the

installed system where required. G. Additional pedestals as needed shall support panels where floor is disrupted by columns,

walls, and cutouts. H. Understructure shall be aligned such that all uncut panels are interchangeable and fit snugly

but do not bind when placed in alternate positions. I. Finished floor shall be level, not varying more than 0.062” in 10 feet or 0.125” overall.

J. Acceptance: General contractor shall accept floor in whole or in part prior to allowing use

by other trades.

END OF SECTION

EUA 4-6-12 09 91 00 -1 Painting and Coating

SECTION 09 90 00

PAINTING AND COATING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 CONDITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS

A. The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 – General Requirements apply.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES Specifier Note: Delete items below that are not included in this section.

A. Exterior painting.

B. Interior painting.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS Specifier Note: The following sections are examples only. Add to or subtract from this list to suit specific project.

A. Section 05 12 00 - Structural Steel: Shop priming of metal substrates for field finishing.

B. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Shop priming of metal substrates for field finishing.

C. Section 06 20 00- Finish Carpentry: Shop priming of wood substrates for field finishing.

D. Section 08 52 00 - Wood Windows: Factory priming of wood windows for field finishing.

1.4 REFERENCES Specifier Note: Edit this article after editing Part 2. Retain only those references that remain in the edited text.

A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. ASTM C840 - Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.

B. Master Painters Institute (MPI): Specifier Note: Indicate the date of issuance of the Approved Product List used as a reference in the specification.

1. Approved Product List, [http://www.paintinfo.com/].

1.5 DEFINITIONS Specifier Note: Retain definitions below that appear elsewhere in the section. Revise if other definitions are needed.

A. MPI Gloss and Sheen Levels:


Specifier Note: Refer to the MPI Approved Products List and ASTM C840 for levels of drywall finishing associated with the gloss and sheen levels indicated below.

1. Gloss Level 1 (Matte/Flat Finish): Gloss at 60 degrees - Maximum five (5) units; Sheen at 85 degrees - Maximum 10 units.

2. Gloss Level 2 (High Side Sheen Flat/Velvet-like Finish): Gloss at 60 degrees - Maximum 10 units; Sheen at 85 degrees - 10-35 units.

3. Gloss Level 3 (Eggshell-like Finish): Gloss at 60 degrees - 10-25 units; Sheen at 85 degrees - 10-35 units.

4. Gloss Level 4 (Satin-like Finish): Gloss at 60 degrees - 20-35 units; Sheen at 85 degrees - Minimum 35 units.

5. Gloss Level 5 (Traditional Semi-gloss): Gloss at 60 degrees - 35-70 units. 6. Gloss Level 6 (Traditional Gloss): Gloss at 60 degrees - 70-85 units. 7. Gloss Level 7 (High Gloss): Gloss at 60 degrees - More than 85 units.

1.6 SUBMITTALS Specifier Note: In this article, specify various types of data to be furnished by the contractor be-fore, during, or after construction. Topics included in this article are: product data, shop draw-ings, samples, design data, test reports, certificates, manufacturers’ instructions, manufacturers’ field reports, qualification statements, and closeout submittals.

A. Submit under provisions of Section [01 33 00] [______].

B. Product Data: Submit for each type of paint and coating product specified.

C. Samples: Submit two (2) sets of samples of each finish coat product specified for initial selection.

D. Samples: Submit two (2) sets of samples for each color and gloss of finish coat product specified for verification.

E. Product List: Submit a list of products keyed to the schedule in this section; include product data sheets for each product specified.

F. Manufacturer’s Certificates: Signed by manufacturer of painting and coating products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.

G. Warranty: Submit manufacturer’s standard warranty for painting and coating products.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE Specifier Note: In this article, describe qualifications, regulatory requirements, certifications, field samples, mock-ups, and pre-installation meetings.

A. Source Limitations: Obtain painting and coating products through one (1) source from a single manufacturer.

Specifier Note: Delete the following paragraph and subparagraphs if not required.

B. Mockups: Construct a mockup to verify finish selections and to serve as a standard for aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution.

Specifier Note: In the following subparagraph, retain one (1) of the two (2) options and delete the other.

1. Approved mockups [may] [may not] become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.



A. Deliver painting and coating materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened packaging.

B. Store and handle in strict compliance with manufacturer’s written instructions and recommendations.

C. Protect from damage due to weather, excessive temperature, and construction operations.


A. Apply paints and coatings only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are at temperatures recommended by manufacturer.

B. Do not apply paints and coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than five (5) degrees F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra paint and coating materials from the same production run as the materials applied. Package with protective covering for storage and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner.

B. Provide one (1) gallon of each paint and coating type specified in each color provided on the project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Glidden Professional and Devoe Coatings products manufactured by Akzo Nobel Paints, Strongsville, OH 44136; telephone: 800-984-5444; Web Site: www.gliddenprofessional.com

Specifier Note: Select either of the following two (2) paragraphs and delete the other.

B. Substitutions are not permitted.

C. Substitutions will be considered under provisions of Section 01 60 00.

2.2 PAINT MATERIALS - GENERAL

A. Provide block fillers, primers, and finish coat materials that are compatible with each other and with the substrates indicated.

B. Provide manufacturer's factory formulated paint material of the various coating types specified that are recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. Paint containers must display manufacturer's product identification.

C. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

http://www.gliddenprofessional.com/


2.3 EXTERIOR SURFACES A. Masonry - Poured or Pre-cast Concrete, Stucco, Brick B. Masonry - Concrete Block (CMU), Cinder Block, Split Face Block C. Masonry - Cementitious Siding, Flexboard, Transite and Shingles D. Masonry - Concrete Floors and Decking E. Wood - Siding, Trim, Shutters, Sash, Doors F. Wood - Rough Lumber, Shingles, Shakes and Plywood Siding (T-1-11) G. Wood - Decks H. Wood - Pressed Board, Hard Board, Particle Board, PVC Composition Trim Board I. Wood - Covered or Protected Flooring and Decking J. Metal - Structural Iron and Ferrous Steel (Including Tanks and Water Towers) K. Metal - Miscellaneous Ferrous Steel (Including Railings, Catwalks, Fire Escapes) L. Metal - Shop Primed Metal Doors, Trim, Panels and Miscellaneous Surfaces M. Metal - Non-Ferrous Galvanized, Aluminum, Copper N. Traffic and Handicap Marking (Miscellaneous Surfaces Including Concrete and As-

phalt)

2.4 INTERIOR SURFACES A. Drywall (Gypsum Board) B. Masonry - Concrete Block (CMU) C. Masonry - Plaster D. Masonry - Smooth Concrete, Unglazed Brick E. Masonry - Concrete Floors and Decking F. Acoustical Plaster, Acoustical Tile G. Wood - Wood Paneling, Wood Trim, Doors, Cabinets H. Wood - Wood Floors, Steps and Porches I. Metal - Unprimed Ferrous Metal J. Metal - Galvanized Metal K. Metal - Aluminum L. Metal - Shop Primed Ferrous Metal M. Metal - Handrails and Risers N. Metal - Flooring, Steps, and Catwalks O. Metal - Machinery, Equipment and Fixtures (Shop Primed) P. Metal - Decking (Ferrous Unprimed), Bar Joists (Unprimed) Q. Metal - Decking (Pre-Primed/Pre-Finished), Bar Joists (Shop Primed) R. Metal - Decking (Galvanized)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for painting and coating product application.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. General


1. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

2. Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. Allow unseasoned or shiny new wood to weather three months before staining.

3. Mix and prepare paint in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Stir paint thoroughly before applying and frequently during application to maintain color consistency.

B. Masonry - Smooth Concrete, Poured or Pre-cast Concrete, Stucco, Brick: Cure at least 30 days before painting. pH must be 10.0 or lower. Surfaces must be sound, clean, dry, free of oil, grease, curing agents or sealers, efflorescence, loose aggregate and other foreign matter. Roughen slick poured or precast concrete and remove sealers by chemical cleaning or abrasive method such as sandsweeping. Rinse thoroughly with water and allow to dry.

C. Masonry - Concrete Block (CMU), Cinder Block, Split Face Block: Mortar joints must be allowed to cure at least 30 days before painting. Surfaces must be sound, clean, dry, free of oil, grease, efflorescence, loose aggregate and other foreign matter. Remove efflorescence by washing surface with a diluted solution of muriatic acid and water. Follow acid manufacturer's application and safety instructions. Rinse thoroughly and allow to dry. If this is not practical, dry brush efflorescence off the surface prior to painting. In all cases, investigate and eliminate the source of moisture causing the development of efflorescence.

D. Masonry - Plaster: Cure at least 30 days before painting. pH must be 10.0 or lower. All scratches, cracks and abrasions in plaster surfaces and openings adjoining trim shall be cut out as required then filled with a spackling compound or approved patching plaster flush with adjoining surface. When dry, sand smooth and seal before application of the prime coat. Sand walls smooth and dust walls with a damp sponge to remove sanding dust. After application of the first coat, all suction spots or "hot spots" in plaster shall be touched up before the second coat is applied.

E. Drywall (Gypsum Board): Must be free of sanding dust and joint treatment cement must be thoroughly dry. Steel corner beadings should be primed with the appropriate metal primer before applying waterborne or latex coatings.

F. Wood - Exterior: Prime and paint as soon as possible. Countersink nail heads. Caulk nail heads and joints or cracks with a latex-type caulk. Seal all knots and sap streaks. Wood with a mill glaze (slick, shiny appearance) must be scuffed or weathered and pressure washed before finishing. Sand rough areas and wipe clean. Prime entire surface with exterior wood primer.

G. Wood - Pressed Board, Hard Board, Particle Board, PVC Composition Trim Board: Prime entire surface and all edges with the primer specified. Caulk with a latex-type caulk after priming.

H. Wood - Decks: Remove grade stamps or pencil marks by light sanding. Wood with a mill glaze (slick, shiny appearance) must be scuffed or weathered and pressure washed before finishing. Pressure-treated wood must be properly seasoned, dry and free of salts and other water soluble materials prior to finishing.


I. Wood - Interior: Sand lightly and remove sanding dust. Countersink nail heads and fill. On surfaces to be painted, prime entire surface as directed.

J. Ferrous Metal: Surfaces that exhibit mill scale, rust formation, etc., must be cleaned by hand scraping, wirebrushing, power-tool cleaning, or sandblasting. Best results are obtained over a surface sandblasted to at least a Commercial Blast (SSPC-SP6). Performance over hand or power tool cleaned surfaces is dependent on the degree of cleaning.

K. Non- Ferrous Metal, Galvanized, Aluminum, Copper: Solvent clean per SSPC-SP1 or clean with TSP or other appropriate cleaner followed by thorough water rinsing. If the surface has been treated with chromates or silicates, first clean by the method chosen and apply a test patch of the coating system specified. Allow product(s) to cure at least one week before testing adhesion per ASTM D3359 (tape Adhesion). Brush blast prior to painting if adhesion is poor.

L. Traffic and Handicap Marking (Miscellaneous Surfaces Including Concrete and Asphalt): All surfaces must be dry, clean, free of oil, grease and other foreign matter. Fresh bituminous (asphalt) surfaces should be allowed to weather a minimum of 30 days prior to application of markings. Check for bleeding prior to application. Concrete must cure for 30 days before striping. pH must be 10.0 or lower.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply painting and coating products in strict accordance with manufacturer's written installation instructions and recommendations.


A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded materials from project site.

B. Protect work of others, whether being painted or stained or not, against damage from painting and staining. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and painting or restaining as approved by Architect.

C. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect new finishes. After completing painting and staining operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work.

3.5 EXTERIOR SCHEDULE: Specifier Note: For each substrate, where available, a water-based coating system and a sol-vent-based coating system are listed. Select substrates, finishes and product type required for project; delete others.


A. Masonry - Poured or Pre-cast Concrete, Stucco, Brick: Specifier Note: Select as many of the following systems as applicable to a specific project and delete the others. 1. Flat / Satin / Semi-gloss / Gloss Paint Finish: a. Acrylic Latex – Premium Durability: 1) 1 coat 6001 HYDROSEALER Primer Sealer Primer or… 3010 Concrete Coatings Block Filler Interior/Exterior Primer (For uneven, porous or honey-combed surfaces) 2) 2 coats 6201V FORTIS 450 Exterior Flat Paint or... 6403V FORTIS 450 Exterior Satin Paint or... 6407V FORTIS 450 Exterior Semi-Gloss Paint or... 3028N ULTRA-HIDE 250 Interior/Exterior Gloss Paint b. Acrylic Latex – Durability: 1) 1 coat 6001 HYDROSEALER Primer Sealer or… 3010 Concrete Coatings Block Filler Interior/Exterior Primer (For uneven, porous or honey-combed surfaces) 2) 2 coats 2200V FORTIS 350 Exterior Flat Paint or... 2402V FORTIS 350 Exterior Satin Paint or... 2406V FORTIS 350 Exterior Semi-Gloss Paint or... 3028N ULTRA-HIDE 250 Interior/Exterior Gloss Paint c. Acrylic Latex – Productivity: 1) 1 coat 6001 HYDROSEALER Primer Sealer or… 3010 Concrete Coatings Block Filler Interior/Exterior Primer (For uneven, porous or honey-combed surfaces) 2) 2 coats 2210V ULTRA-HIDE 150 Exterior Flat Paint or... 2412V ULTRA-HIDE 150 Exterior Satin Paint or... 2416V ULTRA-HIDE 150 Exterior Semi-Gloss Paint or... 3038 ULTRA-HIDE 150 Interior/Exterior Gloss Paint 2. Elastomeric and Texture High Build Latex Coatings: a. Elastomeric Coatings: 1) 1 coat 6001 HYDROSEALER Primer Sealer or… 3010 Concrete Coatings Block Filler Interior/Exterior Primer (For uneven, porous or honey-combed surfaces) 2) 2 coats 2260 DECRA-FLEX 300 Exterior Elastomeric Coating Smooth or... 2270 DECRA-FLEX 300 Exterior Elastomeric Coating Fine (Sand Finish) or... 2290 DECRA-FLEX 300 Exterior Elastomeric Coating Coarse b. High Build Acrylic Coating

http://www.duspec.com/DuSpec2/document/DocumentDisplayController.htm?documentId=934817














http://www.duspec.com/datasheet/datasheet.pdf?documentFormat=pdf&systemSetId=21&productCode=GP+2210V&documentType=datasheet

http://www.duspec.com/DuSpec2/product/ProductDocumentSearchController.htm?documentFormat=pdf&systemSetId=21&productCode=GP+2412V&documentType=datasheet









1) 1 coat 6001 HYDROSEALER Primer Sealer or… 3010 Concrete Coatings Block Filler Interior/Exterior Primer (For uneven, porous or honey-combed surfaces) 2) 2 coats 2221 DECRA-FLEX 200 Exterior Elastomeric Coating Smooth b. Texture Coatings: 1) 1 coat 6001 HYDROSEALER Primer Sealer or… 3010 Concrete Coatings Block Filler Interior/Exterior Primer (For uneven, porous or honey-combed surfaces) 2) 2 coats 3230 Texture Coating –Interior/Exterior Flat Paint Sand Texture or… 3230 Texture Coating Interior/Exterior Flat Paint – Medium Texture or… 3230 Texture Coating Interior/Exterior Flat Paint – Coarse Texture Finish (return to “Exterior Surfaces”) B. Masonry - Concrete Block (CMU), Cinder Block, Split Face Block: Specifier Note: Select as many of the following systems as applicable to a specific project and delete the others. 1. Flat / Satin / Semi-gloss / Gloss Paint Finish: a. Acrylic Latex – Premium Durability: 1) 1 coat 3010 Concrete Coatings Block Filler Interior/Exterior Primer 2) 2 coats 6201V FORTIS 450 Exterior Flat Paint or... 6403V FORTIS 450 Exterior Satin Paint or... 6407V FORTIS 450 Exterior Semi-Gloss Paint or... 3028N ULTRA-HIDE 250 Interior/Exterior Gloss Paint b. Acrylic Latex – Durability: 1) 1 coat 3010 Concrete Coatings Block Filler Interior/Exterior Primer 2) 2 coats 2200V FORTIS 350 Exterior Flat Paint or... 2402V FORTIS 350 Exterior Satin Paint or... 2406V FORTIS 350 Exterior Semi-Gloss Paint or... 3028N ULTRA-HIDE 250 Interior/Exterior Gloss Paint c. Acrylic Latex – Productivity: 1) 1 coat 3010 Concrete Coatings Block Filler Interior/Exterior Primer (For uneven, porous or honey-combed surfaces) 2) 2 coats 2210V ULTRA-HIDE 150 Exterior Flat Paint or... 2412V ULTRA-HIDE 150 Exterior Satin Paint or... 2416V ULTRA-HIDE 150 Exterior Semi-Gloss Paint or... 3038 ULTRA-HIDE 150 Interior/Exterior Gloss Paint 2. Elastomeric and Texture High Build Latex Coatings: a. Elastomeric Coatings:

























1) 1 coat 3010 Concrete Coatings Block Filler Interior/Exterior Primer (For uneven, porous or honey-combed surfaces) 2) 2 coats 2260 DECRA-FLEX 300 Exterior Elastomeric Coating Smooth or... 2270 DECRA-FLEX 300 Exterior Elastomeric Coating Fine (Sand Finish) or... 2290 DECRA-FLEX 300 Exterior Elastomeric Coating Coarse b. High Build Acrylic Coating 1) 1 coat 3010 Concrete Coatings Block Filler Interior/Exterior Primer 2) 2 coats 2221 DECRA-FLEX 200 Exterior Elastomeric Coating Smooth b. Texture Coatings: 1) 1 coat 3010 Concrete Coatings Block Filler Interior/Exterior Primer 2) 2 coats 3230 Texture Coating –Interior/Exterior Flat Paint Sand Texture or… 3230 Texture Coating Interior/Exterior Flat Paint – Medium Texture or… 3230 Texture Coating Interior/Exterior Flat Paint – Coarse Texture Finish (return to “Exterior Surfaces”) C. Masonry - Cementitious Siding, Flexboard, Transite and Shingles: Specifier Note: Select as many of the following systems as applicable to a specific project and delete the others. 1. Flat / Satin / Semi-gloss / Gloss Paint Finish: a. Acrylic Latex – Premium Durability: 1) 1 coat 6001 HYDROSEALER Primer Sealer Primer 2) 2 coats 6201V FORTIS 450 Exterior Flat Paint or... 6403V FORTIS 450 Exterior Satin Paint or... 6407V FORTIS 450 Exterior Semi-Gloss Paint or... 3028N ULTRA-HIDE 250 Interior/Exterior Gloss Paint b. Acrylic Latex – Durability: 1) 1 coat 6001 HYDROSEALER Primer Sealer 2) 2 coats 2200V FORTIS 350 Exterior Flat Paint or... 2402V FORTIS 350 Exterior Satin Paint or... 2406V FORTIS 350 Exterior Semi-Gloss Paint or... 3028N ULTRA-HIDE 250 Interior/Exterior Gloss Paint c. Acrylic Latex – Productivity: 1) 1 coat 6001 HYDROSEALER Primer Sealer 2) 2 coats 2210V ULTRA-HIDE 150 Exterior Flat Paint or... 2412V ULTRA-HIDE 150 Exterior Satin Paint

























or... 2416V ULTRA-HIDE 150 Exterior Semi-Gloss Paint or... 3038 ULTRA-HIDE 150 Interior/Exterior Gloss Paint (return to “Exterior Surfaces”) D. Masonry - Concrete Floors and Decking: Specifier Note: Select as many of the following systems as applicable to a specific project and delete the others. 1. Satin / Gloss / Anti-Skid Finish / Stain / Clear: a. Solvent-Based Alkyd Gloss: 1) 2 coats 3118 Concrete Coatings Polyurethane Floor Enamel b. Acrylic Latex Satin (no hot tire exposure): 1) 2 coats 3018N Concrete Coatings Acrylic Floor Enamel c. Acrylic Latex Anti-Skid: 1) 1 coat 3111 Concrete Coatings Bond Enhancer (Dense Concrete) 2) 2 coats 3011 Concrete Coatings Anti-Skid Coating d. Acrylic Latex Solid Color Stain (garage floors): 1) 1 coat 3111 Concrete Coatings Bond Enhancer (Dense Concrete) 2) 2 coats 3610 Concrete Coatings Concrete Stain e. Acrylic Latex Clear: 1) 2 coats 3214 Concrete Coatings Clear Acrylic Sealer f. Solvent-Based Clear Siliconized Acrylic: 1) 2 coats 3708 Concrete Coatings Clear Siliconized Acrylic Sealer (return to “Exterior Surfaces”) E. Wood - Siding, Trim, Shutters, Sash, Doors: Specifier Note: Select as many of the following systems as applicable to a specific project and delete the others. 1. Flat / Satin / Semi-gloss / Gloss Paint Finish: a. Acrylic Latex – Premium Durability: 1) 1 coat 6001 HYDROSEALER Primer Sealer 2) 2 coats 6201V FORTIS 450 Exterior Flat Paint or... 6403V FORTIS 450 Exterior Satin Paint or... 6407V FORTIS 450 Exterior Semi-Gloss Paint or... 3028N ULTRA-HIDE 250 Interior/Exterior Gloss Paint b. Acrylic Latex – Durability: 1) 1 coat 6001 HYDROSEALER Primer Sealer 2) 2 coats 2200V FORTIS 350 Exterior Flat Paint or... 2402V FORTIS 350 Exterior Satin Paint or... 2406V FORTIS 350 Exterior Semi-Gloss Paint or... 3028N ULTRA-HIDE 250 Interior/Exterior Gloss Paint






















c. Acrylic Latex – Productivity: 1) 1 coat 6001 HYDROSEALER Primer Sealer 2) 2 coats 2210V ULTRA-HIDE 150 Exterior Flat Paint or... 2412V ULTRA-HIDE 150 Exterior Satin Paint or... 2416V ULTRA-HIDE 150 Exterior Semi-Gloss Paint or... 3038 ULTRA-HIDE 150 Interior/Exterior Gloss Paint (return to “Exterior Surfaces”) F. Wood - Rough Lumber, Shingles, Shakes and Plywood Siding (T-1-11): Specifier Note: Select as many of the following systems as applicable to a specific project and delete the others. 1. Solid Color Stain Finishes: a. Acrylic Latex Solid Color Stain: 1) 2 coats 2600 Wood Pride Water-Based Siding Solid Color Stain 2. Semi-Transparent Color Stain Finishes: a. Acrylic Latex Semi-Transparent Color Stain: 1) 2 coats FLD3X FLOOD TWF-Semi Semi-Transparent Wood Finish (return to “Exterior Surfaces”) G. Wood - Decks: Specifier Note: Select as many of the following systems as applicable to a specific project and delete the others. 1. Solid Color Stain Finishes: a. Acrylic Latex Solid Color Stain: 1) 2 coats FLD14X FLOOD SWF-Solid Solid Color Wood Finish 2. Semi-Transparent Color Stain Finishes: a. Acrylic Latex Semi-Transparent Color Stain: 1) 2 coats FLD3X FLOOD TWF-Semi Semi-Transparent Wood Finish 3. Waterborne Alkyd Natural Wood Tones Stain Finishes: a. Water-Based Alkyd Clear and Natural Wood Tones: 1) 2 coats FLD46X FLOOD CWF-UV5 Premium Wood Finish 4. Solventborne Natural Wood Tones Stain Finishes a. Solvent-Based Clear and Natural Wood Tones: 1) 2 coats FLD14X FLOOD CWF-UV5 Oil Premium Clear Oil Wood Finish (return to “Exterior Surfaces”) H. Wood - Pressed Board, Hard Board, Particle Board, PVC Composition Trim













Board: Specifier Note: Select as many of the following systems as applicable to a specific project and delete the others. 1. Flat / Satin / Semi-gloss / Gloss Paint Finish: a. Acrylic Latex – Premium Durability: 1) 1 coat 2110N Stain Stomper Exterior Primer/Sealer 2) 2 coats 6201V FORTIS 450 Exterior Flat Paint or... 6403V FORTIS 450 Exterior Satin Paint or... 6407V FORTIS 450 Exterior Semi-Gloss Paint or... 3028N ULTRA-HIDE 250 Interior/Exterior Gloss Paint b. Acrylic Latex - Durability: 1) 1 coat 2110N Stain Stomper Exterior Primer/Sealer 2) 2 coats 2200V FORTIS 350 Exterior Flat Paint or... 2402V FORTIS 350 Exterior Satin Paint or... 2406V FORTIS 350 Exterior Semi-Gloss Paint or... 3028N ULTRA-HIDE 250 Interior/Exterior Gloss Paint c. Acrylic Latex – Productivity: 1) 1 coat 2110N Stain Stomper Exterior Primer/Sealer 2) 2 coats 2210V ULTRA-HIDE 150 Exterior Flat Paint or... 2412V ULTRA-HIDE 150 Exterior Satin Paint or... 2416V ULTRA-HIDE 150 Exterior Semi-Gloss Paint or... 3038 ULTRA-HIDE 150 Interior/Exterior Gloss Paint (return to “Exterior Surfaces”) I. Wood - Covered or Protected Flooring and Decking: Specifier Note: Select as many of the following systems as applicable to a specific project and delete the others. 1. Satin / Gloss Finish: a. Solvent-Based Alkyd Gloss: 1) 2 coats 3118 Concrete Coatings Polyurethane Floor Enamel b. Acrylic Latex Satin (no hot tire exposure): 1) 2 coats 3018N Concrete Coatings Acrylic Floor Enamel (return to “Exterior Surfaces”) J. Metal - Structural Iron and Ferrous Steel (Including Tanks and Water Towers): Specifier Note: Select as many of the following systems as applicable to a specific project and delete the others. 1. Semi-Gloss / Gloss Paint Finish: a. Acrylic High Performance (low UV/Abrasion): 1) 1 coat 4020 DEVFLEX 4020PF Direct to Metal Primer & Flat Finish 2) 2 coats 4206 DEVFLEX 4206QD Quick Dry Interior/Exterior Waterborne Semi-Gloss Enamel or… 4208 DEVFLEX 4208QD Quick Dry Interior/Exterior Waterborne Gloss Enamel


















http://www.duspec.com/datasheet/datasheet.pdf?documentFormat=pdf&systemSetId=21&productCode=4020&documentType=datasheet




2. Semi-Gloss / Gloss Paint Finish: a. Urethane High Performance (high UV/Abrasion): 1) 1 coat 203 DEVRAN 203 Waterborne Epoxy Primer 2) 2 coats 378H DEVTHANE 378H Aliphatic Urethane Semi-Gloss Enamel or… 379H DEVTHANE 379H Aliphatic Urethane Gloss Enamel (return to “Exterior Surfaces”) K. Metal - Miscellaneous Ferrous Steel (Including Railings, Catwalks, Fire Escapes): Specifier Note: Select as many of the following systems as applicable to a specific project and delete the others. 1. Eggshell / Semi-Gloss / Gloss Paint Finish: a. Acrylic High Performance (low UV/Abrasion): 1) 1 coat 4020 DEVFLEX 4020PF Direct to Metal Primer & Flat Finish 2) 2 coats 4212 DEVFLEX 4212HP High Performance Waterborne Acrylic Eggshell Enamel or… 4216L DEVFLEX 4216HP High Performance Waterborne Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel or… 659 DEVFLEX 659 Gloss DTM Waterborne Acrylic Enamel b. Solvent-Based Alkyd High Performance (low UV/Abrasion): 1) 1 coat 4160 DEVGUARD 4160 Multi-Purpose Tank & Structural Primer 2) 2 coats 4306 DEVGUARD 4306 Rust Preventative Semi-Gloss Enamel or… 4308 DEVGUARD 4308 Alkyd Industrial Gloss Enamel c. Urethane High Performance (high UV/Abrasion): 1) 1 coat 203 DEVRAN 203 Waterborne Epoxy Primer 2) 2 coats 378H DEVTHANE 378H Aliphatic Urethane Semi-Gloss Enamel or… 379H DEVTHANE 379H Aliphatic Urethane Gloss Enamel (return to “Exterior Surfaces”) L. Metal - Shop Primed Metal Doors, Trim, Panels and Miscellaneous Surfaces: Specifier Note: Select as many of the following systems as applicable to a specific project and delete the others. 1. Eggshell / Semi-Gloss / Gloss Paint Finish: a. Water-Based Alkyd (protected exterior metal trim): 1) 1 coat 4020 DEVFLEX 4020PF Direct to Metal Primer & Flat Finish 2) 2 coats 1502 LIFEMASTER OIL Interior/Exterior Eggshell Paint


http://www.duspec.com/datasheet/datasheet.pdf?documentFormat=pdf&systemSetId=13&productCode=378H&documentType=datasheet



http://www.duspec.com/DuSpec2/product/ProductDocumentSearchController.htm?documentFormat=pdf&systemSetId=13&productCode=4212&documentType=datasheet&submit=Get+Document












or… 1506 LIFEMASTER OIL Interior/Exterior Semi-Gloss Paint or… 1508 LIFEMASTER OIL Interior/Exterior Gloss Paint b. Acrylic High Performance (low UV/Abrasion): 1) 1 coat 4020 DEVFLEX 4020PF Direct to Metal Primer & Flat Finish 2) 2 coats 4212 DEVFLEX 4212HP High Performance Waterborne Acrylic Eggshell Enamel or… 4216L DEVFLEX 4216HP High Performance Waterborne Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel or… 659 DEVFLEX 659 Gloss DTM Waterborne Acrylic Enamel c. Solvent-Based Alkyd High Performance (low UV/Abrasion): 1) 1 coat 4160 DEVGUARD 4160 Multi-Purpose Tank & Structural Primer 2) 2 coats 4306 DEVGUARD 4306 Rust Preventative Semi-Gloss Enamel or… 4308 DEVGUARD 4308 Alkyd Industrial Gloss Enamel d. Urethane High Performance (high UV/Abrasion): 1) 1 coat 203 DEVRAN 203 Waterborne Epoxy Primer 2) 2 coats 378H DEVTHANE 378H Aliphatic Urethane Semi-Gloss Enamel or… 379H DEVTHANE 379H Aliphatic Urethane Gloss Enamel (return to “Exterior Surfaces”) M. Metal - Non-Ferrous Galvanized, Aluminum, Copper: Specifier Note: Select as many of the following systems as applicable to a specific project and delete the others. 1. Eggshell / Semi-Gloss / Gloss Paint Finish: a. Water-Based Alkyd (protected exterior metal trim): 1) 1 coat 4020 DEVFLEX 4020PF Direct to Metal Primer & Flat Finish 2) 2 coats 1502 LIFEMASTER OIL Interior/Exterior Eggshell Paint or… 1506 LIFEMASTER OIL Interior/Exterior Semi-Gloss Paint or… 1508 LIFEMASTER OIL Interior/Exterior Gloss Paint b. Acrylic High Performance (low UV/Abrasion): 1) 1 coat 4020 DEVFLEX 4020PF Direct to Metal Primer & Flat Finish 2) 2 coats 4212 DEVFLEX 4212HP High Performance Waterborne Acrylic Eggshell Enamel or… 4216L DEVFLEX 4216HP High Performance Waterborne Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel





















or… 659 DEVFLEX 659 Gloss DTM Waterborne Acrylic Enamel c. Solvent-Based Alkyd High Performance (low UV/Abrasion): 1) 1 coat 4160 DEVGUARD 4160 Multi-Purpose Tank & Structural Primer 2) 2 coats 4306 DEVGUARD 4306 Rust Preventative Semi-Gloss Enamel or… 4308 DEVGUARD 4308 Alkyd Industrial Gloss Enamel d. Urethane High Performance (high UV/Abrasion): 1) 1 coat 203 DEVRAN 203 Waterborne Epoxy Primer 2) 2 coats 378H DEVTHANE 378H Aliphatic Urethane Semi-Gloss Enamel or… 379H DEVTHANE 379H Aliphatic Urethane Gloss Enamel (return to “Exterior Surfaces”) N. Traffic and Handicap Marking (Miscellaneous Surfaces Including Concrete and Asphalt): Specifier Note: Select as many of the following systems as applicable to a specific project and delete the others. 1. Flat Paint Finish: a. Acrylic Latex: 1) 1 coat 4800 TRAFFIC PAINT Water Reducible Acrylic b. Solvent-Based Alkyd: 1) 1 coat 4900 ZONE MARKING PAINT Alkyd (return to “Exterior Surfaces”)

END OF EXTERIOR SECTION 3.6 INTERIOR SCHEDULE: Specifier Note: For each substrate, where available, a water-based coating system and a sol-vent-based coating system are listed. Select substrates, finishes and product type required for project; delete others. A. Drywall (Gypsum Board): Specifier Note: Select as many of the following systems as applicable to a specific project and delete the others. 1. Flat / Eggshell / Lo-Lustre / Semi-gloss / Gloss Finish: a. Acrylic Latex – Premium Durability 1) 1 coat 1000 High Hide Interior Primer Sealer 2) 2 coats 7100 DIAMOND 450 Interior Matte Paint or… 7200 DIAMOND 450 Interior Eggshell Paint or… 7300 DIAMOND 450 Interior Lo Lustre Paint or… 7400 DIAMOND 450 Interior Semi-Gloss Paint b. Acrylic Latex – Durability 1) 1 coat 1000 High Hide Interior Primer Sealer










http://www.duspec.com/DuSpec2/product/ProductDocumentSearchController.htm?documentFormat=pdf&systemSetId=21&productCode=GP+1000&documentType=datasheet







2) 2 coats 1201V DIAMOND 350 Interior Flat Paint or... 1403V DIAMOND 350 Interior Eggshell Paint or... 1407V DIAMOND 350 Interior Semi-Gloss Paint c. Acrylic Latex - No VOC/Low Odor: 1) 1 coat 9116 PREP & PRIME Odor-Less Primer-Sealer 2) 2 coats 9100N LIFEMASTER No VOC Interior Flat Paint or… 9300 LIFEMASTER No VOC Interior Eggshell Paint or… 9200N LIFEMASTER No VOC Semi-Gloss Paint or… 9400 LIFEMASTER No VOC Interior Gloss Paint d. Acrylic Latex - Productivity 1) 1 coat 1030 PVA Wall Interior Primer Sealer 2) 2 coats 1200N ULTRA-HIDE 250 Interior Latex Flat Paint or... 1402N ULTRA-HIDE 250 Interior Eggshell Paint or... 1406N ULTRA-HIDE 250 Interior Semi-Gloss Paint or... 3028N ULTRA-HIDE 250 Interior/Exterior Gloss Paint e. Latex - Productivity 1) 1 coat 1030 PVA Wall Interior Primer Sealer 2) 2 coats 1210V ULTRA-HIDE 150 Interior Flat Paint or… 1412V ULTRA-HIDE 150 Interior Eggshell Paint or… 1433V ULTRA-HIDE 150 Interior Lo Lustre Paint or… 1416V ULTRA-HIDE 150 Interior Semi-Gloss Paint or… 3038 ULTRA-HIDE 150 Interior/Exterior Gloss Paint f. Solvent-Based Alkyd: 1) 1 coat 1000 High Hide Interior Primer Sealer 2) 2 coats 1310 Alkyd Final Sealer Flat or… 1512 Alkyd Eggshell Interior Paint or... 1507 Alkyd Semi-Gloss Interior Paint g. Water-Based Alkyd: 1) 1 coat 1000 High Hide Interior Primer Sealer 2) 2 coats 1502 LIFEMASTER OIL Interior/Exterior Eggshell Paint or… 1506 LIFEMASTER OIL Interior/Exterior Semi-Gloss Paint or… 1508 LIFEMASTER OIL Interior/Exterior Gloss Paint h. Acrylic High Performance: 1) 1 coat 1000 High Hide Interior Primer Sealer 2) 2 coats 4020 DEVFLEX 4020PF Direct to Metal Primer & Flat Finish or... 4212 DEVFLEX 4212HP High Performance Waterborne Acrylic Eggshell Enamel or… 4216L DEVFLEX 4216HP High Performance Waterborne Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel or… 659 DEVFLEX 659 Gloss DTM Waterborne Acrylic Enamel

http://duspec.com/DuSpec2/document/DocumentDisplayController.htm?documentId=933658




http://www.duspec.com/DuSpec2/product/ProductDocumentSearchController.htm?documentFormat=pdf&systemSetId=21&productCode=GP+9100N&documentType=datasheet





























i. Water-Based Epoxy Coatings (HIPAC): 1) 1 coat 1000 High Hide Interior Primer Sealer 2) 2 coats 4426 TRU-GLAZE-WB 4426 Waterborne Epoxy Semi-Gloss Coating or... 4428 TRU-GLAZE-WB 4428 Waterborne Epoxy Gloss Coating j. Solvent-Based Epoxy Coatings (Chemical/Moisture Resistant): 1) 1 coat 1000 High Hide Interior Primer Sealer 2) 2 coats 224HS DEVRAN 224HS Semi-Gloss Epoxy High Build Coating or... 4508H TRU-GLAZE 4508 Gloss Epoxy Coating (return to “Interior Surfaces”) B. Masonry - Concrete Block (CMU): Specifier Note: Select as many of the following systems as applicable to a specific project and delete the others. 1. Flat / Eggshell / Lo Lustre / Semi-gloss / Gloss Finish: a. Acrylic Latex – Premium Durability: 1) 1 coat 3010 Concrete Coatings Block Filler Interior/Exterior Primer 2 coats 7100 DIAMOND 450 Interior Matte Paint or… 7200 DIAMOND 450 Interior Eggshell Paint or… 7300 DIAMOND 450 Interior Lo Lustre Paint or… 7400 DIAMOND 450 Interior Semi-Gloss Paint b. Acrylic Latex – Durability 1) 1 coat 3010 Concrete Coatings Block Filler Interior/Exterior Primer 2) 2 coats 1201V DIAMOND 350 Interior Flat Paint or... 1403V DIAMOND 350 Interior Eggshell Paint or... 1407V DIAMOND 350 Interior Semi-Gloss Paint c. Acrylic Latex - No VOC/Low Odor: 1) 1 coat 3010 Concrete Coatings Block Filler Interior/Exterior Primer 2) 2 coats 9100N LIFEMASTER No VOC Interior Flat Paint or… 9300 LIFEMASTER No VOC Interior Eggshell Paint or… 9200N LIFEMASTER No VOC Semi-Gloss Paint or… 9400 LIFEMASTER No VOC Interior Gloss Paint d. Acrylic Latex - Productivity: 1) 1 coat 3010 Concrete Coatings Block Filler Interior/Exterior Primer 2) 2 coats 1200N ULTRA-HIDE 250 Interior Latex Flat Paint or... 1402N ULTRA-HIDE 250 Interior Eggshell Paint or... 1406N ULTRA-HIDE 250 Interior Semi-Gloss Paint or... 3028N ULTRA-HIDE 250 Interior/Exterior Gloss Paint





http://www.duspec.com/datasheet/datasheet.pdf?documentFormat=pdf&systemSetId=13&productCode=224HS&documentType=datasheet






















e. Latex - Productivity: 1) 1 coat 3010 Concrete Coatings Block Filler Interior/Exterior Primer 2) 2 coats 1210V ULTRA-HIDE 150 Interior Flat Paint or… 1412V ULTRA-HIDE 150 Interior Eggshell Paint or… 1433V ULTRA-HIDE 150 Interior Lo Lustre Paint or… 1416V ULTRA-HIDE 150 Interior Semi-Gloss Paint or… 3038 ULTRA-HIDE 150 Interior/Exterior Gloss Paint f. Solvent-Based Alkyd: 1) 1 coat 3010 Concrete Coatings Block Filler Interior/Exterior Primer 2) 1 coat 1000 High Hide Interior Primer Sealer 3) 2 coats 1310 Alkyd Final Sealer Flat or… 1512 Alkyd Eggshell Interior Paint or... 1507 Alkyd Semi-Gloss Interior Paint g. Water-Based Alkyd: 1) 1 coat 3010 Concrete Coatings Block Filler Interior/Exterior Primer 2) 2 coats 1502 LIFEMASTER OIL Interior/Exterior Eggshell Paint or… 1506 LIFEMASTER OIL Interior/Exterior Semi-Gloss Paint or… 1508 LIFEMASTER OIL Interior/Exterior Gloss Paint h. Acrylic High Performance: 1) 1 coat 4000 BLOXFIL 4000 Interior/Exterior Heavy Duty Acrylic Block Filler 2) 2 coats 4020 DEVFLEX 4020PF Direct to Metal Primer & Flat Finish or... 4212 DEVFLEX 4212HP High Performance Waterborne Acrylic Eggshell Enamel or… 4216L DEVFLEX 4216HP High Performance Waterborne Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel or… 659 DEVFLEX 659 Gloss DTM Waterborne Acrylic Enamel i. Water-Based Epoxy Coatings (HIPAC): 1) 1 coat 4000 BLOXFIL 4000 Interior/Exterior Heavy Duty Acrylic Block Filler 2) 2 coats 4426 TRU-GLAZE-WB 4426 Waterborne Epoxy Semi-Gloss Coating or... 4428 TRU-GLAZE-WB 4428 Waterborne Epoxy Gloss Coating j. Solvent-Based Epoxy Coatings (Chemical/Moisture Resistant): 1) 1 coat 4000 BLOXFIL 4000 Interior/Exterior Heavy Duty Acrylic Block Filler 2) 2 coats 224HS DEVRAN 224HS Semi-Gloss Epoxy High Build Coating



























or... 4508H TRU-GLAZE 4508 Gloss Epoxy Coating (return to “Interior Surfaces”) C. Masonry - Plaster: Specifier Note: Select as many of the following systems as applicable to a specific project and delete the others. 1. Flat / Eggshell / Lo Lustre / Semi-gloss / Gloss Finish: a. Acrylic Latex – Premium Durability 1) 1 coat 3210 GRIPPER Interior/Exterior Primer Sealer 2) 2 coats 7100 DIAMOND 450 Interior Matte Paint or… 7200 DIAMOND 450 Interior Eggshell Paint or… 7300 DIAMOND 450 Interior Lo Lustre Paint or… 7400 DIAMOND 450 Interior Semi-Gloss Paint b. Acrylic Latex – Durability 1) 1 coat 3210 GRIPPER Interior/Exterior Primer Sealer 2) 2 coats 1201V DIAMOND 350 Interior Flat Paint or... 1403V DIAMOND 350 Interior Eggshell Paint or... 1407V DIAMOND 350 Interior Semi-Gloss Paint c. Acrylic Latex - No VOC/Low Odor: 1) 1 coat 9116 PREP & PRIME Odor-Less Primer-Sealer 2) 2 coats 9100N LIFEMASTER No VOC Interior Flat Paint or… 9300 LIFEMASTER No VOC Interior Eggshell Paint or… 9200N LIFEMASTER No VOC Semi-Gloss Paint or… 9400 LIFEMASTER No VOC Interior Gloss Paint d. Acrylic Latex - Productivity 1) 1 coat 3210 GRIPPER Interior/Exterior Primer Sealer 2) 2 coats 1200N ULTRA-HIDE 250 Interior Latex Flat Paint or... 1402N ULTRA-HIDE 250 Interior Eggshell Paint or... 1406N ULTRA-HIDE 250 Interior Semi-Gloss Paint or... 3028N ULTRA-HIDE 250 Interior/Exterior Gloss Paint e. Latex - Productivity 1) 1 coat 3210 GRIPPER Interior/Exterior Primer Sealer 2) 2 coats 1210V ULTRA-HIDE 150 Interior Flat Paint or… 1412V ULTRA-HIDE 150 Interior Eggshell Paint or… 1433V ULTRA-HIDE 150 Interior Lo Lustre Paint or… 1416V ULTRA-HIDE 150 Interior Semi-Gloss Paint or… 3038 ULTRA-HIDE 150 Interior/Exterior Gloss Paint f. Solvent-Based Alkyd: 1) 1 coat 3210 GRIPPER Interior/Exterior Primer Sealer 2) 2 coats 1310 Alkyd Final Sealer or… 1512 Alkyd Eggshell Interior Paint or... 1507 Alkyd Semi-Gloss Interior Paint g. Water-Based Alkyd: 1) 1 coat 3210 GRIPPER Interior/Exterior Primer Sealer 2) 2 coats 1502 LIFEMASTER OIL Interior/Exterior Eggshell


































or… 1506 LIFEMASTER OIL Interior/Exterior Semi-Gloss Paint or… 1508 LIFEMASTER OIL Interior/Exterior Gloss Paint h. Acrylic High Performance: 1) 1 coat 3210 GRIPPER Interior/Exterior Primer Sealer 2) 2 coats 4020 DEVFLEX 4020PF Direct to Metal Primer & Flat Finish or... 4212 DEVFLEX 4212HP High Performance Waterborne Acrylic Eggshell Enamel or… 4216L DEVFLEX 4216HP High Performance Waterborne Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel or… 659 DEVFLEX 659 Gloss DTM Waterborne Acrylic Enamel i. Water-Based Epoxy Coatings (HIPAC): 1) 2 coats 4426 TRU-GLAZE-WB 4426 Waterborne Epoxy Semi-Gloss Coating or... 4428 TRU-GLAZE-WB 4428 Waterborne Epoxy Gloss Coating j. Solvent-Based Epoxy Coatings (Chemical/Moisture Resistant): 1) 2 coats 224HS DEVRAN 224HS Semi-Gloss Epoxy High Build Coating or... 4508H TRU-GLAZE 4508 Gloss Epoxy Coating (return to “Interior Surfaces”) D. Masonry - Smooth Concrete, Unglazed Brick: Specifier Note: Select as many of the following systems as applicable to a specific project and delete the others. 1. Flat / Eggshell / Lo Lustre / Semi-gloss / Gloss Finish: a. Acrylic Latex – Premium Durability: 1) 1 coat 3030 Concrete Coatings Bond-Prep Pigmented Bonding Primer 2) 2 coats 7100 DIAMOND 450 Interior Matte Paint or… 7200 DIAMOND 450 Interior Eggshell Paint or… 7300 DIAMOND 450 Interior Lo Lustre Paint or… 7400 DIAMOND 450 Interior Semi-Gloss Paint b. Acrylic Latex – Durability 1) 1 coat 3030 Concrete Coatings Bond-Prep Pigmented Bonding Primer 2) 2 coats 1201V DIAMOND 350 Interior Flat Paint or... 1403V DIAMOND 350 Interior Eggshell Paint or... 1407V DIAMOND 350 Interior Semi-Gloss Paint c. Acrylic Latex - No VOC/Low Odor: 1) 1 coat 9116 PREP & PRIME Odor-Less Primer-Sealer 2) 2 coats 9100N LIFEMASTER No VOC Interior Flat Paint
























or… 9300 LIFEMASTER No VOC Interior Eggshell Paint or… 9200N LIFEMASTER No VOC Semi-Gloss Paint or… 9400 LIFEMASTER No VOC Interior Gloss Paint d. Acrylic Latex - Productivity 1) 1 coat 3030 Concrete Coatings Bond-Prep Pigmented Bonding Primer 2) 2 coats 1200N ULTRA-HIDE 250 Interior Latex Flat Paint or... 1402N ULTRA-HIDE 250 Interior Eggshell Paint or... 1406N ULTRA-HIDE 250 Interior Semi-Gloss Paint or... 3028N ULTRA-HIDE 250 Interior/Exterior Gloss Paint e. Latex - Productivity 1) 1 coat 3030 Concrete Coatings Bond-Prep Pigmented Bonding Primer 2) 2 coats 1210V ULTRA-HIDE 150 Interior Flat Paint or… 1412V ULTRA-HIDE 150 Interior Eggshell Paint or… 1433V ULTRA-HIDE 150 Interior Lo Lustre Paint or… 1416V ULTRA-HIDE 150 Interior Semi-Gloss Paint or… 3038 ULTRA-HIDE 150 Interior/Exterior Gloss Paint f. Solvent-Based Alkyd: 1) 1 coat 3210 GRIPPER Interior/Exterior Primer Sealer 2) 2 coats 1310 Alkyd Final Sealer or… 1512 Alkyd Eggshell Interior Paint or... 1507 Alkyd Semi-Gloss Interior Paint g. Water-Based Alkyd: 1) 1 coat 3210 GRIPPER Interior/Exterior Primer Sealer 2) 2 coats 1502 LIFEMASTER OIL Interior/Exterior Eggshell or… 1506 LIFEMASTER OIL Interior/Exterior Semi-Gloss Paint or… 1508 LIFEMASTER OIL Interior/Exterior Gloss Paint h. Acrylic High Performance: 1) 1 coat 3030 Concrete Coatings Bond-Prep Pigmented Bonding Primer 2) 2 coats 4020 DEVFLEX 4020PF Direct to Metal Primer & Flat Finish or... 4212 DEVFLEX 4212HP High Performance Waterborne Acrylic Eggshell Enamel or… 4216L DEVFLEX 4216HP High Performance Waterborne Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel or… 659 DEVFLEX 659 Gloss DTM Waterborne Acrylic Enamel i. Water-Based Epoxy Coatings (HIPAC): 1) 2 coats 4426 TRU-GLAZE-WB 4426 Waterborne Epoxy Semi-Gloss Coating or... 4428 TRU-GLAZE-WB 4428 Waterborne Epoxy































Gloss Coating j. Solvent-Based Epoxy Coatings (Chemical/Moisture Resistant): 1) 2 coats 224HS DEVRAN 224HS Semi-Gloss Epoxy High Build Coating or... 4508H TRU-GLAZE 4508 Gloss Epoxy Coating (return to “Interior Surfaces”) E. Masonry - Concrete Floors and Decking: Specifier Note: Select as many of the following systems as applicable to a specific project and delete the others. 1. Satin / Semi-Gloss / Gloss Finish: a. Solvent-Based Alkyd Gloss: 1) 2 coats 3118 Concrete Coatings Polyurethane Floor Enamel (Add Skid-Tex for non-skid surface) b. Acrylic Latex Satin (no hot tire exposure): 1) 2 coats 3018N Concrete Coatings Acrylic Floor Enamel (Add Skid-Tex for non-skid surface) c. Water-Based Epoxy Coatings (HIPAC): 1) 2 coats 4426 TRU-GLAZE-WB 4426 Waterborne Epoxy Semi-Gloss Coating or... 4428 TRU-GLAZE-WB 4428 Waterborne Epoxy Gloss Coating (Add Skid-Tex for non-skid surface) d. 1) 2 coats 224HS DEVRAN 224HS Semi-Gloss Epoxy High Build Coating or... 4508H TRU-GLAZE 4508 Gloss Epoxy Coating (Add Skid-Tex for non-skid surface) (return to “Interior Surfaces”) F. Acoustical Plaster, Acoustical Tile: Specifier Note: Select as many of the following systems as applicable to a specific project and delete the others. 1. Flat Finish: a. Acrylic Latex - No VOC/Low Odor: 1) 1 coat 9100N LIFEMASTER No VOC Interior Flat Paint b. Acrylic Latex: 1) 1 coat: 1200N ULTRA-HIDE 250 Interior Latex Flat Paint c. Latex: 1) 1 coat 1210V ULTRA-HIDE 150 Interior Flat Paint d. Water-Based Acrylic Dryfall: 1) 1 coat 1280 Waterborne Interior Flat Dry Fall (return to “Interior Surfaces”) G. Wood - Wood Paneling, Wood Trim, Doors, Cabinets: Specifier Note: Select as many of the following systems as applicable to a specific project and delete the others. 1. Stained and Varnished Satin / Gloss Finish:














a. Water-Based Varnish: 1) 1 coat 1700 WOOD PRIDE Oil-Based Wood Stain 2) 2 coats 1802 WOOD PRIDE Water-Based Satin Varnish or… 1808 WOOD PRIDE Water-Based Gloss Varnish b. Solvent-Based Polyurethane Varnish: 1) 1 coat 1700 WOOD PRIDE Oil-Based Wood Stain 2) 2 coats 1902 WOOD PRIDE Polyurethane Satin Varnish or… 1908 WOOD PRIDE Polyurethane Gloss Varnish 2. Clear Satin / Gloss Finish: a. Water-Based Varnish: 1) 1 coat 1808 WOOD PRIDE Water-Based Gloss Varnish 2) 2 coats 1802 WOOD PRIDE Water-Based Satin Varnish or… 1808 WOOD PRIDE Water-Based Gloss Varnish b. Solvent-Based Polyurethane Varnish: 1) 1 coat 1908 WOOD PRIDE Polyurethane Gloss Varnish 2) 2 coats 1902 WOOD PRIDE Polyurethane Satin Varnish or… 1908 WOOD PRIDE Polyurethane Gloss Varnish 3. Opaque Eggshell / Lo Lustre / Semi-gloss / Gloss Finish: a. Acrylic Latex – Premium Durability 1) 1 coat 3210 GRIPPER Interior/Exterior Primer Sealer 2) 2 coats 7200 DIAMOND 450 Interior Eggshell Paint or… 7300 DIAMOND 450 Interior Lo Lustre Paint or… 7400 DIAMOND 450 Interior Semi-Gloss Paint b. Acrylic Latex – Durability 1) 1 coat 3210 GRIPPER Interior/Exterior Primer Sealer 2) 2 coats 1403V DIAMOND 350 Interior Eggshell Paint or... 1407V DIAMOND 350 Interior Semi-Gloss Paint c. Acrylic Latex - No VOC/Low Odor: 1) 1 coat 9116 PREP & PRIME Odor-Less Primer-Sealer 2) 2 coats 9300 LIFEMASTER No VOC Interior Eggshell Paint or… 9200N LIFEMASTER No VOC Semi-Gloss Paint or… 9400 LIFEMASTER No VOC Interior Gloss Paint d. Acrylic Latex - Productivity 1) 1 coat 3210 GRIPPER Interior/Exterior Primer Sealer 2) 2 coats 1402N ULTRA-HIDE 250 Interior Eggshell Paint or... 1406N ULTRA-HIDE 250 Interior Semi-Gloss Paint or... 3028N ULTRA-HIDE 250 Interior/Exterior Gloss Paint e. Latex - Productivity 1) 1 coat 3210 GRIPPER Interior/Exterior Primer Sealer 2) 2 coats 1412V ULTRA-HIDE 150 Interior Eggshell Paint or… 1433V ULTRA-HIDE 150 Interior Lo Lustre Paint or… 1416V ULTRA-HIDE 150 Interior Semi-Gloss Paint

































or… 3038 ULTRA-HIDE 150 Interior/Exterior Gloss Paint f. Solvent-Based Alkyd: 1) 1 coat 3210 GRIPPER Interior/Exterior Primer Sealer 2) 2 coats 1310 Alkyd Final Sealer or… 1512 Alkyd Eggshell Interior Paint or... 1507 Alkyd Semi-Gloss Interior Paint g. Water-Based Alkyd: 1) 1 coat 3210 GRIPPER Interior/Exterior Primer Sealer 2) 2 coats 1502 LIFEMASTER OIL Interior/Exterior Eggshell or… 1506 LIFEMASTER OIL Interior/Exterior Semi-Gloss Paint or… 1508 LIFEMASTER OIL Interior/Exterior Gloss Paint h. Acrylic High Performance: 1) 1 coat 3210 GRIPPER Interior/Exterior Primer Sealer 2) 2 coats 4020 DEVFLEX 4020PF Direct to Metal Primer & Flat Finish or... 4212 DEVFLEX 4212HP High Performance Waterborne Acrylic Eggshell Enamel or… 4216L DEVFLEX 4216HP High Performance Waterborne Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel or… 659 DEVFLEX 659 Gloss DTM Waterborne Acrylic Enamel i. Water-Based Epoxy Coatings (HIPAC): 1) 2 coats 4426 TRU-GLAZE-WB 4426 Waterborne Epoxy Semi-Gloss Coating or... 4428 TRU-GLAZE-WB 4428 Waterborne Epoxy Gloss Coating j. Solvent-Based Epoxy Coatings (Chemical/Moisture Resistant): 1) 2 coats 224HS DEVRAN 224HS Semi-Gloss Epoxy High Build Coating or... 4508H TRU-GLAZE 4508 Gloss Epoxy Coating (return to “Interior Surfaces”) H. Wood – Floors and Steps: Specifier Note: Select as many of the following systems as applicable to a specific project and delete the others. 1. Satin / Semi-Gloss / Gloss Finish: a. Solvent-Based Alkyd Gloss: 1) 2 coats 3118 Concrete Coatings Polyurethane Floor Enamel (Add Skid-Tex for non-skid surface) b. Acrylic Latex Satin (no hot tire exposure): 1) 2 coats 3018N Concrete Coatings Acrylic Floor Enamel (Add Skid-Tex for non-skid surface) c. Water-Based Epoxy Coatings (HIPAC): 1) 2 coats 4426 TRU-GLAZE-WB 4426 Waterborne Epoxy Semi-Gloss Coating























or... 4428 TRU-GLAZE-WB 4428 Waterborne Epoxy Gloss Coating (Add Skid-Tex for non-skid surface) d. 1) 2 coats 224HS DEVRAN 224HS Semi-Gloss Epoxy High Build Coating or... 4508H TRU-GLAZE 4508 Gloss Epoxy Coating (Add Skid-Tex for non-skid surface) 2. Stained and Varnished Gloss Finish: a. Water-Based Varnish: 1) 1 coat 1700 WOOD PRIDE Oil-Based Wood Stain 2) 2 coats 1802 WOOD PRIDE Water-Based Satin Varnish or… 1808 WOOD PRIDE Water-Based Gloss Varnish b. Solvent-Based Polyurethane Varnish: 1) 1 coat 1700 WOOD PRIDE Oil-Based Wood Stain 2) 2 coats 1902 WOOD PRIDE Polyurethane Satin Varnish or… 1908 WOOD PRIDE Polyurethane Gloss Varnish 2. Clear Satin / Gloss Finish: a. Water-Based Varnish: 1) 1 coat 1808 WOOD PRIDE Water-Based Gloss Varnish 2) 2 coats 1802 WOOD PRIDE Water-Based Satin Varnish or… 1808 WOOD PRIDE Water-Based Gloss Varnish b. Solvent-Based Polyurethane Varnish: 1) 1 coat 1908 WOOD PRIDE Polyurethane Gloss Varnish 2) 2 coats 1902 WOOD PRIDE Polyurethane Satin Varnish or… 1908 WOOD PRIDE Polyurethane Gloss Varnish (return to “Interior Surfaces”) I. Metal - Unprimed Ferrous Metal: Specifier Note: Select as many of the following systems as applicable to a specific project and delete the others. Flat / Eggshell / Lo Lustre / Semi-gloss / Gloss Finish: a. Acrylic Latex – Premium Durability: 1) 1 coat 4020 DEVFLEX 4020PF DTM Primer & Flat Finish 2 coats 7100 DIAMOND 450 Interior Matte Paint or… 7200 DIAMOND 450 Interior Eggshell Paint or… 7300 DIAMOND 450 Interior Lo Lustre Paint or… 7400 DIAMOND 450 Interior Semi-Gloss Paint b. Acrylic Latex – Durability 1) 1 coat 4020 DEVFLEX 4020PF DTM Primer & Flat Finish 2) 2 coats 1201V DIAMOND 350 Interior Flat Paint or... 1403V DIAMOND 350 Interior Eggshell Paint or... 1407V DIAMOND 350 Interior Semi-Gloss Paint c. Acrylic Latex - No VOC/Low Odor: 1) 1 coat 4020 DEVFLEX 4020PF DTM Primer & Flat Finish 2) 2 coats 9100N LIFEMASTER No VOC Interior Flat Paint




























or… 9300 LIFEMASTER No VOC Interior Eggshell Paint or… 9200N LIFEMASTER No VOC Semi-Gloss Paint or… 9400 LIFEMASTER No VOC Interior Gloss Paint d. Acrylic Latex - Productivity: 1) 1 coat 4020 DEVFLEX 4020PF DTM Primer & Flat Finish 2) 2 coats 1200N ULTRA-HIDE 250 Interior Latex Flat Paint or... 1402N ULTRA-HIDE 250 Interior Eggshell Paint or... 1406N ULTRA-HIDE 250 Interior Semi-Gloss Paint or... 3028N ULTRA-HIDE 250 Interior/Exterior Gloss Paint e. Latex - Productivity: 1) 1 coat 4020 DEVFLEX 4020PF DTM Primer & Flat Finish 2) 2 coats 1210V ULTRA-HIDE 150 Interior Flat Paint or… 1412V ULTRA-HIDE 150 Interior Eggshell Paint or… 1433V ULTRA-HIDE 150 Interior Lo Lustre Paint or… 1416V ULTRA-HIDE 150 Interior Semi-Gloss Paint or… 3038 ULTRA-HIDE 150 Interior/Exterior Gloss Paint f. Solvent-Based Alkyd: 1) 1 coat 4160 DEVGUARD 4160 Multi-Purpose Tank & Structural Primer 2) 2 coats 1310 Alkyd Final Sealer Flat or… 1512 Alkyd Eggshell Interior Paint or... 1507 Alkyd Semi-Gloss Interior Paint g. Water-Based Alkyd: 1) 1 coat 4020 DEVFLEX 4020PF DTM Primer & Flat Finish 2) 2 coats 1502 LIFEMASTER OIL Interior/Exterior Eggshell or… 1506 LIFEMASTER OIL Interior/Exterior Semi-Gloss Paint or… 1508 LIFEMASTER OIL Interior/Exterior Gloss Paint h. Acrylic High Performance: 1) 1 coat 4020 DEVFLEX 4020PF DTM Primer & Flat Finish 2) 2 coats 4020 DEVFLEX 4020PF Direct to Metal Primer & Flat Finish or... 4212 DEVFLEX 4212HP High Performance Waterborne Acrylic Eggshell Enamel or… 4216L DEVFLEX 4216HP High Performance Waterborne Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel or… 659 DEVFLEX 659 Gloss DTM Waterborne Acrylic Enamel i. Water-Based Epoxy Coatings (HIPAC): 1) 1 coat 203 DEVRAN 203 Waterborne Epoxy Primer 2) 2 coats 4426 TRU-GLAZE-WB 4426 Waterborne Epoxy Semi-Gloss Coating or... 4428 TRU-GLAZE-WB 4428 Waterborne Epoxy Gloss Coating
































j. Solvent-Based Epoxy Coatings (Chemical/Moisture Resistant): 1) 1 coat 201H DEVRAN 201 Universal Epoxy Primer 2) 2 coats 224HS DEVRAN 224HS Semi-Gloss Epoxy High Build Coating or... 4508H TRU-GLAZE 4508 Gloss Epoxy Coating (return to “Interior Surfaces”) J. Metal - Galvanized: Specifier Note: Select as many of the following systems as applicable to a specific project and delete the others. Flat / Eggshell / Lo Lustre / Semi-gloss / Gloss Finish: a. Acrylic Latex – Premium Durability: 1) 1 coat 4020 DEVFLEX 4020PF DTM Primer & Flat Finish 2 coats 7100 DIAMOND 450 Interior Matte Paint or… 7200 DIAMOND 450 Interior Eggshell Paint or… 7300 DIAMOND 450 Interior Lo Lustre Paint or… 7400 DIAMOND 450 Interior Semi-Gloss Paint b. Acrylic Latex – Durability 1) 1 coat 4020 DEVFLEX 4020PF DTM Primer & Flat Finish 2) 2 coats 1201V DIAMOND 350 Interior Flat Paint or... 1403V DIAMOND 350 Interior Eggshell Paint or... 1407V DIAMOND 350 Interior Semi-Gloss Paint c. Acrylic Latex - No VOC/Low Odor: 1) 1 coat 4020 DEVFLEX 4020PF DTM Primer & Flat Finish 2) 2 coats 9100N LIFEMASTER No VOC Interior Flat Paint or… 9300 LIFEMASTER No VOC Interior Eggshell Paint or… 9200N LIFEMASTER No VOC Semi-Gloss Paint or… 9400 LIFEMASTER No VOC Interior Gloss Paint d. Acrylic Latex - Productivity: 1) 1 coat 4020 DEVFLEX 4020PF DTM Primer & Flat Finish 2) 2 coats 1200N ULTRA-HIDE 250 Interior Latex Flat Paint or... 1402N ULTRA-HIDE 250 Interior Eggshell Paint or... 1406N ULTRA-HIDE 250 Interior Semi-Gloss Paint or... 3028N ULTRA-HIDE 250 Interior/Exterior Gloss Paint e. Latex - Productivity: 1) 1 coat 4020 DEVFLEX 4020PF DTM Primer & Flat Finish 2) 2 coats 1210V ULTRA-HIDE 150 Interior Flat Paint or… 1412V ULTRA-HIDE 150 Interior Eggshell Paint or… 1433V ULTRA-HIDE 150 Interior Lo Lustre Paint or… 1416V ULTRA-HIDE 150 Interior Semi-Gloss Paint or… 3038 ULTRA-HIDE 150 Interior/Exterior Gloss Paint f. Solvent-Based Alkyd: 1) 1 coat 4160 DEVGUARD 4160 Multi-Purpose Tank & Structural Primer 2) 2 coats 1310 Alkyd Final Sealer Flat or… 1512 Alkyd Eggshell Interior Paint

































or... 1507 Alkyd Semi-Gloss Interior Paint g. Water-Based Alkyd: 1) 1 coat 4020 DEVFLEX 4020PF DTM Primer & Flat Finish 2) 2 coats 1502 LIFEMASTER OIL Interior/Exterior Eggshell or… 1506 LIFEMASTER OIL Interior/Exterior Semi-Gloss Paint or… 1508 LIFEMASTER OIL Interior/Exterior Gloss Paint h. Acrylic High Performance: 1) 1 coat 4020 DEVFLEX 4020PF DTM Primer & Flat Finish 2) 2 coats 4020 DEVFLEX 4020PF Direct to Metal Primer & Flat Finish or... 4212 DEVFLEX 4212HP High Performance Waterborne Acrylic Eggshell Enamel or… 4216L DEVFLEX 4216HP High Performance Waterborne Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel or… 659 DEVFLEX 659 Gloss DTM Waterborne Acrylic Enamel i. Water-Based Epoxy Coatings (HIPAC): 1) 1 coat 203 DEVRAN 203 Waterborne Epoxy Primer 2) 2 coats 4426 TRU-GLAZE-WB 4426 Waterborne Epoxy Semi-Gloss Coating or... 4428 TRU-GLAZE-WB 4428 Waterborne Epoxy Gloss Coating j. Solvent-Based Epoxy Coatings (Chemical/Moisture Resistant): 1) 1 coat 201H DEVRAN 201 Universal Epoxy Primer 2) 2 coats 224HS DEVRAN 224HS Semi-Gloss Epoxy High Build Coating or... 4508H TRU-GLAZE 4508 Gloss Epoxy Coating (return to “Interior Surfaces”) K. Metal - Aluminum: Specifier Note: Select as many of the following systems as applicable to a specific project and delete the others. Flat / Eggshell / Lo Lustre / Semi-gloss / Gloss Finish: a. Acrylic Latex – Premium Durability: 1) 1 coat 4020 DEVFLEX 4020PF DTM Primer & Flat Finish 2 coats 7100 DIAMOND 450 Interior Matte Paint or… 7200 DIAMOND 450 Interior Eggshell Paint or… 7300 DIAMOND 450 Interior Lo Lustre Paint or… 7400 DIAMOND 450 Interior Semi-Gloss Paint b. Acrylic Latex – Durability 1) 1 coat 4020 DEVFLEX 4020PF DTM Primer & Flat Finish 2) 2 coats 1201V DIAMOND 350 Interior Flat Paint or... 1403V DIAMOND 350 Interior Eggshell Paint or... 1407V DIAMOND 350 Interior Semi-Gloss Paint



























c. Acrylic Latex - No VOC/Low Odor: 1) 1 coat 4020 DEVFLEX 4020PF DTM Primer & Flat Finish 2) 2 coats 9100N LIFEMASTER No VOC Interior Flat Paint or… 9300 LIFEMASTER No VOC Interior Eggshell Paint or… 9200N LIFEMASTER No VOC Semi-Gloss Paint or… 9400 LIFEMASTER No VOC Interior Gloss Paint d. Acrylic Latex - Productivity: 1) 1 coat 4020 DEVFLEX 4020PF DTM Primer & Flat Finish 2) 2 coats 1200N ULTRA-HIDE 250 Interior Latex Flat Paint or... 1402N ULTRA-HIDE 250 Interior Eggshell Paint or... 1406N ULTRA-HIDE 250 Interior Semi-Gloss Paint or... 3028N ULTRA-HIDE 250 Interior/Exterior Gloss Paint e. Latex - Productivity: 1) 1 coat 4020 DEVFLEX 4020PF DTM Primer & Flat Finish 2) 2 coats 1210V ULTRA-HIDE 150 Interior Flat Paint or… 1412V ULTRA-HIDE 150 Interior Eggshell Paint or… 1433V ULTRA-HIDE 150 Interior Lo Lustre Paint or… 1416V ULTRA-HIDE 150 Interior Semi-Gloss Paint or… 3038 ULTRA-HIDE 150 Interior/Exterior Gloss Paint f. Solvent-Based Alkyd: 1) 1 coat 4160 DEVGUARD 4160 Multi-Purpose Tank & Structural Primer 2) 2 coats 1310 Alkyd Final Sealer Flat or… 1512 Alkyd Eggshell Interior Paint or... 1507 Alkyd Semi-Gloss Interior Paint g. Water-Based Alkyd: 1) 1 coat 4020 DEVFLEX 4020PF DTM Primer & Flat Finish 2) 2 coats 1502 LIFEMASTER OIL Interior/Exterior Eggshell or… 1506 LIFEMASTER OIL Interior/Exterior Semi-Gloss Paint or… 1508 LIFEMASTER OIL Interior/Exterior Gloss Paint h. Acrylic High Performance: 1) 1 coat 4020 DEVFLEX 4020PF DTM Primer & Flat Finish 2) 2 coats 4020 DEVFLEX 4020PF Direct to Metal Primer & Flat Finish or... 4212 DEVFLEX 4212HP High Performance Waterborne Acrylic Eggshell Enamel or… 4216L DEVFLEX 4216HP High Performance Waterborne Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel or… 659 DEVFLEX 659 Gloss DTM Waterborne Acrylic Enamel i. Water-Based Epoxy Coatings (HIPAC): 1) 1 coat 203 DEVRAN 203 Waterborne Epoxy Primer 2) 2 coats 4426 TRU-GLAZE-WB 4426 Waterborne Epoxy Semi-Gloss Coating

































or... 4428 TRU-GLAZE-WB 4428 Waterborne Epoxy Gloss Coating j. Solvent-Based Epoxy Coatings (Chemical/Moisture Resistant): 1) 1 coat 201H DEVRAN 201 Universal Epoxy Primer 2) 2 coats 224HS DEVRAN 224HS Semi-Gloss Epoxy High Build Coating or... 4508H TRU-GLAZE 4508 Gloss Epoxy Coating (return to “Interior Surfaces”) L. Metal - Shop Primed Ferrous Metal: Specifier Note: Select as many of the following systems as applicable to a specific project and delete the others. 1. Eggshell / Semi-gloss / Gloss Finish: a. Solvent-Based Alkyd High Performance: 1) 2 coats 4303 DEVGUARD 4303 Rust Preventative Eggshell Enamel or… 4306 DEVGUARD 4306 Rust Preventative Semi-Gloss Enamel or… 4308 DEVGUARD 4308 Alkyd Industrial Gloss Enamel b. Water-Based Alkyd: 1) 2 coats 1502 LIFEMASTER OIL Interior/Exterior Eggshell or… 1506 LIFEMASTER OIL Interior/Exterior Semi-Gloss Paint or… 1508 LIFEMASTER OIL Interior/Exterior Gloss Paint c. Acrylic High Performance: 1) 2 coats 4020 DEVFLEX 4020PF Direct to Metal Primer & Flat Finish or... 4212 DEVFLEX 4212HP High Performance Waterborne Acrylic Eggshell Enamel or… 4216L DEVFLEX 4216HP High Performance Waterborne Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel or… 659 DEVFLEX 659 Gloss DTM Waterborne Acrylic Enamel d. Water-Based Epoxy Coatings (HIPAC): 1) 1 coat 203 DEVRAN 203 Waterborne Epoxy Primer 2) 2 coats 4426 TRU-GLAZE-WB 4426 Waterborne Epoxy Semi-Gloss Coating or... 4428 TRU-GLAZE-WB 4428 Waterborne Epoxy Gloss Coating e. Solvent-Based Epoxy Coatings (Chemical/Moisture Resistant): 1) 1 coat 201H DEVRAN 201 Universal Epoxy Primer 2) 2 coats 224HS DEVRAN 224HS Semi-Gloss Epoxy High Build Coating or... 4508H TRU-GLAZE 4508 Gloss Epoxy Coating (return to “Interior Surfaces”)






















M. Metal - Handrails and Risers: Specifier Note: Select as many of the following systems as applicable to a specific project and delete the others. 1. Eggshell / Semi-gloss / Gloss Finish: a. Solvent-Based Alkyd High Performance: 1) 1 coat 4160 DEVGUARD 4160 Multi-Purpose Tank & Structural Primer 2) 2 coats 4303 DEVGUARD 4303 Rust Preventative Eggshell Enamel or… 4306 DEVGUARD 4306 Rust Preventative Semi-Gloss Enamel or… 4308 DEVGUARD 4308 Alkyd Industrial Gloss Enamel b. Water-Based Alkyd: 1) 1 coat 4020 DEVFLEX 4020PF Direct to Metal Primer & Flat Finish 2) 2 coats 1502 LIFEMASTER OIL Interior/Exterior Eggshell or… 1506 LIFEMASTER OIL Interior/Exterior Semi-Gloss Paint or… 1508 LIFEMASTER OIL Interior/Exterior Gloss Paint c. Acrylic High Performance: 1) 1 coat 4020 DEVFLEX 4020PF Direct to Metal Primer & Flat Finish 2) 2 coats 4020 DEVFLEX 4020PF Direct to Metal Primer & Flat Finish or... 4212 DEVFLEX 4212HP High Performance Waterborne Acrylic Eggshell Enamel or… 4216L DEVFLEX 4216HP High Performance Waterborne Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel or… 659 DEVFLEX 659 Gloss DTM Waterborne Acrylic Enamel d. Water-Based Epoxy Coatings (HIPAC): 1) 1 coat 203 DEVRAN 203 Waterborne Epoxy Primer 2) 2 coats 4426 TRU-GLAZE-WB 4426 Waterborne Epoxy Semi-Gloss Coating or... 4428 TRU-GLAZE-WB 4428 Waterborne Epoxy Gloss Coating e. Solvent-Based Epoxy Coatings (Chemical/Moisture Resistant): 1) 1 coat 201H DEVRAN 201 Universal Epoxy Primer 2) 2 coats 224HS DEVRAN 224HS Semi-Gloss Epoxy High Build Coating or... 4508H TRU-GLAZE 4508 Gloss Epoxy Coating (return to “Interior Surfaces”)





















N. Metal - Flooring, Steps, and Catwalks: Specifier Note: Select as many of the following systems as applicable to a specific project and delete the others. 1. Semi-Gloss / Gloss Finish: a. Solvent-Based Alkyd Gloss: 1) 2 coats 3118 Concrete Coatings Polyurethane Floor Enamel (Add Skid-Tex for non-skid surface) b. Water-Based Epoxy Coatings (HIPAC): 1) 2 coats 4426 TRU-GLAZE-WB 4426 Waterborne Epoxy Semi-Gloss Coating or... 4428 TRU-GLAZE-WB 4428 Waterborne Epoxy Gloss Coating (Add Skid-Tex for non-skid surface) c.. 1) 2 coats 224HS DEVRAN 224HS Semi-Gloss Epoxy High Build Coating or... 4508H TRU-GLAZE 4508 Gloss Epoxy Coating (Add Skid-Tex for non-skid surface) (return to “Interior Surfaces”) O. Metal - Machinery, Equipment and Fixtures (Shop Primed): Specifier Note: Select as many of the following systems as applicable to a specific project and delete the others. 1. Eggshell / Semi-gloss / Gloss Finish: a. Solvent-Based Alkyd High Performance: 1) 1 coat 4160 DEVGUARD 4160 Multi-Purpose Tank & Structural Primer 2) 2 coats 4303 DEVGUARD 4303 Rust Preventative Eggshell Enamel or… 4306 DEVGUARD 4306 Rust Preventative Semi-Gloss Enamel or… 4308 DEVGUARD 4308 Alkyd Industrial Gloss Enamel b. Water-Based Alkyd: 1) 1 coat 4020 DEVFLEX 4020PF Direct to Metal Primer & Flat Finish 2) 2 coats 1502 LIFEMASTER OIL Interior/Exterior Eggshell or… 1506 LIFEMASTER OIL Interior/Exterior Semi-Gloss Paint or… 1508 LIFEMASTER OIL Interior/Exterior Gloss Paint c. Acrylic High Performance: 1) 1 coat 4020 DEVFLEX 4020PF Direct to Metal Primer & Flat Finish 2) 2 coats 4216L DEVFLEX 4216HP High Performance Waterborne Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel or… 659 DEVFLEX 659 Gloss DTM Waterborne Acrylic Enamel d. Water-Based Epoxy Coatings (HIPAC):


















1) 1 coat 203 DEVRAN 203 Waterborne Epoxy Primer 2) 2 coats 4426 TRU-GLAZE-WB 4426 Waterborne Epoxy Semi-Gloss Coating or... 4428 TRU-GLAZE-WB 4428 Waterborne Epoxy Gloss Coating e. Solvent-Based Epoxy Coatings (Chemical/Moisture Resistant): 1) 1 coat 201H DEVRAN 201 Universal Epoxy Primer 2) 2 coats 224HS DEVRAN 224HS Semi-Gloss Epoxy High Build Coating or... 4508H TRU-GLAZE 4508 Gloss Epoxy Coating (return to “Interior Surfaces”) P. Metal - Decking (Ferrous Unprimed), Bar Joists (Unprimed): Specifier Note: Select as many of the following systems as applicable to a specific project and delete the others. 1. Flat / Eggshell / Semi-gloss Finish: a. Water-Based Acrylic Dryfall: 1) 1 coat 4020 DEVFLEX 4020PF Direct to Metal Primer & Flat Finish 2) 1 coat 1280 Waterborne Interior Flat Dry Fall or... 1482 Waterborne Interior Eggshell Dry Fall or... 1486 Waterborne Interior Semi-Gloss Dry Fall b. Solvent-Based Alkyd Dryfall: 1) 1 coat 4160 DEVGUARD 4160 Multi-Purpose Tank & Structural Primer 2) 1 coat 1380 Solventborne Interior Flat Dry Fall or… 1582 Solventborne Interior Eggshell Dry Fall or… 1586 Solventborne Interior Semi-Gloss Dry Fall c. Solvent-Based Modified Epoxy Dryfall: 1) 1 coat 4380 UNI-GRIP 4380 Modified Epoxy Flat Dry Fog Primer & Finish or… 4382 UNI-GRIP 4382 Modified Epoxy Eggshell Dry Fog Primer & Finish (return to “Interior Surfaces”) Q. Metal - Decking (Pre-Primed/Pre-Finished), Bar Joists (Shop Primed): Specifier Note: Select as many of the following systems as applicable to a specific project and delete the others. 1. Flat / Eggshell / Semi-gloss Finish: a. Water-Based Acrylic Dryfall: 1) 1 coat 4020 DEVFLEX 4020PF Direct to Metal Primer & Flat Finish 2) 1 coat 1280 Waterborne Interior Flat Dry Fall or... 1482 Waterborne Interior Eggshell Dry Fall or... 1486 Waterborne Interior Semi-Gloss Dry Fall b. Solvent-Based Alkyd Dryfall:













http://www.duspec.com/datasheet/datasheet.pdf?documentFormat=pdf&systemSetId=21&productCode=GP+1582&documentType=datasheet









1) 1 coat 1380 Solventborne Interior Flat Dry Fall or… 1582 Solventborne Interior Eggshell Dry Fall or… 1586 Solventborne Interior Semi-Gloss Dry Fall c. Solvent-Based Modified Epoxy Dryfall: 1) 1 coat 4380 UNI-GRIP 4380 Modified Epoxy Flat Dry Fog Primer & Finish or… 4382 UNI-GRIP 4382 Modified Epoxy Eggshell Dry Fog Primer & Finish (return to “Interior Surfaces”) R. Metal - Decking (Galvanized): Specifier Note: Select as many of the following systems as applicable to a specific project and delete the others. 1. Flat / Eggshell / Semi-gloss Finish: a. Water-Based Acrylic Dryfall: 1) 1 coat 1280 Waterborne Interior Flat Dry Fall or... 1482 Waterborne Interior Eggshell Dry Fall or... 1486 Waterborne Interior Semi-Gloss Dry Fall b. Solvent-Based Alkyd Dryfall: 1) 1 coat 1370 SPRAYMASTER DTG Direct-to-Galvanized Alkyd Flat Dryfall or 4160 DEVGUARD 4160 Multi-Purpose Tank & Structural Primer 2) 1 coat 1380 Solventborne Interior Flat Dry Fall or… 1582 Solventborne Interior Eggshell Dry Fall or… 1586 Solventborne Interior Semi-Gloss Dry Fall c. Solvent-Based Modified Epoxy Dryfall: 1) 1 coat 4380 UNI-GRIP 4380 Modified Epoxy Flat Dry Fog Primer & Finish or… 4382 UNI-GRIP 4382 Modified Epoxy Eggshell Dry Fog Primer & Finish (return to “Interior Surfaces”)

END OF INTERIOR SECTION
















Life Sciences Building / 4-6-12 09 96 56 - 1 Epoxy Coating

SECTION 09 96 56

DUR-A-WALL EPOXY COATING (20 mils) WITH ARMOR TOP

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condition and Division.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This section includes the following:

1. Epoxy wall coating system as shown on the drawings and in schedules.

B. Related sections include the following:

1. Concrete Curing, section 03 39 00

2. Unit Masonry, section 04 20 00

3. Plaster and Gypsum Board, section 09 20 00


A. The work shall consist of preparation of the substrate, the furnishing and application of a pigmented epoxy based wall coating system. The system shall have the color and texture as specified by the Owner with a nominal thickness of 20 mils. It shall be applied to the prepared area(s) as defined in the plans strictly in accordance with the Manufacturer’s recommendations.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Latest edition of Manufacturer’s literature including performance data and installation procedures.

B. Manufacturer’s material Safety Data sheet (MSDS) for each product being used.

C. Samples: A 6 inch square sample of the proposed system. Color, texture, and thickness shall be representative of overall appearance of finished system.


A. The Manufacturer shall have a minimum of 10 years experience in the production, sales, and technical support of epoxy industrial wall coating and related materials.

B. The Applicator shall have been approved by the system manufacturer in all phases of surface preparation and application of the product specified.

Epoxy Coating 09 96 56 - 2 Life Sciences Building / 4-6-12

C. No requests for substitutions shall be considered that would change the generic type of the specified System.

D. System shall be in compliance with requirements of United States Department of Agriculture (USDA), Food, Drug Administration (FDA), and local Health Department.

E. A pre-installation conference shall be held between Applicator, General Contractor and the Owner to review and clarification of this specification, application procedure, quality control, inspection and acceptance criteria and production schedule.

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Packing and Shipping

1. All components of the system shall be delivered to the site in the Manufacturer’s packaging, clearly identified with the product type and batch number.

B. Storage and Protection

1. The Applicator shall be provided with a storage area for all components. The area shall be between 60 F and 90 F, dry, out of direct sunlight and in accordance with the Manufacturer’s recommendations and relevant health and safety regulations.

2. Copies of Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all components shall be kept on site for review by the Engineer or other personnel.

C. Waste Disposal

1. The Applicator shall be provided with adequate disposal facilities for non-hazardous waste generated during installation of the system.


A. Site Requirements

1. Application may proceed while air, material and substrate temperatures are between 60 F and 90 F providing the substrate temperature is above the dew point. Outside of this range, the Manufacturer shall be consulted.

2. The relative humidity in the specific location of the application shall be less than 80% and the surface temperature shall be at least 5 F above the dew point.

3. The Applicator shall ensure that adequate ventilation is available for the work area.


4. The Applicator shall be supplied with adequate lighting equal to the final lighting level during the preparation and installation of the system.

B. Conditions of substrate to be coated with epoxy material.

1. Concrete shall be cured for a minimum of twenty eight days prior to the application of the coating system.

2. Block wall mortar joints have cured no less than 7 days under good conditions.

3. Sealers and curing agents are not to be used.

4. Drywall shall be completely clean and free of any oils, soap residue, and gypsum dust and prepared to a #4 to #5 finish.

C. Safety Requirements

1. All open flames and spark-producing equipment shall be removed from the work area prior to commencement of application.

2. “No Smoking” signs shall be posted at the entrances to the work area.

3. The Owner shall be responsible for the removal of foodstuffs from the work area.

4. Non-related personnel in the work area shall be kept to a minimum.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Dur-A-Flex, Inc. warrants that material shipped to buyers at the time of shipment substantially free from material defects and will perform substantially to Dur-A0Flex, Inc. published literature if used in accordance with the latest prescribed procedures and prior to the expiration date.

B. Dur-A-Flex, Inc. liability with respect to this warranty is strictly limited to the value of the material purchase.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COATING

A. Dur-A-Flex, Inc, Dur-A-Wall, Epoxy-Based seamless wall system

1. System Materials:

a. Primer: Dur-A-Flex, Inc. Dur-A-Gard No Sag resin and hardener.

b. Base Coat: Dur-A-Flex, Inc. Dur-A-Gard No Sag resin and hardener.

c. Top Coat: Dur-A-Flex, Inc. Armor Top


2. Patch Materials

a. Shallow Fill and Patching: Use Dur-A-Flex, Inc. Dur-A-Glaze #4 Cove-Rez.

2.2 MANUFACTURER

A. Dur-A-Flex, Inc., 95 Goodwin Street, East Hartford, CT 06108, Phone: (860) 528-9838, Fax: (860) 528-2802

B. Manufacturer of Approved System shall be single source and made in the USA.

2.3 PRODUCTION REQUIREMENTS

A. Primer, Base Coat Dur-A-Wall

1. Percent Solids 100%

2. VOC 3.45 g/L

3. Compressive Strength, ASTM D 695 16,000 psi

4. Tensile Strength, ASTM D 638 3,800 psi

5. Flexural Strength, ASTM D 790 4,000 psi

6. Abrasion Resistance, ASTM D 4060 C-10 Wheel, 1,000 gm load, 1,000 cycles 35 mg loss

7. Flame Spread/NFPA-101, ASTM E 84 Class A

8. Flammability, ASTM D 635 Self Extinguishing

9. Impact Resistance MIL D-3134 0.025 inch Max

10. Water Absorption. MIL D-3134 0.04%

11. Pot life @ 70° F 20-25 minutes

B. Topcoat Armor Top

1. VOC 0 g/L

2. 60 degree Gloss ASTM D523 75+/-5

3. Mixed Viscosity, (Brookfield 25°C) 500 cps

4. Tensile Strength, ASTM D 638 7,000 psi


5. Abrasion Resistance, ASTM D4060 Gloss Satin CS 17 wheel (1,00 g load) 1,000 cycles 4 8 mg loss with grit 10 12 mg loss without grit

6. Pot life @ 70°F 50% RH 2 hours

7. Dry properties, 70°F, 50% RH 8 hours tack free, 12 hours Dry

60°F, 30% RH 12 hours tack free, 18 hours Dry

80°F, 70% RH 4 hours tack free, 6 hours Dry

8. Flash Point PMCC 186°F

9. Full Chemical resistance 7 days

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, installation tolerances and other conditions affecting coating performance.

1. Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for installation and comply with requirements specified.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. General

1. New and existing concrete surfaces shall be free of oil, grease, curing compounds, loose particles, moss, algae growth, laitance, friable matter, and dirt.

2. There shall be no visible moisture present on the surface at the time of application of the system.

3. Remove loose mortar spatter, joint compounds etc.

4. Create a surface profile on concrete with sandblasting apparatus and/or dust-free diamond grinders.

5. Masonry block shall be clean, dry and coated with a high solids block filler.

6. Drywall shall be completely clean and free of any oils, soap residue, gypsum dust etc.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. General


1. The system shall be applied in four distinct steps as listed below:

a. Substrate preparation

b. Priming

c. Base coat application

d. Topcoat application

2. The handling, mixing and addition of components shall be performed in a safe manner to achieve the desired results in accordance with the Manufacturer’s recommendations.

3. The system shall follow the contour of the substrate.

4. A neat finish with well-defined boundaries and straight edges shall be provided by the Applicator.

B. Primer

1. The primer shall be mixed at the ratio of 2 parts resin to 1 part hardener per the manufacturer’s instructions.

2. The primer shall be applied by roller at the rate of 400 sf/gal to yield a dry film thickness of 4 mils.

C. Base Coat

1. The base coat shall be comprised of two components, a resin, and hardener as supplied by the Manufacturer.

2. The resin shall be added to the hardener and thoroughly mixed by suitably approved mechanical means.

3. The base coat shall be applied by a roller at the rate of 200 sf/gal to yield a dry film thickness of 8 mils.

D. Topcoat

1. The topcoat shall be comprised of two components, a resin, and hardener as supplied by the Manufacturer.

2. The resin shall be added to the hardener and thoroughly mixed by suitably approved mechanical means.

3. The topcoat shall be applied using a roller at the rate of 200 sf/gal to yield a dry thickness of 8 mils.

4. The finish wall coating will have a nominal thickness of 20 mils.



A. Tests, Inspection

1. The following tests shall be conducted by the Applicator:

a. Temperature

1. Air, substrate temperatures and, if applicable, dew point.

b. Coverage Rates

1. Rates for all layers shall be monitored by checking quantity of material used against the area covered.


A. Cure material in compliance with manufacturer’s directions, taking care to prevent their contamination during stages of application and prior to completion of the curing process.

B. Remove masking. Perform detail cleaning to leave cleanable surface for subsequent work of other sections.

END OF SECTION

Aluminum Sun Shade 10 70 13- 1 Chemistry Building 4-6-2012

SECTION 10 70 13

ALUMINUM SUN SHADES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Extruded aluminum stationary exterior sun control devices.


A. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete

B. Section 04 20 00 – Unit Masonry

C. Section 05 10 00 – Structural Metal Framing

D. Section 06 10 00 – Rough Carpentry

E. Section 07 42 13 – Metal Wall Panels

F. Section 07 60 00 – Flashings and Sheet Metal

G. Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealants

H. Section 09 91 00 – Painting

1.03 REFERENCES

A. AAMA 2604 – High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and

Panels.

B. AAMA 2605 – High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and

Panels.

C. ASCE 7 – Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures

D. ASTM B209 – Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and

Plate.

E. ASTM B221 – Standard Specifications for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.

F. ASTM D822 – Standard Practice for Filtered Open-Flame Carbon-Arc Exposure of Paint and Related Coatings.

Chemistry Building 4-6-2012 10 70 13 – 2 Aluminum Sun Shade

G. ASTM D4214 – Standard Test Method for Evaluating the Degree of Chalking of Exterior

Paint Films.

H. ASTM D2244 – Standard Test Method for Calculation of Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates.

I. ASTM E330 – Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.

1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIRMENTS

A. Provide sun control devices which have been manufactured, fabricated and installed to withstand loads from ASCE – 7, or local requirements of Authority Having Jurisdiction.

B. Sun control devices shall be designed to perform under conditions herein or required by site conditions with no permanent damage to or deforming of the sunshade blades or assembly, noise or metal fatigue caused by sunshade blade rattle or flutter, or permanent damage to fasteners or anchors.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 30 00

B. Product Data: For each product to be used, including:

1. Manufacturer’s product data including performance data. 2. Installation Instructions

3. Maintenance and Operations Manuals

C. Shop Drawings

1. Submit shop drawings indication materials, construction, dimensions, accessories,

and installation details.

D. Samples

1. Submit color chip samples for units with factory-applied paint.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications:

1. The manufacturer shall have implemented the management of quality objectives, continual improvement, and monitoring of customer satisfaction to assure that customer needs and expectations are met.


1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING

A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly indicating manufacturer and material

B. Storage: Store materials in a dry area indoors, protected from damage and in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

C. Handling: Protect materials and finishes during handling and installation to prevent

damage

D. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits

recommended by the manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environment conditions outside the manufacturer’s absolute limits.

B. Field Measurements: Verify actual measurements of openings by field measurements

before fabrication. Coordinate field measurements and fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid construction delays.

1.09 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer shall provide a standard limited warranty for sun control systems for a period of 1 year from date of installation, no more than 18 months after shipment from manufacturing plant. When notified in writing from the Owner of a manufacturing defect, manufacturer shall promptly correct deficiencies without cost to the owner.

B. Manufacturer shall provide 20 year limited warranty for fluoropolymer-based finish on aluminum substrates

1. Finish coating shall not peel, blister, chip, crack, or check.

2. Chalking, fading, or erosion of finish when measured by the following tests:

a. Finish coating shall not chalk in excess of 8 numerical ratings when measured in accordance with ASTM D4214.

b.Finish coating shall not change color or fade in excess of 5 NBS units as determined by ASTM D2244 and ASTM D822

c. Finish coating shall not erode at a rate in excess of .01 mils/year

confirmed by Florida test samples.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


2.01 SUN CONTROL DEVICES

A. Design basis: Sun Control Devices as manufactured by Industrial Louvers Inc. (ILI).

1. Contact: 511 South 7th Street, Delano, MN 55328; Telephone: (763) 972-2981; Fax: (763) 972-2911.

2.02 MATERIAL

A. Blades and fascia shall be fabricated from a minimum .125 (1/8”) wall thickness extruded aluminum. Blades shall be of design as indicated on drawings.

B. (Tapered) outrigger material shall be fabricated from a minimum .250 (1/4”) wall thickness plate aluminum.

C. Mounting brackets shall be fabricated from a minimum .375 (3/8”) wall thickness.

D. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221, Alloy 6063-T6

E. Fully mechanically fastened construction

2.03 FINISHES (FACTORY)

A. General: Comply with NAAMM “Metal Finishes Manual” for finish designations and application recommendations, except as otherwise indicated. Apply finishes in factory. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces prior to shipment. Remove scratches and blemishes from exposed surfaces that will be visible after completing finishing process. Provide color as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by architect.

B. Standard mill finish.

C. Prime Coat:

1. Apply alkyd prime coat following chemical cleaning and pretreatment.

2. Primer preparation for field painting.

D. Fluorocarbon Two Coat Finish

1. Coating shall conform to AAMA 2605.

2. Sun Control Devices to be finished with a minimum 1.0 mil (0.025 mm) thick full strength 70% resin, 2 coat Fluoropolymer system.

3. All aluminum shall be thoroughly cleaned, etched, and given a chromatic conversion pretreatment before application of coating.

E. Fluorocarbon Three Coat Finish


1. Coating shall conform to AAMA 2605.

2. Sun Control Devices to be finished with a minimum 1.4 mil (0.035 mm) thick full strength 70% resin, 3 coat Fluoropolymer system.

3. All aluminum shall be thoroughly cleaned, etched, and given a chromatic

conversion pretreatment before application of coating.

F. Clear Anodize

1. Class I Clear Anodize a. Comply with Aluminum Association AA-C22A41. Clear anodized finish

215-R1.

b.Apply finish following chemical etching and pretreatment

c. Minimum thickness: 0.7 mils (0.018 mm)

2. Class II Clear Anodize

a. Comply with Aluminum Association AA-C22A31. Clear anodized finish 204-R1.



G. Color Anodize

1. Class I Bronze Anodize

a. Light, Medium, Dark, Champagne

b.Comply with Aluminum Association AA-C2242 or AA-C2244.

c. Apply finish following chemical etching and pretreatment

d.Minimum thickness: 0.7 mils (0.018 mm)

2. Class I Black Anodize

a. Comply with Aluminum Association AA-C2242 or AA-C2244.




PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

B. Prepare surfaces using methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best results for the substrate under the project conditions.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install sun control devices at locations as indicated on the drawings and in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean sun control device surface in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Touch-up paint, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

Specifications - Penn State Personal Web Server

Documents

Transcript of Specifications - Penn State Personal Web Server